FACULTY OF GRADUATE STUDIES AND RESEARCH
LOCATION:
Graduate Studies and Research, Room 325
Research Services, Room 418
Windsor Hall Tower
TELEPHONE:
(519) 253-4232
Note: Some Faculties are not departmentalized. In such cases, reference to "Department" or "Department Head" should be read as "Faculty" or "Dean of the Faculty."
Dean, Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research, (Ext. 2109), Lois K. Smedick; B.A. (Wilson), M.S.L. (Pontifical Institute of Mediaeval Studies, Toronto), Ph.D. (Bryn Mawr)
Director: Dr. Ronald M. Barron
Director: Dr. Gordon D. Haffner
Director: Dr. Jacqueline Murray
Ex-officio Members (with vote) :
Dean, Chair, ex officio
Associate Vice-President, Research
University Librarian
President, Graduate Student Society
Elected Representatives from each department offering a graduate program
Student Representatives from each Faculty offering graduate programs
Academic Standing Committee
Admissions Committee
Awards Committee
Executive Committee
Graduate Development Committee
Graduate Support Committee
New Programs Committee
Nominating Committee
Membership elected annually from Graduate Council and graduate faculty
Chair: elected
Executive Secretary: Associate Vice-President, Research, ex officio
Six faculty members nominated by the Research Board and appointed by the President
Two appointees of the Board of Governors
Dean of Graduate Studies and Research, ex officio
The following committees report to the President of the University:
Animal Care Committee
Biohazards Committee
Ethics Committee
(For the chairs of these committees, contact the Office of Research Services.)
The Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research offers programs leading to the following degrees:
An application for admission may be obtained from the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research, University of Windsor, Windsor, Ontario, Canada N9B 3P4.
Applicants are advised to check departmental listings for deadlines. If an earlier deadline is not specified, applications, official transcripts, confidential reports, and a $35 (Canadian) fee should be submitted to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research by July 1 for September admission, November 1 for January admission, and March 1 for May admission.
All documents received become the property of the University and will not be returned.
All applications must be complete by the last date of registration.
Admission to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research is by letter of offer from the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research.
A decision to admit or not to admit is made by the Dean on the basis of a recommendation received from a department, school or Faculty, together with the documents required for admission.
A decision may be reconsidered upon the request of either the applicant or the department, school or Faculty if further information is offered.
Applicants who have not been admitted to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research may upgrade their qualifications and reapply. A subsequent decision would be made on the basis of a further recommendation from the department, school or Faculty and the updated file.
1.3.1 DEFERRED APPLICATIONS
Offers of admission are made for a specific term, and acceptance may be deferred for one term only. Students wishing to be considered for admission at a later date will normally be required to complete a new application and to resubmit their documents.
1.3.2 DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED
All documents received become the property of the University and will not be returned.
Action will be taken on an application for admission when all the documents listed below have been received:
1) The form "Application for Admission to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research" properly filled out.
2) Two official transcripts of all undergraduate and graduate work from all colleges or universities attended. The term "official" means that the transcripts are sent directly from the college or university concerned to this University.
3) Two completed Confidential Report forms as indicated on the application form; three forms are required for applicants to the Psychology and Communication Studies Departments. These should be sent directly by the persons reporting, and not by the applicant.
4) Graduate Record Examination (GRE): Applicants whose academic credentials are difficult to assess may be required to write the Graduate Record Examination administered by the Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey, U.S.A. 08540. Information on the GRE may be obtained from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
5) Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT): M.B.A. applicants are required to take the Graduate Management Admission Test prior to admission. Information on the GMAT may be obtained from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
6) For applicants whose native language is not English, a satisfactory score on an English proficiency test administered by one of the following institutions:
(a)The Educational Testing Service, Test of English as a Foreign Language (TOEFL): For information on arranging for this test the applicant should write to Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey, U.S.A. 08540.
(b)The English Language Institute of the University of Michigan, Michigan English Language Assessment Battery (MELAB): The applicant is expected to make arrangements for taking this test in his or her own locale by contacting the regional centre or by writing to the English Language Institute of the University of Michigan, Testing and Certification, North University Building, Ann Arbor, Michigan, U.S.A. 48109.
An applicant who is unable to take one of these tests must present satisfactory alternative evidence of English proficiency. Consideration of alternative evidence may be requested on an exceptional basis by writing to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research and presenting supporting documentation of English proficiency.
The two routes for admission to II Master's (Candidate) or I Ph.D. status each require four years (eight terms). The I Master's (Qualifying) designation is thus equivalent to Level IV of an honours Bachelor's program.
Students holding an honours degree in another discipline may be admitted to a two-year II Master's (Candidate) program.
Only students who have been admitted to a graduate program may receive graduate credit at the University of Windsor for courses taken.
1.3.4 POSTGRADUATE AWARDS
For information regarding graduate scholarships and other awards, see 31.
Students whose applications for admission to graduate study have been approved for full- or part-time study should present themselves to their Department for registration on the dates recorded in the Calendar of the Academic Year (see 32). Part-time students may register by mail on the forms provided by mail from the Office of the Registrar or the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
The University designates graduate students as full- or part-time:
1) Full-Time Student: A student who is admitted to a program on a full-time basis and who meets the following criteria will be registered as a full-time student:
(a)is geographically available and visits the campus regularly. It is understood that a graduate student may be absent from the University while still under supervision, e.g., visiting libraries, attending a graduate course at another institution, doing field work, etc. If such period of absence exceeds four weeks in any term, written evidence must be available in the Graduate Studies Office to the effect that the absence has the approval of the Department Head and of the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research;
(b)is regularly employed on other work, or by the University, for not more than an average of ten hours a week. If a student is employed as a teaching assistant or demonstrator, the ten hours a week should represent the total time spent by the student in connection with the appointment, including time spent on preparation, reading set assignments, marking examinations, etc.2) Part-Time Student: Some graduate programs are available on a part-time basis. Students interested in part-time studies should first ccnsult the Department Head. If a student has not been accepted on a part-time basis at first registration, he or she must petition the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research for permission to transfer to part-time status for cause. Such petitions will not normally be granted to students meeting criteria (a) and (b) above for full-time students. However, petitions based on domestic responsibilities which demand more than ten hours a week will be considered.
Note: Part-time students may not take more than two courses in any term. Registration in any given term for a major paper, thesis, or dissertation is counted as the equivalent of one course.
Resident/Post-Resident Student: See the academic regulations concerning Residence in 1.5.2 and 1.6.2. For purposes of assigning fees, the residence period is defined as three terms of full-time study at the Master's level or nine terms of full-time study at the doctoral level (six terms after Master's level). Graduate students must apply to the Office of Graduate Studies and Research to establish post-resident status for fee purposes if applicable.
Graduate Registration Regulations
1) Graduate students must register before the proper deadline or they will not receive credit for academic work they may be doing during the term. Note: Registration is not complete until the appropriate fees have been paid.
2) Graduate students must be registered in the term preceding the proper deadline for Spring or Fall Convocation in order to be permitted to graduate. Students must also file an "Application for Graduation" in the Registrar's Office.
3) Full-time students are required to maintain continuous registration through all terms of their graduate program. Failure to do so will require application for readmission to their program and payment for terms missed up to a maximum of three terms.
4) In accordance with the circumstances listed below, a full-time student may apply to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research for, and may be granted, a leave of absence.
Maternity Leave: Graduate students may request a maternity leave for no more than three consecutive terms without prejudice to their academic standing.
Paternity Leave: In recognition of a father's role, a graduate student may request paternity leave for no more than one term without prejudice to academic standing.
Parental Leave: Parental leave is intended to recognize the need for a pause in studies in order to provide full-time care in the first stages of parenting a child. Either or both parents may request one term of leave. The request for leave must be completed within twelve months of the date of birth or custody.
Financial Leave: In the case of financial necessity, primarily as evidenced by the support awarded through the University, a student shall be granted a leave of no more than one term out of three upon application.
Medical Leave: Graduate students may apply for a leave of absence on medical grounds for up to three terms without prejudice to their academic standing. Students are required to provide documentation to support a medical leave absence.
Personal Leave: Graduate students may apply for a leave of absence on grounds of serious personal circumstances for up to three terms without prejudice to their academic standing. Examples, though not wholly inclusive, are death in the immediate family, psychological difficulties, and educational opportunities (B.Ed., LL.B.).3
A term is defined as a four-month period coinciding with the academic calendar (January to April; May to August; and September to December).
While on leave, a student may not continue the formal thesis process. This includes regular access to and guidance by faculty members, and the continuation of laboratory experiments and computer research applications.
Apart from the combination of maternity or paternity and parental leave, sequentially combining two leave of absence classifications is allowable only in special and extenuating circumstances.
Applications may be filed at any time and shall be processed within three weeks of receipt by the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. A student on leave of absence will be assessed a fee of fifty dollars ($50.00) per term. Appeals against any decisions shall be heard promptly by the Graduate Appeals Committee.
5) Part-time students must register in every session in which the facilities of the University are to be utilized, whether in residence or off-campus. This includes those who are consulting with faculty members while working on a major paper, thesis, or dissertation. Part-time students who have not registered in two consecutive terms will be required to apply for readmission, and their applications will be considered on their merits in the light of the then prevailing conditions and circumstances.
6) Students are reminded that they will not receive credit for courses for which they are not properly registered or for courses completed during terms in which the student has not paid fees.
Once a student has registered, course changes or withdrawal require permission from the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. Subjects dropped without permission from the Dean will be regarded as failures.
Provisional and Non-Degree Registration: A provisional registrant is one who is allowed to attend classes while the application is still under consideration. A student whose application is not complete by the regular registration period may be allowed to register provisionally. All required forms and documents must be submitted before the last day of registration.
A student who is not interested in admission as a degree student may be allowed to register for individual courses on a non-degree basis. The normal maximum of courses taken on this basis is two. Only students who have been admitted to a graduate program may receive graduate credit at the University of Windsor for courses taken.
Audit Student: An audit student in any course is one who attends the course without credit toward a degree or program, and who is not entered or registered on the official University records or lists for purposes of academic or degree credit or transcripts. Such a student will not be allowed to write examinations and cannot be graded in any way. The student will normally pay the regular fees for the course(s).
The University expects that all researchers will adhere to the proper standards of intellectual honesty in the written or spoken presentation of their work and will at all times acknowledge in a suitable manner the contribution made by other researchers to their work, as outlined in the Senate Policy on Authorship (available from the Clerk of the Senate).
Plagiarism is defined as:
The act of appropriating the literary composition of another, or parts of passages of his/her writing, or the ideas or language of the same, and passing them off as the products of one's own mind. (Black's Law Dictionary)
It is expected that all graduate students will be evaluated and graded on their individual merit, and all work submitted for evaluation should clearly indicate that it is the student's own contribution.
Graduate students often have to use the ideas of others as expressed in written or published work in preparing essays, papers, reports, theses and publications. It is imperative that both the data and ideas obtained from any and all published or unpublished material be properly acknowledged and their sources disclosed. Failure to follow this practice constitutes plagiarism and is considered to be a serious offence by this Faculty. Thus, anyone who knowingly or recklessly uses the work of another person and creates an impression that it is his or her own is guilty of plagiarism.
It is not permissible for an essay or other paper to be submitted twice. It is expected that a thesis, essay, paper or report has not been, and is not concurrently being, submitted to any other faculty or university for credit toward any degree, or to this Faculty for any other course. In exceptional circumstances and with the prior agreement of the instructor, a student may use research completed for one course as part of his or her written work for a second course.
Where plagiarized work has been submitted or where a student has submitted a paper for double credit, an F grade shall be assigned by the instructor both to that assignment and to the course. The student has the right to appeal this grade to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research, in accordance with the Graduate Appeals Policy as stated in Senate Bylaw 51.B. In more serious cases, e.g., breach of the above regulation on more than one occasion, and upon recommendation by the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research that disciplinary action be taken, the matter will be submitted to the University Committee on Student Affairs for appropriate sanctions, which include admonition, censure, disciplinary probation, restitution, suspension or expulsion, as set out in Senate Bylaw 31.
In case of any doubt, students are strongly urged to consult with the instructor or thesis supervisor. In cases where students feel that their intellectual property or copyrighted material has been plagiarized, complaints should be made to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research.
For the standards which are required in specific degree programs, see 1.5 (PhD) and 1.6 (Master's).
A+, A, A-, B+, B, B-, C+, C, C-, D+, D, D-, F, F-NR (Failure, No Record)
Note: Grades of D+, D, and D- are assigned in undergraduate courses only. For graduate courses, grading below C- is by assigning of F.
INC (Incomplete—course work only)
IP (In Progress—major paper, thesis, or dissertation)
P or NP (Pass or Non-Pass)
S or U (Satisfactory or Unsatisfactory)
The final deadline for dropping one-term (i.e., twelve- or thirteen-week) graduate courses in Fall, Winter, or Summer term without a grade being assigned is eight weeks from the start of the term; for six-week courses in Intersession and Summer Session, three weeks are allowed. Prior to the deadline, courses dropped will be recorded as "Voluntary Withdrawal".
The granting of an Incomplete grade must follow discussion between the student and the course instructor concerning the nature of the work to be completed and the time period for completion. Courses recorded as Incomplete must be completed and a grade reported within twelve months maximum of the original due date unless an earlier deadline has been established. If such courses are not completed within twelve months, they will be permanently designated as Incomplete on the student's transcript. Normally, a student may carry only one Incomplete grade at a time. Graduate students carrying more than one Incomplete grade at the end of a term will have their progress reviewed by their Department, and a recommendation will be forwarded in each case to the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
The Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research requires that students maintain at least a B- average at all times.
Courses in which a grade of B- or higher is received will be accepted for graduate credit. In addition, upon the positive recommendation of the Department concerned, the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research may grant credit for not more than two term courses in which a grade of C+, C or C- has been obtained. The regulations of individual departments should be consulted for their particular policies on Incomplete and C grades.
If a student fails to obtain credit in a course, the course may be repeated once only, at the discretion of the Department concerned and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. No student may repeat, or replace with another course, more than two term courses in which credit was not obtained.
Theses and major papers, for which a letter grade is assigned, must be graded B- or better to receive credit.
A Department may require either oral or written examinations in graduate courses.
Each instructor must inform his or her students, by the end of the second week of each course, concerning the following:
(a)the basis for determining the final grade in the course;
(b)the approximate dates for tests, essays, etc.
Alterations in the announced procedure may be made by the instructor with the consent of the majority of the registered class.
A student who misses an examination or wishes to receive consideration on account of a serious illness, a bereavement, or other grave reason prior to or during the examination period should communicate with the Head of the Department concerned as soon as possible, and must submit supporting documents (e.g., a medical certificate) before or during the examination period but no later than one week after the scheduled examination. In such cases, the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research, on recommendation of the Department and the Academic Standing Committee, may grant aegrotat standing in the subject or subjects concerned on the basis of the term mark, or approve an Incomplete grade or a supplemental examination.
Graduate appeals must be made in writing to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research, in accordance with the Graduate Appeals Policy as stated in Senate Bylaw 51.B. Appeals must be received no later than one month after the grade or decision has been released by the Registrar.
In order to allow the necessary time for the printing of the diploma and the Convocation program, the candidate's completed work must be approved by the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research and the thesis or dissertation, if one is presented, must be received by the Office of Graduate Studies and Research for transmission to the Leddy Library at least two weeks before Convocation.
Students wishing to graduate must be registered in the term preceding the proper deadline for Spring or Fall Convocation in order to be permitted to graduate.
Registration in any program does not constitute an application for a degree or diploma. An official application to graduate must be completed and filed in the Registrar's Office by the specified date prior to the Convocation at which the applicant expects to graduate.
For levels of study, see 1.3.3.
Graduates of recognized colleges or universities may apply for admission. In general, admission to graduate study is granted only to those students who have good academic records and who are adequately prepared to undertake graduate work in their field of specialization. In particular, an applicant for admission to a graduate program leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must have either a Master's degree or an honours Bachelor's degree, or the equivalent; his or her academic standing should be unquestionably superior.
Possession of the minimum requirements does not ensure acceptance.
Applications will be received from students in their final undergraduate or Master's year, but acceptance will be conditional until a satisfactorily completed record is submitted.
Candidacy: Admission to graduate study does not imply admission to candidacy for a degree. Admission to candidacy for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy is granted by the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research, upon recommendation of the Department concerned, when a student has satisfied the requirements for candidacy of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research and of the Department, as these may be specified in departmental listings in the calendar. Admission to candidacy is normally to be regarded as recognition that a student has given adequate evidence of superior capability and achievement in graduate study. A student may not be admitted to candidacy for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy before passing a comprehensive examination in the field of specialization.
Residence: Residence requirements are intended to provide for each student an adequate contact with the University, with the faculty in the field of specialization, and with the library, laboratories, and other facilities for graduate study and research. Every student in a program leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy must be registered in a full-time program of study for a minimum of three calendar years, normally in succession. Credit for one of these years may be given for the time spent in proceeding to a Master's degree in this University.
Credit for one of the three years of residence, but not more than one year, may be given for work done at another institution. In no case shall the student spend fewer than two of the three required years of residence in full-time attendance at this University.
A full-time residence year indicates that a student is in full-time work under the direction of the Department at the University of Windsor. Persons who teach more that three hours a week or who demonstrate in laboratories to such an extent that the total time spent in preparation, demonstration and working exceeds ten hours a week cannot qualify for residence credit. Candidates working part-time outside the University must also stay under the ten-hour limit if residence credit is desired.
Time Limit: A student admitted to a PhD program requiring full-time attendance for three years must complete all requirements for the PhD within seven consecutive years.
A student admitted with one year's advanced standing (e.g., holders of Master's degrees) must complete all requirements within six consecutive years.
If an extension of the time limit becomes necessary, the student should address a petition to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research giving reasons for the request and plans for the completion of the work. A student who exceeds the time limit may be required to take additional qualifying examinations or additional course work, or both.
Course of Study: Course requirements are specified in the departmental listings. Planning and direction of the student's course of study are the responsibility of the Head of the Department or a designated departmental advisor. A specific program of study should be worked out at the time of the student's first registration, in consultation with the Head of the Department or an advisor.
Since in several departments only a few courses listed will be offered each year, students are advised to ascertain from the Department Head or academic advisor which courses will be offered in any given year.
Training in methodology may be required, at the discretion of the Department. It is expected that students working toward the degree of Doctor of Philosophy will maintain a superior average in all course work. Normally, graduate credit will be given only for A or B standing in a course. Concerning credit for C grades, see 1.4.3.
After consultation between student and professor and authorization by the latter's Department Head, a graduate course may be recorded INC (Incomplete) when:
1) The student has completed the class work but is unable to take the end of course examination because of illness or other acceptable reason, or 2)
(a)the student is unable to complete the work for the course because of illness or other acceptable reason, and
(b)the student has done satisfactory work in the course, and
(c)in the opinion of the professor, the student can complete the normally required work of the course without repeating the course in class.
The granting of an Incomplete grade must follow discussion between the student and the course instructor concerning the nature of the work to be completed and the time period for completion. Courses recorded as Incomplete must be completed and a grade reported within twelve months maximum of the original due date unless an earlier deadline has been established. If such courses are not completed within twelve months, they will be permanently designated as Incomplete on the student's transcript. Normally, a student may carry only one Incomplete grade at a time. Graduate students carrying more than one Incomplete grade at the end of a term will have their progress reviewed by their Department, and a recommendation will be forwarded in each case to the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
Incomplete grades are not granted for dissertations (see 1.4.3).
Committees: Research undertaken as part of a doctoral program is normally directed and supervised by a doctoral committee. The Head of the Department will appoint the doctoral committee, which must be approved by the Executive Committee of the Faculty Council of Graduate Studies and Research.
Within the first term of registration at doctoral level, each student will be assigned a committee consisting of a research advisor, two other faculty members in the Department, and one from another department at the University of Windsor. Additional members may be added with the approval of the Department Head and the Executive Committee of the Faculty Council of Graduate Studies and Research. This committee will, from time to time, review the student's progress.
The doctoral committee is also charged with conduct of the final examination of the doctoral candidate (see below).
For the defense of the dissertation (final oral examination), the committee will be supplemented by an independent, external examiner who, as an expert in the field in which the candidate's research is carried out, will appraise the dissertation and ordinarily will also be present at the final oral examination.
The external examiner will be recommended by the doctoral committee, subject to the approval of the Department Head and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. The external examiner must not be involved in the preparation of the dissertation before it is submitted to him or her for final evaluation.
If the research involves human ethics, animal care, or biohazards, the supervisor of the dissertation is responsible for obtaining prior approval from the respective committees governing the above topics. (Consult the Office of Research Services.)
A dissertation embodying the results of an original investigation in the field of specialization is required of all candidates for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy. Before beginning the dissertation, the candidate should submit a prospectus, outlining the problem proposed. Copies of this prospectus should be filed with the doctoral committee not later than four weeks after the student is admitted to candidacy. At the same time, the candidate will be required to validate a document supplied by the Department, a Copyright License, authorizing the University to make a single copy of the prospective dissertation, or substantial parts of it, at any given time at the request of a library user at this University or a library user at another university for actual cost of reproduction only.
The regulations of individual departments or faculties should be consulted for details of their dissertation procedures. The general format is prescribed in the Procedures to Follow in Preparing a Thesis or Dissertation, which may be obtained from the Academic Assistant in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Within the dissertation, the student should use forms approved for scholarly publication in the field of specialization and approved by the Department. Final checking of the general format of the dissertation is the responsibility of the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, but the student should consult the doctoral committee for instructions as to the internal form of the dissertation.
Five copies of the completed dissertation must be submitted to the Department at least three weeks before the oral presentation of the dissertation. The oral presentation must be completed at least three weeks prior to the Convocation for which the candidate has applied to receive the degree. A public notice of defense must be received in the Graduate Office and posted in the Department at least one week in advance of the oral presentation. Copies of the corrected dissertation must be deposited with the Academic Assistant in the Graduate Office for transmission to the Leddy Library at least two weeks prior to Convocation.
The candidate must also submit at this time five copies of an abstract of no more that 350 words and five copies of a vita, which will be bound with the dissertation. The abstract will be published in Dissertation Abstracts International. The title page of the dissertation, or a separate page immediately following the title page, must bear the Universal Copyright Convention symbol ©, the full name of the author, and the year the doctoral degree was granted. Arrangements for binding the dissertation and payment of fees connected with binding and mircrofilming should be made with the Academic Assistant in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. At such time as the Department gives approval, the Office of Graduate Studies and Research will transmit the original copy of the dissertation to the National Library, accompanied by Form NL/BN91, supplied by the Office and validated by the candidate, which authorizes the National Library to produce single microform copies for a nominal sum to cover costs, in response to a written request from an individual, a research institute, or a library.
If approved, the physical dissertation becomes the property of the University. Two copies, the original (after return from the National Library) and one other, will be filed in the Leddy Library, and a third copy in the Department.
After the granting of the degree, and at such time as the Department gives approval, the University will have the dissertation microfilmed. One microfiche copy will be deposited in the Leddy Library and will be available for interlibrary loan. The availability of the dissertation in fiche form will be announced by the published abstract sent to various libraries.
1) Dissertation format must be as prescribed by Procedures to Follow in Preparing a Thesis or Dissertation.
2) Five copies of Dissertation must be submitted to Department at least three weeks before oral presentation prior to Convocation at which candidate has applied to receive degree.
3) Five copies of Abstract (no more than 350 words) are to be filed, one to be bound with each copy of Dissertation. In addition, five copies of vita are required.
4) Public notice of defense must be received in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research and posted in the Department at least one week in advance.
5) Following successful defense, the candidate will deposit three copies of Dissertation, Abstract, and vita in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research for binding and distribution (two for the Leddy Library, one for the Department).
6) The candidate will validate Form NL/BN91, supplied by the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, authorizing the National Library to produce single microform copies. The title page of Dissertation, or separate page following, must bear the Universal Copyright Convention symbol ©, full name of author, and year doctoral degree was granted.
7) Fees for above are to be paid at time of deposit of Dissertation in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
Examinations: In addition to the usual examinations on course work, there are three types of special examinations which may be required (see departmental regulations) in the program leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy:
1) Qualifying Examinations: A qualifying examination is one in which the student is asked to demonstrate a reasonable mastery of the fundamentals in the major subject; it is designed to test the student's preparation for advanced graduate work. If such an examination is required, it must be administered and passed within one year after a student enters a graduate program.
2) Comprehensive Examinations: The comprehensive examination is one in which the student is asked to demonstrate a reasonable mastery of the field of specialization; it is designed to test the student's command of knowledge and ability to integrate that knowledge, after completion of all or most of the graduate course work. Normally, this examination is completed at the end of the second year of graduate study and is a prerequisite to admission to candidacy.
3) Final Examinations: Traditionally, the final examination of a doctoral candidate is an oral defense of the dissertation. A Department may, however, permit as a substitute for this oral examination the delivery of a public lecture by the candidate for members of the Faculty and graduate students, on the subject of the research. In any case, the passing of this examination is taken to require a sufficient degree of attainment that grading is not necessary. Candidates who are found to lack a suitably high level of achievement may be required to repeat this examination. External examiners shall be invited to this examination, whatever form it may take.
The Master's Degree
For levels of study, see 1.3.3.
Graduates of recognized colleges or universities may be admitted to programs leading to the Master's degree. A student with an honours Bachelor's degree or its equivalent, with standing at least in the B range overall and in both the final two years of study and the major subject, may be admitted to a one-year Master's program (II Master's Candidate). A student with a general Bachelor's degree, with standing at least in the B range overall and in the final year of study and the major subject, may be admitted to a two-year Master's program (I Master's Qualifying followed by II Master's Candidate). A student holding an honours degree in another discipline may also be admitted to a two-year Master's program (II Master's Candidate) provided he or she has sufficient related credits and meets all other requirements for admission.
Applicants are urged to apply as early as possible to enable the Department and the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research to evaluate qualifications, and the Department to work out a program.
Possession of the minimum requirements does not ensure acceptance.
Candidacy: A student in a one- or two-year II Master's Candidate program is also a candidate for the Master's degree. Students in the two-year I Master's Qualifying followed by II Master's Candidate program are not admitted to candidacy until they have satisfactorily completed the I Master's Qualifying program. A positive recommendation from a Department and approval of that recommendation are required for a student to proceed to the II Master's Candidate program.
Residence: Residence requirements are intended to provide for each student an adequate contact with the University, with the faculty in the field of specialization, and with the library, laboratories, and other facilities for graduate study and research. It is expected, therefore, that every student in a program leading to the Master's degree will undertake a full program of study for a minimum of one calendar year or its equivalent. Application and interpretation of the residence requirement is the responsibility of the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. If a student does not expect to fulfill the residence requirement in the normal way, reasons for departing from the norm should be submitted in writing to the Dean and approval secured for the plan before beginning the graduate program. See also the section on "Duration of Study" below.
The residency requirement is not intended to apply to students admitted to graduate programs on a part-time basis.
Duration of Study: The normal minimum duration of study for the Master's degree is one calendar year beyond the honours Bachelor's degree, or its equivalent. Credit for graduate study previously undertaken may be given, but the duration of study at this University may not normally be reduced below the minimum of one year.
Time Limit: Work on a Master's degree must be completed within three consecutive calendar years after the student's first registration, except for certain Master's programs available on a part-time basis. In these latter programs, the time limit will depend on the nature of the program, but will not generally exceed five consecutive years. Please consult individual departmental regulations for information concerning the time limit of programs given on a part-time basis.
If an extension of these time limits becomes necessary, the student should address a petition to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research giving reasons for the request and plans for the completion of the work. A student who exceeds the time limit may be required to take additional qualifying examinations or additional course work, or both.
Course of Study: Course requirements are specified in the departmental listings. Planning and direction of the student's course of study are the responsibility of the Head of the Department or a designated departmental advisor. A specific program of study should be worked out at the time of the student's first registration, in consultation with the Head of the Department or an advisor. Students are directed to obtain the approval of the Head or designated advisor for changes in the program of study.
Training in methodology may be required, at the discretion of the Department. Students working toward the Master's degree must maintain at least a B- average in all course work. A candidate for the Master's degree who does not obtain graduate credit in any course may repeat the course once only, and not more than one course may be repeated. Normally, graduate credit will be given only for A or B standing in a course. Concerning credit for C grades, see 1.4.3. Letter grades or Satisfactory/Unsatisfactory may be assigned for theses and major papers, depending on departmental policy.
After consultation between student and professor and authorization by the latter's Department Head, a graduate course may be recorded as INC (Incomplete) when:
1) the student has completed the class work but is unable to take the end of course examination because of illness or other acceptable reason, or
2)
(a)the student is unable to complete the work for the course because of illness or other acceptable reason, and
(b)the student has done satisfactory work in the course, and
(c)in the opinion of the professor, the student can complete the normally required work in the course without repeating the course in class.
The granting of an Incomplete grade must follow discussion between the student and the course instructor concerning the nature of the work to be completed and the time period for completion. Courses recorded as Incomplete must be completed and a grade reported within twelve months maximum of the original due date, unless an earlier deadline has been established. If such courses are not completed within twelve months, they will be permanently designated as Incomplete on the student's transcript. Normally, a student may carry only one Incomplete grade at a time. Graduate students carrying more than one Incomplete grade at the end of a term will have their progress reviewed by their Department, and a recommendation will be forwarded in each case to the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
Incomplete grades are not granted for theses or major papers (see 1.4.3).
Committees: Research undertaken as part of a Master's program is normally directed and supervised by a Master's committee. The Head of the Department will appoint the Master's committee, which must be approved by the Executive Committee of the Faculty Council of Graduate Studies and Research. The Head will normally appoint the chairperson of this committee not later than one month after registration in the student's final Candidate year, and the remaining members of the committee some time before the end of the first term.
The Master's committee will include as a minimum the chief advisor as chairperson, and two other University of Windsor faculty members, one of whom shall belong to a Department other than the one in which the student is obtaining the degree. Additional members may be added with the approval of the Department Head and the Executive Committee of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. The member(s) from outside the Department need not participate in the direction of research but shall contribute a judgment on its completion.
The Master's committee is also charged with conduct of the final examination of the Master's candidate (see below).
If the research involves human ethics, animal care, or biohazards, the supervisor of the thesis is responsible for obtaining prior approval from the respective committees governing the above topics. (Consult the Office of Research Services.)
A thesis incorporating the results of an investigation in the field of the major subject may be required of candidates for the Master's degree.
Candidates for some Master's programs may choose, instead of the course of study including a thesis, a program requiring additional course work and/or the submission of a major paper or project on which there will be a final evaluation. The regulations of individual departments should be consulted for details of their thesis or major paper requirements. Letter grades or Satifactory/Unsatisfactory may be assigned for theses and major papers, depending on departmental policy.
With the exception of the general format prescribed in the style manual cited below, regulations concerning full library binding, copyright application, and microfilming by the National Library do not apply for the candidate who has elected the major paper program. One copy of the major paper may be required for library deposit by the Department, School or non-departmentalized Faculty. Major papers are available to library users for examination in the Reserve Reading Room of the Leddy Library.
Although in some cases it may be acceptable for more than one candidate to make use of a common set of data or research findings, each candidate is responsible for a single-authored thesis/major paper.
Not later than one month after registration in the student's final year, the candidate will be required to validate a document supplied by the Department, a Copyright License, authorizing the University to make a single copy of the prospective thesis, or substantial parts of it, at any given time at the request of a library user at this University or a library user at another university for actual cost of reproduction only.
The regulations of individual departments should be consulted for details of their procedures. The general format is prescribed in Procedures to Follow in Preparing a Thesis or Dissertation, which may be obtained from the Academic Assistant in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Within the thesis, the student should use forms approved for scholarly publication in the field of specialization and approved by the Department. Final checking of the general format of the thesis is the responsibility of the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, but the student should consult the Master's committee for instructions as to the internal form of the thesis.
Three copies of the completed thesis (four for M.Sc. candidates) must be submitted to the Department at least three weeks before the oral presentation of the thesis. The oral presentation must be completed at least three weeks prior to the Convocation at which the candidate expects to receive the degree. A public notice of defense must be received in the Graduate Office and posted in the Department at least one week in advance of the oral presentation. Copies of the corrected thesis must be deposited in the Graduate Office for transmission to the Leddy Library at least two weeks prior to Convocation.
The candidate must also submit at this time three (or four) copies of an abstract of no more than 350 words and three (or four) copies of a vita, which will be bound with the thesis. The abstract will be published in Masters Abstracts International. The title page of the thesis, or a separate page immediately following the title page, must bear the Universal Copyright Convention symbol ©, the full name of the author, and the year the Master's degree was granted. Arrangements for binding the thesis and payment of fees connected with binding and microfilming should be made with the Academic Assistant in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. At such time as the Department gives approval, the Office of Graduate Studies and Research will transmit the original copy of the thesis to the National Library, accompanied by Form NL/BN91, supplied by the Office and validated by the candidate, which authorizes the National Library to produce single microform copies for a nominal sum to cover costs, in response to a written request from an individual, a research institute, or a library.
If approved, the physical thesis becomes the property of the University. Two copies, the original (after return from the National Library) and one other, will be filed in the Leddy Library, and a third (or two copies) in the Department.
1) Thesis format must be as prescribed by Procedures to Follow in Preparing a Thesis or Dissertation.
2) Three copies of Thesis for Master's degree (four for M.Sc. degree) must be submitted to Department at least three weeks before oral presentation prior to Convocation at which candidate has applied to receive degree.
3) Three or four copies of Abstract (no more than 350 words) and of vita are to be filed, one to be bound with each copy of Thesis.
4) Public notice of defense must be received in the Graduate Office and posted in the Department at least one week in advance.
5) Following successful defense, the candidate will deposit all copies of Thesis, Abstract, and vita in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research for binding and distribution (two for the Leddy Library, and one or two for the Department).
6) The candidate will validate Form NL/BN91, supplied by the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, authorizing the National Library to produce single microform copies. The title page of Thesis, or a separate page following, must bear the Universal Copyright Convention symbol ©, full name of author, and year Master's degree was granted.
7) Copyright application and microproduction by the National Library do not apply for the major paper program. Only one copy is required for library deposit, the type of binding to be specified by the Department. Major papers are available to library users for examination in the Reserve Reading Room of the Leddy Library.
8) Fees for the above are to be paid at the time of deposit of Thesis or major paper in the Graduate Office.
Examinations: In addition to the usual examinations on course work, there are three types of special examinations in the program leading to the Master's degree:
1) Qualifying Examinations: A qualifying examination is one in which the student is asked to demonstrate a reasonable mastery of the fundamentals in the major subject; it is designed to test the student's preparation for advanced graduate work. If such an examination is required, it must be administered and passed before the student registers for the final year of Master's work.
2) Comprehensive Examinations: The comprehensive examination is one in which the student is asked to demonstrate a reasonable mastery of the field of specialization; it is designed to test the student's command of knowledge and ability to integrate that knowledge, after completion of all or most of the graduate course work. Normally, this examination is written at the end of the student's final year of study for the Master's degree.
3) Final Examinations: Traditionally, the final examination of a candidate for a Master's degree is an oral defense of the thesis or major paper. A Department may, however, permit as a substitute for this oral examination an open seminar to be conducted by the candidate for graduate students and faculty in the Department on the subject of the research.
The Great Lakes Institute for Environmental Research (formerly the Great Lakes Institute, University of Windsor) is entering its second decade as a unique university research institute. Accompanying its change in name is a change in role. Where once the focus was on the science of the Great Lakes, the Institute is now concerned with all facets of the aquatic environment: ecology, toxicology, geology, climatology, engineering, human health, socioeconomics, and law.
The Great Lakes Institute for Environmental Research is dedicated to the restoration and protection of the Great Lakes ecosystem. It is committed to excellence in the research it conducts, the education it promotes, and the training it provides. With excellence as their goal, the faculty and students associated with the Institute serve the immediate needs of the environmental community and anticipate the needs of future generations in the Great Lakes basin.
Institute Members
K. Adeli, Chemistry and Biochemistry
I. S. Al-Aasam, Earth Sciences
C. J. Ball, Education
J. K. Bewtra, Civil and Environmental Engineering
N. Biswas, Civil and Environmental Engineering
W. H. Blackburn, Earth Sciences
B. Blackwell, Earth Sciences
J. V. H. Ciborowski, Biological Sciences
L. D. Corkum, Biological Sciences
R. Coronado, Citizens' Environment Alliance
D. A. Cotter, Biological Sciences
Y. Couillard, GLIER and Biological Sciences
W. J. I. Crawford, Education
J. Drummond, Ministry of the Environment and Energy
M. J. P. Dufresne, Biological Sciences
K. Duncan, Geography
K. Y. Fung, Mathematics and Statistics
D. E. Gustavsen, Sociology and Anthropology
G. D. Haffner, Biological Sciences and Director
A. Hall, GLIER and Sociology and Anthropology
B. Hasspieler, GLIER and Chemistry and Biochemistry
M. Hedley, Sociology and Anthropology
M. Holder-Franklin, Biological Sciences
F. C. Innes, Geography
W. E. Jones, Vice-President - Academic, Chemistry and Biochemistry
R. Lazar, GLIER Laboratory Manager
P. LaValle, Geography
H. MacIsaac, Biological Sciences
W. Marshall, Tek Trans
J. A. McCorquodale, Civil and Environmental Engineering
J. McIntosh, Chemistry and Biochemistry
J. R. Meyer, Education
M. L. Petras, Biological Sciences
T. Price, Political Science
T. Sands, Biological Sciences
F. Simpson, Earth Sciences
L. K. Smedick, Dean, Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research
I. Stebelsky, Geography
K. E. Taylor, Chemistry and Biochemistry
M. Valiante, Law
I. M. Weis, Biological Sciences
L. Westra, Philosophy
J. Wilson, Law
J. Ye, GLIER and Civil and Environmental Engineering
J. Yu, GLIER and Civil and Environmental Engineering
N. G. Zamani, Mathematics and Statistics
The Fluid Dynamics Research Institute was founded with the object of fostering inter-departmental and inter-Faculty research and postgraduate teaching related to the dynamics of fluids in the most general sense of the term. The founding members were drawn from six different departments with expertise in the fields listed below. Graduate students affiliated with Institute members in their research will complete the degree programs through these departments.
Civil and Environmental Engineering: hydraulics, water resources; rheology and flow of polymers;
Computer Science: computational fluid dynamics;
Electrical Engineering: electro- and magnetohydrodynamics;
Mathematics and Statistics: computational fluid dynamics, magnetohydrodynamics, mechanics of suspensions;
Mechanical Engineering: fluid control, aerodynamics, and turbulent flow.
Institute Staff
R. M. Barron, Ph.D. (Carleton), Professor of Mathematics & Statistics (Director)
P. N. Kaloni, Ph.D. (Indian Inst. of Tech.), Professor of Mathematics & Statistics
O. P. Chandna, Ph.D. (Windsor), Professor of Mathematics & Statistics
K. L. Duggal, Ph.D. (Windsor), Professor of Mathematics & Statistics
E. N. Glass, Ph.D. (Syracuse), Professor of Physics
J. A. McCorquodale, Ph.D. (Windsor), Professor of Civil Engineering
T. W. McDonald, Ph.D. (Purdue), Professor of Mechanical Engineering
G. W. Rankin, Ph.D. (Windsor), Professor of Mechanical Engineering
K. Sridhar, Ph.D. (Toronto), Professor of Mechanical Engineering
H. Toews, Ph.D. (Windsor), Assistant Professor of Computer Science
A. Watson, Dr. Rer. Nat. (Kassel, W. Germany), Professor of Electrical Engineering
N. G. Zamani, Ph.D. (Brown), Professor of Mathematics & Statistics
Petras, Michael L.; B.Sc. (Assumption), M.Sc. (Notre Dame), Ph.D. (Michigan)—1956.
Pillay, Dathathry T. N.; B.Sc. Ag. (Osmania), M.S., Ph.D. (Cornell)—1963.
Warner, Alden H.; B.A. (Maine), M.A., Ph.D. (Southern Illinois)—1965.
Thomas, Donovan D.; B.S. (Natal), M.S., Ph.D. (Florida)—1968.
M'Closkey, Robert T.; B.A. (U.C.L.A.), M.A. (California State), Ph.D. (U. of California)—1970.
Fackrell, Hugh B.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Western Ontario), Ph.D. (Manitoba)—1974.
Cotter, David A.; B.S. (Penn State), M.S., Ph.D. (Wisconsin)—1975.
Lovett Doust, Jonathan N.; B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Wales)—1988.
Lovett Doust, Lesley; B.Sc. (Edinburgh), Ph.D. (Wales)—1991.
Sale, Peter; B.Sc., M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Hawaii)—1994. (Head of the Department)
Taylor, Paul; B.Sc. (George Williams, Chicago), Ph.D. (Toledo)—1975.
Dufresne, Michael J. P.; B.Sc. (York), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1976.
Weis, Ivan Michael; B.Sc. (Syracuse), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Iowa)—1976.
Ciborowski, Jan J. H.; B.Sc., M.Sc.(Toronto), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1984.
Haffner, Gordon D.; B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (London)—1986. (Director of the Great Lakes Institute for Environmental Research)
Holder-Franklin, Maxine A.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Dalhousie), Ph.D. (McGill)—1978.
Zielinski, Barbara; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Waterloo), Ph.D. (Manitoba)—1990.
Leach, Joseph H.; B.Sc. (Toronto), M.Sc. (Guelph), Ph.D. (Aberdeen)—1993.
Corkum, Lynda D.; B.A., M.A. (Drake), Ph.D. (Toronto)—1987.
Weaver, Susan E.; B.A. (Boston), Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1987.
Metcalfe, Christopher D.; B.Sc. (Manitoba), M.Sc. (New Brunswick), Ph.D. (McMaster)—1991.
Reynoldson, Trefor B.; B.Sc. (Leeds), M.Sc. (Calgary), Ph.D. (Lancaster)—1991.
In addition to the general requirements outlined in 1.5, the following requirements must be met by all students proceeding to the Ph.D. degree.
Applicants with an honours degree in Biological Sciences or related field and who have been judged to be outstanding students may be admitted directly into the Ph.D. program. Applicants holding an M.Sc. degree or equivalent from the University of Windsor or from another recognized university or college may be admitted to the Ph.D. program with advanced standing in course work as described below.
Course Work: Students proceeding toward the Ph.D. degree will follow one of the programs given below:
1) Students proceeding directly to the Ph.D. from an Honours B.Sc. degree will be expected to:
(a)comply with the general regulations outlined in 1.5;
(b)attend all departmental seminars in Biological Sciences (formal presentations of visiting speakers; graduate student seminars, thesis defense presentations and dissertation defense presentations) each year of full-time registration;
(c)present a total of 3 departmental seminars exclusive of the dissertation defense;
(d)successfully complete a minimum of three Selected Readings courses;
(e)successfully complete a minimum of two additional graduate courses. One of the courses may be in a cognate area. Statistics 65-453 (Statistics for Life/Social Sciences) may be allowed for graduate credit;
(f)complete a dissertation embodying the results of an original investigation;
(g)defend the dissertation at a public lecture or seminar.
Students recommended and approved for transfer into the Ph.D. program after having completed 1 year of an M.Sc. degree in the Department of Biological Sciences will normally receive credit for graduate course work completed during the M.Sc. program.
(2) Students entering into a Ph.D. program with an M.Sc. degree will be expected to:
(a)comply with the general requirements outlined in 1.5;
(b)attend all departmental seminars in Biological Sciences (formal presentations of visiting speakers; graduate student seminars, thesis defense presentations and dissertation presentation) each year of full-time registration;
(c)present a total of 3 departmental seminars exclusive of the dissertation defense;
(d)successfully complete a minimum of three Selected Readings courses;
(e)successfully complete a minimum of one additional graduate course. This course may be in a cognate area. Statistics 65-453 (Statistics for Life/Social Sciences) may be allowed for graduate credit;
(f)complete a dissertation embodying the results of an original investigation;
(g)defend the dissertation at a public lecture or seminar.
Grading: A student must maintain at least B- standing in each course in Biological Sciences and at least a B- average in any non-Biological Sciences courses. Any student whose performance is deemed unsatisfactory in course work or research will be asked to withdraw.
Doctoral Committee: Within the first term of the student's registration, the doctoral committee will be formed except for the external examiner, who is to be appointed during the student's final year of study/research. The full committee will consist of at least five members; one must be from outside the University, one from the University faculty but outside the Department, and three must be members of the Department of Biological Sciences. The research advisor will act as chairperson of this committee. The student should meet with individual committee members on an informal basis at least twice a year.
The doctoral committee must meet for the following:
(a) to review and approve course work and the research proposal no later than six months into the program;
(b)to prepare and administer the qualifying examination within the first twelve months of the student's registration in the program;
(c)to discuss the student's progress within two months after the qualifying examination. (The extramural committee member need not participate.);
(d)to review and approve the research progress no less than six months before the candidacy examination is administered;
(e)to set the candidacy examinations which must be given at least six months before the student's final oral examination. (The extramural committee member need not participate.);
(f)to discuss the student's research and dissertation at least two months before the anticipated time of the final oral examination;
(g)the final oral examination.
Research Progress: Each year from the date of initial registration, the student must submit a Research Progress Report to and meet with his or her doctoral committee. In addition, the student must review his or her research in a meeting with the doctoral committee at least six months before the anticipated date of the final oral examination.
Dissertation: At least six months prior to the candidacy examination, a candidate must submit a Research Progress Report to the doctoral committee and at least two months before the anticipated date of the final oral examination the student must review the research and dissertation in a meeting with the committee.
A dissertation embodying the results of an original investigation in the student's major field is required of all candidates. The dissertation is expected to be of a quality suitable for publication in a refereed biological journal.
(a)Qualifying Examination: The primary purpose of the Qualifying Examination is to ensure that the student has the appropriate background to successfully undertake the planned program of dissertation research. This examination must be completed within twelve months of the student's registration in the program. Prior to the examination, the student will have provided the doctoral committee with a written proposal outlining the background, approach and general expectations of the intended research project. The Qualifying Examination will normally be an oral examination administered by the doctoral committee will be communicated in writing to the student and the departmental Graduate Committee. Following the Qualifying Examination the doctoral committee may assign the student appropriate remedial or supplementary course work. Successful completion of the examination and any remedial studies or course work recommended by the doctoral committee is corequisite to the student's continuation in the doctoral program.
(b)Candidacy Examination: The primary purpose of the Candidacy Examination is to ensure that the student has made the appropriate research progress to proceed with the dissertation defense. The Candidacy Examination should normally be completed not less than six months prior to the expected date of the dissertation defense. Prior to the examination, the student will provide the doctoral committee with a detailed written report outlining the scope of the student's research project, the work that was conducted and results of the research. This report may broadly follow the form that the student envisions for the final dissertation. The Candidacy Examination will normally be an oral examination administered by the student's doctoral committee. The student may be asked to summarize the major points of the report in a brief oral presentation. The student's oral summary and written report will typically serve as the focus for most of the questions posed as part of the examination. The results of the Candidacy Examination and any recommendations made by the doctoral committee will be communicated in writing to the student and the departmental Graduate Committee. Successful completion of the examination and any further work recommended by the doctoral committee is corequisite to the student's completion of the doctoral program.
(c)Finally, the student will be requested to defend the dissertation orally at a public lecture or seminar (final oral examination).
1) Applicants with an honours degree in Biological Sciences or a related field may be admitted into a one-year (minimum duration) Master's program.
2) Applicants with a general B.Sc. degree in Biological Sciences or a related field may be admitted to a two-year (minimum duration) Master's program.
1) Students admitted to the one-year Master's program will be expected to:
(a)comply with the general regulations outlined in 1.6;
(b)attend all departmental seminars in Biological Sciences (formal presentations of visiting speakers; graduate student seminars, thesis defense presentations and dissertation defense presentations) each year of full-time registration;
(c)present a total of 2 departmental seminars exclusive of the thesis defense;
(d)successfully complete a minimum of two Selected Readings courses;
(e)successfully complete a minimum of one additional graduate course. The course may be in a cognate area. Statistics 65-453 (Statistics for Life/Social Sciences) may be allowed for graduate credit;
(f)complete an original research project and embody it in a thesis;
(g)defend the thesis orally at a public lecture or seminar.
2) Students admitted to the two-year Master's program, besides meeting the minimum requirements of the one-year program, are expected in the first year of the two-year program to achieve a level of qualification equivalent to an honours degree through research and a minimum of four courses.
3) Grading: A student must maintain at least a B- average in each Biological Sciences course and at least a B- average in any non-Biological Sciences courses.
4) Master's Committee: Within one term of the student's registration in the program, the research committee will be formed and the names submitted to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. The full committee will consist of at least three members—the research supervisor, one other faculty member from within the Department, and one University faculty member from outside of the Department.
The student should meet with individual committee members on an informal basis at least twice a year. The committee, in turn, must meet to:
(a)review and approve course work and the research proposal no later than six months into the program;
(b)discuss the student's research and thesis at least six months before the anticipated time of the final oral examination;
(c)participate in the final oral examination.
Research Progress: Each year from the date of initial registration, the student must submit a Research Progress Report to and meet with his or her Master's committee. In addition, the student must review his or her research in a meeting with the Master's committee at least six months before the anticipated date of the final oral examination.
Research Thesis: A thesis embodying the results of an original investigation in the student's major field is required of all candidates. The student must defend the thesis orally at a public lecture or seminar, which will be the final oral examination.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered each year.
The Department of Biological Sciences provides three classes of course, each with a different primary purpose and format.
I) Fundamentals Courses. Fundamentals courses cover subject matter that is considered central to a comprehensive knowledge of principles and theories in the department's areas of research emphasis. The scope of these courses extends beyond that provided at the undergraduate level. These courses may entail formal lectures, laboratory instruction and/or directed readings and discussion, but the onus is on the course instructor to ensure that students are exposed to balanced and comprehensive coverage of the range of topics considered to represent the field. Because of their central importance to the Biological Sciences, these courses are offered on a regular, recurring basis.
ii) Special Topics Courses. Special topics courses provide detailed expertise in theory and/or techniques in areas of researchers' expertise that are especially relevant to students' thesis research. Although no less rigorous than fundamentals courses, these courses may provide greater depth of information over a narrower subject range. The scope of these courses extends beyond that provided at the undergraduate level. These courses may involve a combination of lectures, laboratories, discussion, readings and/or student presentations under the guidance of the instructor. A Special Topics course will have an explicit subtitle indicating the theme of a particular offering. Some Special Topics courses will be offered each year. The themes will vary among years to reflect the expertise of the instructors available and the current needs of the graduate students.
iii) Selected Readings Courses. The primary goal of the Selected Readings courses is to develop students' skill in objective, critical analysis of scholarly work among individuals with broadly similar research interests and backgrounds. An equally important aspect of these courses is to promote interaction among students and faculty and to help participants become aware of new research across a range of subdisciplines. The role of students in selecting and presenting relevant material is central to these courses.
A course designed to introduce the student to a variety of biochemical, cellular, and molecular techniques. This course is composed of a series of topics from which students are required to participate in a minimum of four. The topics include: chromatography, electrophoresis, immunocytochemistry, electron microscopy, cell culture, cloning and nucleic acid analysis, computer-based protein and nucleic acid analysis, and radioisotope methods. Students should consult with their research advisors and supervisory committees in choosing the topics for study. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours, 4 laboratory hours a week for selected experiments during the year, both terms.) (One term course credit.) (Offered in alternative years.)
Discussion of philosophical and quantitative approaches used to investigate biological systems, with emphasis on design and implementation of efficient and unbiased experiments. Students will use expertise acquired in lectures and readings to constructively evaluate their own and others' research proposals through round table discussions and individual presentation. (Prerequisite/co-requisite: 55-230, or consent of instructor.) (2 discussion hours a week.)
Current publications on common themes of potential significance in students' area of study will be chosen for round table oral presentation and discussion. Multiple sections, each with enrolment of 8-12 students will be offered in the fall term of each year as required. This course is intended for graduate students in Biological Sciences only. (2 discussion hours a week.)
Current publications on common themes of potential significance in students' area of study will be chosen for round table oral presentation and discussion. Multiple sections, each with enrolment of 8-12 students will be offered in the winter term of each year as required. This course is intended for graduate students in Biological Sciences only. (2 discussion hours a week.)
An analysis at the molecular level of the growth and development of prokaryotes, lower eukaryotes, and their plasmids. (Prerequisite/corequisite: 55-454, or consent of instructor.) (2 discussion hours a week.) (Offered in alternate years.)
An analysis at the molecular level of the growth and development of plants and animals. (Prerequisite/corequisite: 55-455, or consent of instructor.) (2 discussion hours a week.) (Offered in alternate years.)
Major topics may include the evolution of mating systems, population structure and demography, population genetics and life history variation, theory of optimal resource use. (Prerequisite/corequisite: 55-324, or consent of instructor.) (3 lecture/discussion hours a week.) (Offered in alternate years.)
Major topics include niche and diversity theory, trophic complexity and community stability, assembly of guilds, ecosystem structure and function biogegeography. (Prerequisite/corequisite: 55-325, or consent of instructor.) (3 lecture/discussion hours a week.) (Offered in alternative years.)
This is a regularly offered course covering subjects that reflect current graduate program needs and departmental expertise in specific areas. The course addresses one or more theme subjects in any particular term. Students receive a course credit for each term in which they register for this course provided that a particular theme is not repeated. Where a theme parallels an undergraduate course listing, students may be required to attend some portion of the undergraduate course as a prerequisite or corequisite. Subjects that may be offered as special topics include but are not limited to the following: biology of cell transformation; electron microscopy; genetic engineering and its applications; advanced topics in immunochemistry; advanced topics in microbial physiology and ecology; advanced topics in physiology; plant hormones and development; virology. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.) (2-3 discussion hours and/or up to 5 laboratory hours a week.)
This is a regularly offered course covering subjects that reflect current graduate program needs and departmental expertise in specific areas. The course addresses one or more theme subjects in any particular term. Students receive a course credit for each term in which they register for this course provided that a particular theme is not repeated. Where a theme parallels an undergraduate course listing, students may be required to attend some portion of the undergraduate course as a prerequisite or corequisite. Subjects that may be offered as special topics include but are not limited to the following: animal behaviour; advanced topics in aquatic ecology; biogeography, conservation biology, ecotoxicology, quantitative ecology. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.) (2-3 discussion hours and/or up to 5 laboratory hours a week.)
Special Topics in the Biological Sciences courses may be used to introduce a new graduate offering, typically on a "trial" basis. Approved courses taken at Wayne State University or elsewhere, or courses offered by visiting professors may also fall into the category of Special Topics in the Biological Sciences. A limited number of these courses may be included in the program of graduate student.
Special Topics in the Biological Sciences courses may be used to introduce a new graduate offering, typically on a "trial" basis. Approved courses taken at Wayne State University or elsewhere, or courses offered by visiting professors may also fall into the category of Special Topics in the Biological Sciences. A limited number of these courses may be included in the program of a graduate student.
An original research project embodied into a concisely written thesis which conforms to the style and format of a recognized journal in the field of specialization. The student should register for this course during each term (including Summer) of residency at the University; however, this course may not be used for credit toward fulfilling the course requirements in the Master's program.
An original research investigation the results of which will be embodied in a concisely written dissertation conforming in style and format to a recognized journal in the field of specialization. The final paper should be of the highest quality possible and suitable for publication. The doctoral student should register for this course commencing the summer term of the first year of residency and subsequently for each term during which dissertation research will be carried out. In no case, however, may this course be used for credit toward fulfilling the course requirements in the Ph.D. program.
Lam, Wai P.; B. Comm. (St. Mary's), M.B.A., Ph.D. (Michigan State), F.C.A.—1973.
Faria, Anthony John; B.S., M.B.A. (Wayne State), Ph.D. (Michigan State)—1975.
Andiappan, Palaniappan; B.A., M.A., M. Litt. (Madras), M.S. (Massachussetts), Ph.D. (Iowa)—1980. (Associate Dean of the Faculty)
Solomon, Norman A.; B.S. (Cornell), M.A., Ph.D. (Wisconsin)—1982. (Dean of the Faculty)
Thacker, James W.; B.A. (Winnipeg), M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1982.
Kantor, Jeffrey; B. Bus. Sc., B. Comm. (Hons.) (Capetown), C.P.A., C.A. (Ontario), Ph.D. (Bradford, England)—1983.
West, Eric; B.Sc. (Royal Military College of Canada), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Iowa State University)—1983.
Aneja, Yash Paul; M.S., B.S. (Indian Statistical Inst.), Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins)—1984.
Bart, John T.; B. Eng. (The Royal Military College of Canada), M.B.A., Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1984.
Brill, Percy; B.Sc. (Carleton), M.A. (Columbia), Ph.D. (Toronto)—l984.
Chandra, Ramesh; B.S. (Bihar Inst. of Tech.), M.S. (Mississippi), M.S., Ph.D. (Union College), Ph.D. (Oklahoma)—1984.
Templer, Andrew; B.A. (Hons.), (Witwatersrand), M.A. (South Africa), M.Sc. (London), Ph.D. (Witwatesrand)—1984.
Fields, Mitchell; B.A. (Maryland), M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1985.
Withane, Sirinimal; B.Sc. (Sri Jayawardenpura), M.Sc. (Moratuwa University), M.A. (Carleton), Ph.D. (Rockefeller College, SUNY)—1986.
Haque, Mohd. Razaul; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Aligarh Muslim), M.Sc. (Southern Illinois), Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1967.
Dickinson, John R.; B.S.B.A., M.B.A., D.B.A. (Indiana)—1980.
Cattaneo, R. Julian; Licenciado (Buenos Aires), Ph.D. (Michigan)—1980.
Shastri, T.; B. Comm. (Osmania), LL.B (Bombay), Dip. Mgmt. (McGill), M.B.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Oklahoma), C.A. (Quebec & Ontario), R.I.A.—1982.
Estrin, Teviah L.; B. Comm. (British Columbia), M.S., Ph.D (California) -1984.
Gunay, Erdal; B.S. (Middle East Technical), M.B.A., Ph.D. (Syracuse)—1984.
Rieger, Fritz; B.S. (Manhattan), M.B.A. (Columbia), Ph.D. (McGill)—1984.
Punnett, Betty-Jane; B.A. (McGill), M.B.A. (Marist College), Ph.D. (New York)—1985.
Okechuku, Chike; B.A.Sc., M.A.Sc. (Toronto), M.B.A., Ph.D. (York)—1986.
Singh, Jang; B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (College of St. Thomas), M.B.A. (Windsor), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1986.
Seck, Diery; Diplome d'Ecole Superior de Commerce de Toulouse (DESCAF), M.Sc. Sherbrooke, Ph.D. (Laval)—1987.
Ursel, Nancy D.; B.Comm. (McGill), M.B.A. Ph.D. (Concordia)—1989
Lui, Kui-On; Dip. (Madrid), M.S. (Illinois State), Ph.D. (Michigan), B. Comm., M.B.A. (Windsor)—1980.
Chaouch, A.; B.Sc. (Algiers), M.Sc. (Stanford), Ph.D. (Waterloo)—1986.
Prince, Michael; B.A.Sc., M.B.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Bradford)—1986.
Wellington, William; B.Sc. (Western Ontario), M.B.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Michigan State)—1986.
Lan, George; B.S. (Beloit College), M.A. (Smith College), M.B.A. (Tulane University), Ph.D. (Queens)—1988.
Armstrong-Stassen, Marjorie; B.S., M.L.H.R. Ph.D. (Ohio State)—1989
Green, Donna; B.A., (Ohio State), M.B.A. (Saskatchewan), Ph.D.
Liu, Feng; B.Eng., M.Eng., (Tiamin University), Ph.D. (Concordia)1995.
(Western Ontario)—1990.
The purpose of the Master of Business Administration program is to provide broad graduate study in the general field of business administration.
Graduate students have the opportunity of expanding their accounting, administrative, finance, marketing, and management science expertise. The program emphasizes knowledge that prepares students for careers in private industry and business, for the public service, and for doctoral studies.
1) Applicants who have secured satisfactory standing (at least a B average) in their undergraduate work may be admitted. Major consideration is given to the performance during the last two years of the undergraduate program. Possession of the minimum requirements for admission does not ensure acceptance.
Other factors such as graduate courses taken elsewhere, suitable business experience, and Graduate Management Admission Test (GMAT) scores are considered.
Students must write the GMAT before applying for admission to the Faculty. (Details of the Test may be obtained from The Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey, 08540.) The order form for the Bulletin of Information for the GMAT is available in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
2) Graduates from a four-year Honours program in Commerce or Business Administration who, in the opinion of the Faculty of Business Administration, have covered an adequate program of studies, may be admitted to the candidate year of the program provided they have obtained satisfactory standing in their undergraduate degree.
3) Graduates from other four-year programs may be given advanced standing for courses taken within the degree program which are equivalent to 500-level courses.
4) Students will be recommended for admission to the candidate year if they have maintained a B average or better in the first year of the program.
5) Students in the candidate year who maintain a B average or better will qualify for the M.B.A. degree.
(a)at least two terms of university-level Economics;
(b)at least one term of university-level Mathematics
Students lacking prerequisites may be admitted and permitted to complete the appropriate undergraduate courses in their first term.
Provision is made for students in full-time employment to spread the work for the degree over a number of years. Normally it is expected that the program will be completed within six calendar years from first registration at II Master's level.
Students who are interested in pursuing both a professional accounting designation (i.e. C.A., C.M.A., or C.G.A.) and the M.B.A. are advised to complete their accounting course requirements while being registered in the Bachelor of Commerce for University Graduates program and then to apply for admission directly to the candidate year of the M.B.A. program.
Each Qualifying Year course will be worth four credits; each Candidate Year course will be worth three credits.
70-550.
71-540.
72-570.
73-500.
74-530.
Courses from at least 3 areas must be taken, including:
73-501.
and four 500-level courses to be selected from the following areas:
70-551.
70-552.
71-541.
71-542.
72-571.
72-572.
73-502.
73-503.
74-531.
74-532.
75-590.
four 600-level courses
75-698.
three 600-level courses, and
75-796.Major Paper
75-698.Business Policy and Strategy
(three credit hours)
plus at least one of the following strategy/capstone courses (three credit hours):
70-653.Contemporary Accounting Theory
70-658.Contemporary Thought in Management Accounting
71-610.Strategic Human Resources Management
72-673.Topics in Finance
73-602.Current Topics in Operations Management
74-639.Seminar in Marketing Strategy and Planning
75-685.Strategic Planning
75-686.Industry Analysis and Competitive Strategy
and one of the following business research methodology courses (three credit hours):
70-652.Research Methods in Accounting
71-649.Research Methods in Administrative Studies
74-632.Seminar in Marketing Research
75-691.Research Methodology for Managers
and, depending upon the program option selected, additional courses as follow:
Course Option:seven additional 600-level Business courses (twenty-one credit hours)
Major Paper Option:five additional 600-level Business courses (fifteen credit hours)
Thesis Option:three additional 600-level Business courses (nine credit hours)
Major Paper:(six credit hours)
Thesis:(twelve credit hours)
Course Option:ten courses
Major Paper Option: eight courses plus the Major Paper
Thesis Option:six courses plus the Thesis
Required Courses:nine hours under all options
Total Hours Required:thirty under all options
All students choosing this option must have a detailed major paper proposal approved by at least two faculty members in Business. These two faculty members will have primary responsibility for supervising the student's work. The approved proposal application form must be submitted to the Assistant to the Dean in order to register for the major paper (75-796). An oral defence will be required.
The major paper will be graded and will receive six credits.
All students choosing this option must have a detailed thesis proposal approved by at least two faculty members in Business and by one faculty member external to Business but from within the University. An oral defence will be required (see 1.6.2, Committees).
The thesis will be graded and will receive twelve credits.
This program integrates the four study terms required in the full-time non-Co-op M.B.A. program with two work terms. All study terms coincide with the University's regular Fall, Winter, and Summer terms. This program design allows students in the co-op option the same course selection as regular M.B.A. students. Students with a four-year honours degree in business administration or commerce are not eligible for the Co-op program.
The first work term placement begins immediately following the completion of the first five 500-level courses. Students have the opportunity to experiment with various areas of interest in a generalist capacity, or to focus on a specific area of interest. Although the Faculty will make every effort to match students with suitable employment, students are not guaranteed positions, and the availability of positions may vary with the state of the labour market.
Following the completion of each work term, a work report is required. These reports focus on a problem or problems at work as analysed by the student in a significant academic analysis. These reports serve to develop solid communication skills. The specific content and format of the reports are decided upon by the student's Faculty advisors and the Faculty Co-op coordinator, in consultation with the student. One report is required for each completed work term. The reports may be used as a substitute for the major paper requirement of the M.B.A. program upon the recommendation of the Graduate Program Committee.
In addition to the normal admission requirements, students seeking admission to the Co-op program will be required to have an interview with the representatives from the Faculty of Business Administration.
The scheduling of work terms will be subject to the availability of suitable employment placements.
Fall Term: Study
Winter Term: Work
Summer Term: Study
Fall Term: Work or Study (half of cohort)
Winter Term: Work or Study (half of cohort)
Summer Term: Study
This special program provides students interested in a career which combines legal and business management skills with an opportunity to complete both the M.B.A. and the LL.B. degrees in four years.
It is administered by a Committee of Directors composed of the Deans of the Faculties of Business Administration and Law, and three members of each Faculty.
The admissions procedure for the integrated program consists of two stages. At the first stage, students applying to the program must meet the admission requirements of both Faculties. Therefore separate applications must be submitted to the Faculty of Law and the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research for admission to the regular degree programs in Law and Business Administration. To facilitate academic and career planning, it is strongly suggested that these applications be made simultaneously. Students who are accepted to both the M.B.A. and LL.B. programs, and have indicated a desire to follow the integrated program, will proceed to attend first year in either Faculty. Such students will be granted a deferred admission to the other Faculty in the program contingent upon acceptance to the integrated program after the first year of study.
While attending first year, the student must apply to the Committee of Directors for admission to the M.B.A./ LL.B. program. The intensity of the program demands a committed and highly motivated student, and accordingly, certain minimum academic requirements have been established. Students applying to the program at this stage must achieve standing in the top one third of the first-year class in the school in which they have enrolled and must meet the grade standards set out below. Students who do not meet this requirement will not be considered for the integrated program, but are free to complete their studies in the Faculty attended, or to re-apply for admission to the second Faculty for the regular course of study.
The Committee of Directors will interview all eligible applicants and selection of candidates will be made on the basis of the following criteria:
(a)the applicant's career plan and its appropriateness to the program;
(b)an assessment of the applicant's ability to complete a rigorous course of study successfully;
(c)all relevant elements of the applicant's profile compared with those of all other candidates.
Successful candidates will receive an acceptance to the integrated program subject to the condition that to remain in the program he or she must complete the second year of the program with a standing in the top one third of the class and meet the grade standard.
The Committee of Directors will also consider the applications of persons for entry to the program who have not earlier complied with the foregoing procedures, and who are enrolled in either of the Faculties of Law or Graduate Studies and Research; these persons will have demonstrated high academic achievement and appropriate vocational and personal commitment.
Faculty of Law—February 1 (LL.B.)
Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research—June 1 (M.B.A.)
For application materials please contact each Faculty separately at the following addresses:
Admissions
Faculty of Law
University of Windsor
Windsor, Ontario
N9B 3P4
Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research
MBA Admissions
University of Windsor
Windsor, Ontario
N9B 3P4
First and Second Years
The first two years of study of the integrated program will consist of the regular first-year programs of each faculty.
The third and fourth years of the integrated program will be devoted to required and elective courses offered in both the Faculty of Law and the Faculty of Business Administration.
In the Faculty of Business Administration, program students will be required to take five candidate-level courses. These must include Business Policy 75-698 and four courses selected from a minimum of two of the following areas: Accounting, Administrative Studies, Finance, Management Science, Marketing, and Policy and Strategy. In addition, the M.B.A. major paper or thesis must have a substantial legal component.
In the Faculty of Law, the student will enroll in courses for a minimum of forty credits. These must include Torts, Civil Procedure, one course from the Legal Perspectives Group, and one course requiring a substantial paper that must account for at least 50% of the student's grade in the course. The M.B.A. paper will ordinarily satisfy this requirement, subject to the approval of the Faculty of Law Academic Programs Committee.
In addition to the requirements outlined above, the candidate must choose three additional candidate-level M.B.A. courses or a further three law courses totalling at least nine credit hours or any equivalent combination. The student's elective choices shall be reviewed by the Committee of Directors in light of the student's personal and career objectives, and the necessity of scheduling core business and law courses.
First and Second Years: Standing in the top third of the class; no Faculty of Law course grade lower than C.
Third and Fourth Years: In courses taken in the Faculty of Business Administration, candidates must attain at least one A- grade and not receive any grades below B. In courses taken in the Faculty of Law, candidates must attain in each year at least one grade of B or above and must not receive any grade lower than C.
Candidates who fail to meet the above standards may be advanced upon the approval of the Committee of Directors if such action is warranted. Candidates who either fail to advance from Second Year to Third Year or who choose to leave the program will be free to continue on for both degrees, but within normal degree requirements, and subject to any conditions set out by the two Faculties. Students leaving the program after Third Year and who have taken the appropriate electives, may petition the Faculty of Business Administration for the M.B.A. degree.
YEAR |
LAW |
BUSINESS |
STREAM |
STREAM | |
|
I |
Law I |
Qualifying Year |
|
-MBA | ||
|
II |
II Qualifying Year |
Law I |
|
-MBA | ||
|
III* |
Candidate Year |
Candidate Year |
|
-MBA |
-MBA | |
|
Law II & III |
Law II & III | |
|
IV* |
Candidate Year |
Candidate Year |
|
-MBA |
-MBA | |
|
Law II & III |
Law II & III |
* During Stages III and IV, students will be registered in the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. Students must be registered in the Faculty of Graduate Study and Research in order to qualify for graduate awards.
Students holding an Honours B.Comm. degree may obtain both the LL.B. and M.B.A. degrees without the assistance of a special integrated program. However, by submitting applications simultaneously to both the Faculty of Law and the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research and indicating an interest in the program, such students may be granted a deferred admission to whichever degree program he or she elects to take second. This special deferred admission will be revoked if the applicant's performance in the first program fails to meet the first-year academic standards of the program. In such case the applicant may re-apply for regular admission to the second degree program.
Note: The University reserves the right to make changes in the integrated program and any rules or regulations applying to it.
Courses below are listed according to the informal administrative units of the Faculty.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in a particular term or year.
Special permission to enter courses without the stated prerequisites must be arranged with the Dean and the instructor involved.
All 500-level courses are four lecture hours per week. All 600-level courses are three lecture hours per week.
An introduction to the accounting process emphasizing accounting concepts, standards, and procedures that guide the preparation, intepretation, and reporting of financial accounting information. The specific purposes of the course are to:1) examine the objectives and characteristics of financial information reports;2) gain an understanding of accounting control systems necessary in order to generate accounting information reports that are useful to internal and external users, taking into consideration the costs vs. the benefits; and3) provide a strong foundation for subsequent courses in accounting and finance. (4 lecture hours a week.)
An intermediate financial accounting course covering the theory and practice of financial statement preparation and reporting. The emphasis will be on asset valuation and the related impact on income measurement, problems related to the movement of liabilities and the accounting for income taxes, and the measuring and reporting of shareholders' equities. (Prerequisite: 70-550 or 70-152 or equivalent with a minimum C grade.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
The development and use of accounting information in performing the managerial functions of planning, controlling, decision-making, and performance evaluation. Emphasis is on the practical applications of cost accumulative systems in the decision-making process. (Prerequisite: 70-550 or 70-256 or equivalent with a minimum C grade.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
Evaluation of contemporary accounting thought. (Prerequisite: 70-552 or equivalent with a minimum B grade.)
An examination of the nature, objectives, methodology, and problems of accounting theory instruction and verification, and the objectives of financial statements in order to provide a frame of reference with which to evaluate current developments in accounting theory. (Prerequisite: 70-551 or equivalent with minimum B grade.)
An empirical analysis of the properties of accounting data through the use of research techniques applied within the discipline of accounting. (Prerequisite: Permission of the instructor.)
Evaluation of contemporary theory in the measurement and reporting of income. Coverage includes an examination of various valuation concepts and arguments related to their use. Related topics also included are general price-level accounting and capital maintenance concepts. (Prerequisite: 70-551 or equivalent with a minimum B grade.)
An introductory course in auditing which encompasses theoretical and practical approaches to auditing. Study is given to generally accepted auditing standards, internal control, audit procedures and reports, other related auditing topics, as well as the legal and professional responsibilities of the auditor. (Prerequisite: 70-551 or 70-352 or equivalent with a minimum C grade.)
The study of the auditing profession and the general concepts of auditing. Emphasis is placed on theory rather than practice. (Prerequisite: 70-654 or 70-460 or equivalent with a minimum B grade.)
Designed to provide the student with a knowledge and understanding of the Canadian federal income tax structure with respect to personal and corporate taxation and other tax topics. The course examines both the theoretical aspects and practical problems in these areas. (Prerequisite: 70-550 or 70-152 or equivalent with a minimum C grade.)
Theory and practice of Canadian income tax. Special emphasis is placed on the taxation of corporations. (Prerequisite: 70-656 or 70-461 or equivalent with a minimum B grade.)
Evaluation of contemporary accounting thought as a basis for planning and control. (Prerequisite: 70-552 or equivalent with a minimum B grade.)
A contingency view of management as the process of organizing resources to set and accomplish organizational goals. Three approaches are emphasized and integrated: the systems approach (environmental issues); the process approach (the functions of planning, organizing, controlling, and leading); and the behavioural approach (individual and group performance in organizations). Cases and readings are used, especially in the behavioural approach. (4 lecture hours a week.)
This course is concerned with the management of human resources in the organization and the role of the personnel function in this task. The emphasis is on imparting an overall understanding of the personnel function and on discovering ways of increasing the contribution of human resource management towards the achievement of organizational effectiveness. Class discussion and exercises will cover such topics as human resource planning, recruitment and selection, orientation and development, performance appraisal, compensation, and employee services. (Prerequisite: 71-540.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
This course is concerned with the most important issues of labour-management relations. Particular attention is given to the history and structure of labour unions, labour legislation, the development and administration of labour agreements (including contract negotiation through collective bargaining, grievance procedures, and arbitration), and the resolution of labour-management conflicts. (Prerequisite: 71-540.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
The purpose of this course is to examine how organizational strategies and human resources management are interrelated, how management processes are interrelated, and how strategic human resources management contributes to organizational effectiveness. Areas covered include the process of strategic planning; implications of various strategic decisions on the workforce; designing human resources strategies based upon corporate strategic plans; assessing organizational structure in terms of congruence with the strategic plan; and auditing human resources management. (Prerequisite: 71-541 or 71-542, or equivalent.)
This course examines alternative concepts and forms of organizational design at both administrative and operational levels. The emphasis will be on critical analysis of the design implications of high rates of environmental and technological change. Management structures, processes, and technologies which enhance productivity and innovation will be evaluated taking examples from Canada and other countries. Special attention will be paid to case studies and the development of problem-solving skills for the analysis and efficient design of organizations capable of achieving their goals under a variety of conditions. (Prerequisite: 71-540 or equivalent.)
The course uses theoretical and practical frameworks to analyse the behaviour of individuals and groups within organizations. Special emphasis is placed on the management of change and organizational development. (Prerequisite: 71-540 or equivalent.)
A wide range of readings (both business and non-business) is used to develop insights into human resource problems encountered at the middle and upper levels of management. Each problem is illustrated with a case, and the insights from the readings are applied to the case to make recommendations in a situation where there is no single answer. (Prerequisite: 71-540 or equivalent.)
The course focuses on the cross-cultural problems and issues that confront North American managers both at home and in the environment of international business. Background material, readings, cases, and exercises will involve the student in the issues that confront the international manager. A major objective is to develop a sensitivity that will enhance the student's ability to operate in the complex environment of multi-cultural business. (Prerequisite: 71-540 or equivalent.)
This course addresses the development of human resources through training experiences. Topics related to training, adult learning, and effective teaching methods will be explored. The focus of the course is on the major theoretical aspects of training: 1) needs assessment, 2) program development, and 3) evaluation. This course has an experiential focus; student teams will be responsible for developing and presenting training programs. (Prerequisite: 71-541 or equivalent.)
The course focuses on the application of current behavioural research to the management of reward systems within organizations. Special emphasis is given to the administration and planning of salaries, wages, contingent pay, benefits and non-financial rewards, and to the clarification of the linkages between rewards and desired behaviours. (Prerequisite: 71-541 or equivalent.)
A graduate seminar concerned with the role of government in union-management relations. Review and evaluation of agencies established by the state to implement those social policies which are designed to promote industrial peace. (Prerequisite: 71-541 or equivalent.)
This course will include lectures and cases on discrimination in employment on the basis of sex, race, age, religion, handicap, and other protected categories. The role of the union and management in dealing with issues such as discrimination in hiring, affirmative action, equal pay, discrimination in training and promotion will be discussed. The human rights legislation in Canada and the U.S. will provide the framework for examining these issues. (Prerequisite: 71-541 or 71-542 or equivalent.)
A reading and research seminar dealing with major concepts and important current problems in the areas covered by Administrative Studies, viz. Industrial Relations, Organizational Behaviour and Personnel Management. The precise topic to be covered in a particular term will vary according to current interest and faculty availability, and will be announced in the previous term. Interested students should consult the Administrative Studies Area Head to identify the particular offering for a given term. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.)
This course prepares students, as future managers, to be knowledgeable consumers of research for business problem-solving. Students will design and conduct a research study involving a people-oriented organizational problem. Topics covered include problem identification, research design, computer data analysis, and report writing. (Prerequisite: 71-541, or 71-542, or equivalent.)
This course introduces MBA students to current finance theory. Topics include: consumption and investment; the role of capital markets; uncertainty and the theory of choice; models of capital market efficiency; and corporate investment, capital structure, and dividend policies. (4 lecture hours a week.)
This course introduces MBA students to current finance theory. Topics include: consumption and investment; the role of capital markets; uncertainty and the theory of choice; models of capital market efficiency; and corporate investment, capital structure, and dividend policies. (Prerequisite: 72-570 or equivalent.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
A course covering financial markets, investment alternatives, the concepts of risk and return, market efficiency; and an introduction to portfolio theory and management. (Prerequisite: 72-570.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
Economic background to securities analysis; types of corporate securities for investment; theory and mechanics of investment; general analysis and valuation procedures; valuation of fixed income securities and common stocks; procedures in analysis of government, industrial, financial and public utility securities; portfolio management. (Prerequisite: 72-572 or equivalent.)
Objectives of individual and institutional portfolios. Security selection, diversification, marketability, risk, and return in portfolio construction. Timing and formula plans, bond portfolio problems, performance measurement, trading problems, tax planning, supervision, quantitative techniques for portfolio management, regulations. (Prerequisite: 72-572 or equivalent.)
An advanced case course in financial management. Financial concepts and principles of managing a business enterprise are illustrated. Planning for the acquisition and use of funds so as to maximize the value of the firm is examined through the use of case analysis. (Prerequisite: 72-571 or equivalent.)
An in-depth study of topical issues in finance. A reading and research seminar dealing with major concepts and problems in the area of financial management. Precise topics to be covered during a term will vary according to current trends in the literature. (Prerequisite: 72-571 or equivalent.)
A study of the problems facing the international financial manager. Topics include: international markets, spot and forward currency fluctuations, positioning of corporate funds, investment decisions, hedging and exposure management. (Prerequisite: 72-571.)
This course is designed to equip students with some of the analytic tools which are necessary for the study of decision-making processes in a business organization. Topics include statistical tools such as the presentation of data, probability and probability distributions, estimation, hypothesis testing, analysis of variance, regression, correlation, and operations research techniques such as linear programming, decision analysis, and inventory control. (4 lecture hours a week.)
This course provides an overview of information systems/technologies and its integration into effective management in organizations. Topics include introduction to MIS; computer hardware/software; system analysis and design. Individual and team projects/presentations are required for this course. (4 lecture hours a week.)
A study of managerial techniques for production and operations analysis. Topics may include forecasting, aggregate planning, inventory control, material requirements planning, statistical quality control, etc. (Prerequisite: 73-500 or equivalent.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
An introduction to the use of quantitative techniques in management. Topics include linear programming, transportation models, inventory models, queueing models, and simulation. (Prerequisite: 73-500 or equivalent.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
This course focuses on multiple regression models incorporating a computer package like SAS or SPSS for analysing the data. Other topics include: factor analysis, discriminant analysis, and multidimensional scaling. Team or individual presentations may be required based on selected topics. (Prerequisite: 73-500 or equivalent.)
An in-depth study of selected topics in production and operations analysis. Topics may include inventory control, operations scheduling, quality and assurance, reliability and maintainability, recent advances in manufacturing technologies, etc. (Prerequisites: 73-502, a calculus course, or consent of the instructor.)
This course provides a study of selected topics in management science. Topics may include network models, integer programming, dynamic programming, non-linear programming, Markov chains, Markov decision processes, stochastic models, etc. (Prerequisites: 73-503, a calculus course, or consent of the instructor.)
An introduction to the macro and micro environment of marketing. The course will review marketing's role in the economy as well as marketing's function within the business firm. Emphasis will be placed on the major elements of the marketing mix (i.e., product, price, place, and promotion). Objectives of the course are to provide an overview of the marketing process and an introduction to management decision-making in marketing. (4 lecture hours a week.)
An analysis of the concepts and theories of human behaviour as they relate to the purchase and consumption of products and services and their implications for marketing decisions. (Prerequisite: 74-530.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
An introduction to the theory and methods of marketing research with the aim of supporting marketing strategy decision-making. Stressing the philosophy of science, the course addresses research design and planning, data collection, and data analysis techniques. (Prerequisites: 74-530 and 73-500 or equivalent.) (4 lecture hours a week.)
A study of analytical concepts and research techniques derived from the behavioural sciences or developed from consumer behaviour research. A significant objective of the course is the application of such concepts and techniques to the solution of marketing problems. (Prerequisite: 74-531.)
An advanced course assuming familiarity with the conceptual research process, characteristics of basic data collection modes and measurement, hypothesis testing, regression analysis, and analysis of variance. Utilizing a discussion format, the course offers a review of current marketing research literature concerning: 1) examinations of properties of familiar data collection and analysis techniques; 2) examples of their application; and 3) introduction to more advanced data collection and analysis methods. (Prerequisite: 74-532.)
A seminar covering all major issues relating to distribution activities at a micro and macro level. Topics covered include the development of channel systems, the behavioural and legal aspects of channel relationships, and approaches to total distribution system management. (Prerequisite: 74-530.)
A study of the problems faced by Canadian businesses when exploring and distributing to foreign markets. A significant objective of the course is to explore, through research findings, strategies that would improve Canada's international marketing efforts. (Prerequisite: 74-530.)
An advanced study of the management of the advertising function. Topics for discussion will include the development of the overall promotional plan, determination of the advertising budget, formulation of the advertising campaign, media selection, timing of expenditures, and evaluating advertising effectiveness. Consideration is also given to public policy issues including the legal, social, and ethical aspects of advertising. (Prerequisite: 74-530.)
This course is of varying content dealing with topical issues in marketing. The course might focus on a specific functional area in marketing or a particular environment for the application of marketing concepts. Administration of the course varies as appropriate with its content and might take on a literature survey, research project, experiential, or other format. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing and permission of the instructor.)
An analysis of the formation of marketing strategies and plans. Topics covered will include business definitions, developing marketing objectives, selecting market targets, developing all aspects of the marketing mix, and evaluating marketing performance. Marketing decision models, portfolio techniques, generic strategies, PIMS, and related topics will also be covered. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing and a minimum of four previous marketing courses.)
A survey of the law as it applies to business administration in Canada. Lectures and case discussions are utilized to cover the key areas of the law including: the role of the courts, torts, contracts, special types of contracts, real property, forms of business organization, and credit transactions. (4 lecture hours a week.)
A strategic management approach to the analyses and integration of cultural, legal, political, economic, environmental, and institutional factors as they relate to the problems of administering viable multinational and transnational enterprises. Particular emphasis is given to developing managerial perspective in international payments, technology, trade, and investment areas through the use of models and case studies. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing.)
A critical evaluation of contemporary models, theories, and processes as they apply to the international linkages of functional, business-unit and corporate levels in global strategic management and operational decision-making. Special attention is given to case studies regarding the process of developing and maintaining an effective strategic capability in a dynamic global environment. (Prerequisite: 75-680.)
An advanced research seminar in key problem areas of international business. Selected problems typical of those confronting contemporary multinational and transnational enterprises will be researched using models, theories, secondary information, and empirical data collected from the inter-regional and international communities of the Windsor-Detroit area. Proposed solutions and recommendations will be presented for class discussion. (Prerequisite: 75-680.)
A study of business strategic planning for an uncertain future. Utilizing a combination of case studies, lectures, and research seminars, these topics will be covered: environmental analysis, scenario construction, strategic issues analysis, strategic plan development, strategic planning techniques, strategic planning systems, and the politics of strategic planning in the context of the single business firm and the diversified corporation. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing.)
An in-depth study of business strategy for developing a profitable position in a given product-market segment that is defensible against competitors. The course aims at developing a working understanding of the fundamental determinants of competition in industries and the factors that shape the competitive success or failure of firms. It develops a framework for analysing an industry and its array of competitors and provides analytic techniques for making the strategic decisions concerning capacity expansion, vertical integration, divestment, and entry into new industries. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing.)
As North America moves into the post-industrial era, many firms face crises brought on by declining growth rates, increased foreign competition, product substitution or rapid technological change. This course begins with a structural analysis of competition in hostile environments (e.g., mature and declining industries) and examines such topics as exit barriers, wars of attrition, and organizational implications of maturity. The focus then shifts to the strategic alternatives available to firms including turnaround, retrenchment, merger, managed decline, and divestiture.
This course is designed for the career manager (or those planning such) in public sector or private voluntary organizations. It begins with an examination of the overall process of strategic decision-making and strategy formation and then pursues in detail the following topics: structural problems of services, the behavioural theory of not-for-profit organizations (NPOs), the community network of NPOs, strategic planning process, organization design, control systems and their impact on strategy, financial management, power and politics in and around NPOs. The course will include case analysis, seminar discussions with managers of community organizations, site visits, and a community project. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing.)
An advanced study of administrative systems and processes linking public and private business sectors. This includes strategic use of relationships between private business firms and governments. Complex business-government systems and relationships are analyzed using information readily available from governmental sources, trade associations, and case histories. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing.)
An examination of entrepreneurship and management of the entrepreneurial firm with special emphasis on the process of creating a new business venture. Topics include the generation of business ideas, assessment of opportunity, designing the venture concept, strategic planning, financing and management of a new enterprise during the start-up phase and beyond. Course activities include case studies, feasibility studies and visits by guest entrepreneurs. Students are expected to prepare a comprehensive business plan for a new venture of their choice. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing.)
This course introduces students to the case study approach for understanding and dealing with strategic issues facing the firm. The focus is the application of case research to the concerns of top management. Students are expected to develop and write cases based on field research of business corporations in the disciplines of strategic management, international business and entrepreneurship. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing.)
An independent study course designed to allow students to pursue their own interests in important business areas which are not thoroughly covered in existing courses. The student will undertake an original paper or research project on a topic which would enhance his or her program of study. This independent study and the major paper must not substantially be one and the same. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing and permission of the respective instructor.)
As the capstone of the M.B.A. program this course integrates the knowledge of prior courses and focuses them on strategy-making as the central function of general management. Concepts, theory, and current practice coordinated with selected cases from dynamic business situations are combined to study in depth the strategy formulation and implementation processes in the context of the single and multi-business firms. (Prerequisite: Candidate-year standing and all other required M.B.A. courses.)
McGarvey, Bruce R.; B.A. (Carleton College), M.A., Ph.D. (Illinois), F.C.I.C.—1972.
Tuck, Dennis G.; B.Sc., Ph.D., D.Sc. (Durham), F.C.I.C., F.R.S.C. (U.K.)—1972.
Thibert, Roger J.; B.A. (Western Ontario), M.S. (Detroit), Ph.D. (Wayne State), F.C.I.C.—1953.
McKenney, Donald J.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Western Ontario), Ph.D. (Ottawa)—1964.
McIntosh, John M.; B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (M.I.T.), F.C.I.C.—1968.
Drake, John E.; B.Sc., Ph.D., D.Sc. (Southampton), F.C.I.C.—1969.
Stephan, Douglas W.; B.Sc. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1982.
Aroca, Ricardo; B.Sc. (Chile), Ph.D. (Moscow State), D.Sc. (Leningrad)—1985.
Jones, William E.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Mount Allison), Ph.D. (McGill)—1991. (Vice-President, Academic)
Szabo, Arthur G.; B.Sc. (Queen's), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), F.C.I.C.—1994. (Head of the Department)
Taylor, Keith E.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1976.
Mutus, Bulent; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Waterloo), Ph.D. (Manitoba)—1982.
Adeli, Khosrow; B.Sc. (Tehran), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Ottawa), Dipl. Clin. Chem. (Toronto)—1988.
Loeb, Stephen J.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1990.
Lee, Lana; A.B. (Mount Holyoke), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1986.
Green, James R.; B.Sc. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Waterloo)—1989.
Wang, Suning; B.Sc. (Jilin), Ph.D. (Yale)—1990.
Dutton, Philip J.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Victoria)—1991.
Christopoulos, Theodore K.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Athens), Dipl. Clin. Chem. (Toronto)—1992.
Adjunct Professors
Asselstine, Harold S.; B.Sc., M.D. (McGill), F.R.C.P.(C); Medical Director, Medical Laboratories of Windsor—1969.
Draisey, Thomas F.; M.B., Ch.B. (Bristol), F.R.C.Path.; Department of Pathology, Salvation Army Grace Hospital and Windsor Western Hospital Centre—1969.
Taylor, Norman F.; B.A., M.A., D. Phil. (Oxon), F.R.S.C. (U.K.)—1973.
Zak, Bennie; B.S., Ph.D. (Wayne State); Department of Pathology. Wayne State University School of Medicine, Detroit—1975.
Spitz, Werner U.; M.D. (Hadassah); Pathologist, Macombe Munroe Counties Medical Examiner—1978.
Kovacs, Gregory J.: B.Sc., M.Sc., Ph.D (Toronto)—1991.
Nazri, Gholam-Abbas; B.S., M.S. (Tehran), Ph.D. (Case Western Reserve)—1991.
Foreback, Craig C.; B.A. (South Florida), Ph.D. (South Florida); Director of Clinical Chemistry, Henry Ford Hospital, Detroit —1986.
Yee, George E.; M.D. (Manitoba), F.R.C.Path.; Director of Pathology Laboratories, Metropolitan General Hospital, Windsor—1986.
Cheung, Raphael M.C.; M.D. (Toronto), F.R.C.P.(C); Medical Director, Lipid Clinic, Windsor Western Hospital—1988.
Drury, Craig F.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Guelph); Agriculture Canada—1991.
Artiss, Joseph D.; B.Sc., M.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1993.
Catomeris, Peter; B.Sc. (Toronto), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1993.
Sellers, Allyson R.; B.A. (Guelph), B.Ed. (Lakehead), M.D. (McMaster)—1993.
The Department provides facilities for students wishing to proceed to the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Students may enrol in graduate studies in Chemistry and Biochemistry. One field of study in Chemistry id Clinical Chemistry, which is approved by the Canadian Academy of Clinical Chemistry and is accredited by the Commission on Accreditation in Clinical Chemistry (U.S.A.).
In addition to the general requirements outlined in 1.5.2, the following requirements must be met by all students proceeding to the Ph.D. degree:
1) Course Work: Candidates must complete successfully at least eight courses (or four courses if the candidate enters the program with an M.Sc. degree) chosen from the available graduate offerings in the student's field or from related and cognate courses, with the approval of the Department. Credit for up to a maximum of two courses may be given for equivalent courses taken as an undergraduate, provided that a grade of at least A- was achieved in the courses.
Ph.D. Candidates who are studying in the field of Clinical Chemistry are required to take the following core courses: 59-564, 59-680, 59-681, 59-683, 59-684, 59-685, and 59-686. Candidates who have taken any of these courses for an M.Sc. degree will be given credit for those courses successfully completed. They will also participate in a Hospital Rotation Program which is designated as the course, 59-689.
The program in the field of Clinical Chemistry is approved by the certification committee of the Canadian Academy of Clinical Chemistry as fulfilling all of the academic requirements, and one year of the required practical experience. The Ph.D. program is also accredited by the Commission on Accreditation in Clinical Chemistry (U.S.A.).
2) Seminars: In addition to the above course work, students must attend the regular departmental Seminar (59-795) throughout their Ph.D. studies and present at least one seminar on their research as a fulfillment of this requirement.
3) Dissertation: The principal requirement for the Ph.D. degree is the presentation of a dissertation which embodies the results of an original investigation (59-798). For general requirements of the dissertation, see 1.5.3.
A student who fails to achieve satisfactory performance in all aspects of the program (e.g., course work, seminars, and dissertation work) may be required to withdraw.
4) Doctoral Committee: The Ph.D. committee is chosen in the manner described in 1.5.2. This committee will meet with the student annually to review his or her progress. As part of this review the student will present a short seminar on his or her research progress.
5) Examinations: In addition to examinations connected with course work, all students proceeding to the Ph.D. degree must meet the following requirements:
(a)Qualifying Examination for Admission to the Ph.D. Program: Students who wish to transfer to a Phd. program from and M.Sc. program will be required to satisfactorily complete an oral comprehensive examination in the first twenty-four months of graduate study prior to transfer. For students who enrol directly in a Ph.D. program, the qualifying examination must be completed within the first twelve months of the doctoral program. The examination will take the form of a ten to twenty minute presentation of the student's research work to date, followed by a question and answer session in which the student's depth of knowledge of the field of research and the underlying chemical and/or biochemical principles will be examined. The student may be assessed by a committee of three members comprised of the research advisor and two other faculty members from the Department. As a guide to the student, the committee will provide some directed readings prior to the examination. The student will be expected to understand the subject matter and background of these topics. A grade of Pass or Fail will be given. In the event of a failing grade, the student may be allowed a second examination within one month, or a specific assignment for subsequent evaluation at the discretion of the examining committee. It may be possible that the student will not be allowed to repeat the examination.
(b)Final Examination: Each candidate will take a final oral examination in defense of the dissertation on the recommendation of the doctoral committee. An external examiner, chosen for acknowledged scholarship in the appropriate field of chemistry, biochemistry or clinical chemistry, will normally be present during the oral examination. The external examiner will be selected by the doctoral committee, subject to the approval of the Head of the Department and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. The examination will be public and will involve a short seminar presentation by the candidate. The examination will be chaired by the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research or delegate.
In addition to the general requirements and stipulations outlined in 1.6.2 for the Master's degree, the following requirements must be met by students proceeding to the M.Sc. degree.
1) Course Work: Candidates must complete successfully at least four courses chosen from the available graduate offerings in the student's field or from related and cognate courses, with the approval of the Department. Credit for up to a maximum of two courses may be given for equivalent courses taken as an undergraduate, provided a grade of at least A- was achieved in the course.
M.Sc. candidates in Clinical Chemistry will be required to take the following core courses: 59-564, 59-680, 59-681, 59-682, 59-683, 59-684, 59-685, and 59-686. These candidates will also take a Practical Laboratory Methodology course (59-589). With the permission of the Department, a student in the Clinical Chemistry program may substitute for the thesis a Major Clinical Chemistry Critique (59-796) upon which the student will be examined by the Committee.
The M.Sc. program in Clinical Chemistry is accredited by the Commission on Accreditation in Clinical Chemistry (U.S.A.). This program has been approved by the National Registry in Clinical Chemistry (U.S.A.) as fulfilling all of the academic requirements and a portion of the practical experience for certification by examination at the Clinical Chemist level.
2) Seminars: In addition to the above course work, students must attend the regular departmental Seminar (59-795) throughout their M.Sc. studies and present at least one seminar on their research as a fulfillment of this requirement.
3) Thesis: A student must undertake original research and embody the results in a thesis (59-797). The student will then be examined by a committee.
A student who fails to achieve satisfactory performance in all aspects of the program (e.g., course work, seminars, thesis work or major critique) may be required to withdraw.
4) Master's Committee and Final Examinations: The Master's committee is chosen in the manner described in 1.6.2. The final examination will take the form of an open seminar in the presence of the Master's committee (see 1.6.2). The examination will be open to the public.
Postdoctoral trainees will be selected from candidates who hold a Doctor of Philosophy in Biochemistry or Chemistry. Trainees may also be chosen from graduates in the field of medicine, provided that their training in chemistry and biochemistry is demonstrably adequate.
1) Residence Requirements: The postdoctoral diploma program is of two years duration on a full-time basis, i.e., twenty-four months. This period may not be counted as residence for a Ph.D. program at the University of Windsor.
2) Course Work: Trainees in this program must successfully complete the following minimum course work:
(a)Clinical Chemistry (59-680 and 59-681), Clinical Biochemistry (59-682 and 59-683), Principles of Disease (59-684), Diagnosis of Disease (59-685) and Biochemistry and Expression of Nucleic Acids (59-564).
(b)Seminar (59-795) to be taken each year in which the trainee is registered.
(c)Clinical Chemistry Laboratory Methodology (59-589) and Clinical Chemistry Research and Development (59-689) for a total of 1500 hours. These courses will be in the form of practical laboratory experience at one or more of the following hospitals in Windsor: Grace Hospital, Windsor Western Hospital Centre, Hotel Dieu Hospital, and Metropolitan General Hospital; or at Henry Ford Hospital or Oakwood Hospital in Detroit, Michigan.
Trainees will be expected to undertake an original piece of research of publishable standard and to be prepared to present it at a scientific meeting. The research may be in the fields of Clinical Chemistry, Biochemistry of Disease, or Biochemistry.
3) Additional Course Requirements: A trainee may be required to take a minimum of six courses. These courses will be assigned to the trainees as required in order to given them a thorough background in the appropriate areas of Chemistry, Biochemistry, and Biology. Advanced standing will normally be granted for courses previously taken.
Any trainee who fails to maintain satisfactory standing in course work, Clinical Chemistry Laboratory Methodology (59-589) and Clinical Chemistry Research and Development (59-689), or research, may be required to withdraw.
4) Diploma Committee: The Head of the Department will establish the trainee's diploma committee in consultation with the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. This committee will consist of four members, three of whom will be chosen from the Chemistry Department, and will include the Adjunct Professor at the appropriate hospital. The committee will meet with the trainee to review his or her progress as necessary.
September—April: course work and initiation of a research project. May—August: Clinical Chemistry Laboratory Methodology (59-589), 700 Hours minimum. This latter portion of time (seventeen weeks) will be spent obtaining practical experience in a hospital laboratory under the joint direction of a faculty member of the University and the pathologist, who is an Adjunct Professor in the Department of Chemistry and Biochemistry at the University. During this period the trainee will be required to obtain a reasonable mastery of the various operations of a clinical chemistry laboratory. Rotation through the various areas of the laboratory, as well as various sections of the clinical chemistry laboratory, will be required. At this stage orientation regarding administration of the laboratory will be carried out.
Remaining course work, if any, will be completed during the second year, and research will be continued. The time distribution between the hospital experience and university/hospital research (59-689) will be on a 40%/ 60% basis in all the following periods:
1) Two months will be spent in special and developmental chemistry, and further experience in laboratory administration will be gained.
2) Four months will be spent in developmental chemistry, and the administration of a section of the clinical chemistry laboratory will be undertaken.
3) Six months will be spent in the administration of the clinical chemistry laboratory (gradually taking over the major administrative function of the entire clinical chemistry laboratory) under the supervision of the Adjunct Professor.
4) Two months will be spent in molecular diagnosis of disease and DNA diagnostics.
In order to ensure that the trainees obtain maximum experience in all the phases of clinical chemistry available in Windsor, rotation from hospital to hospital will occur as required during the latter training period.
Participation in Professional Meetings: During the second year, trainees will be strongly encouraged to attend a meeting of clinical chemists (e.g., Canadian Society of Clinical Chemists, American Association for Clinical Chemistry) and present a paper on the subject of their research. The subject of this paper will, if possible, be submitted for publication.
Trainees will also be required to participate in and give conferences dealing with Clinical Chemistry or Clinical Biochemistry on a regular basis along with other clinical chemists, graduate students in Clinical Chemistry and the Adjunct Professors from the affiliated hospitals.
The Postdoctoral Diploma is approved as fulfilling all of the academic requirements and the required practical experience by the certification committee of the Canadian Society of Clinical Chemists. The Postdoctoral Program is accredited by the Canadian Society of Clinical Chemists and the Commission on Accreditation in Clinical Chemistry (U.S.A.).
All of the courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any one year. Topics courses may be taken several times provided the course content is different. Where prerequisites are not stated, consent of the instructor is required.
(Prerequisite: 59-321. (2 lecture hours a week.)
Topics may include polymer chemistry, natural product chemistry, physical organic chemistry, or design and execution of organic syntheses. (Prerequisite: 59-331 or consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Physical organic chemistry. Includes molecular orbital theory, stereochemistry, thermodynamics, and reaction mechanisms. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Development of statistical thermodynamics and its application to theories of gases, condensed states, and chemical equilibria. (2 lecture hours a week.)
Theory and applications of FT NMR in chemical problems, special techniques such as T1, T2 measurements, cross polarization, "magic angle" spinning, 2D spectroscopy, DEPT pulse sequences, and others will be covered. (2 lecture hours a week.)
(2 lecture hours a week.)
Electronic and vibrational spectroscopy of gases, liquids, and solids. Theory and practice of infrared and Raman spectroscopy. Theory and applications of electron spin resonance spectroscopy. (2 lecture hours a week.)
Various applications of group theory to the study of organic, inorganic, and organometallic systems. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Topics to be arranged by the instructor, based primarily upon new developments in the field as illustrated by the current research interests of the faculty, as well as by a study of the current literature. (2 lecture hours a week.)
Theoretical and experimental aspects of single crystal X-ray diffraction methods for the determination of molecular structures. (2 lecture hours a week.)
An advanced lecture and laboratory course dealing with DNA science and the application of DNA technology in the understanding and diagnosis of human disease. The lectures cover the biochemistry and expression of DNA and RNA at the molecular level, the theory and practice of recombinant DNA technology and the application of DNA probes in the diagnosis of human disease. The laboratory component involves construction and cloning of a recombinant DNA molecule. (Prerequisites: 59-360, 59-361, and 59-365, or consent of instructor; antirequisite: 59-468.) (2 lecture hours, 1 laboratory hour a week.)
The structure and function of artificial and natural membranes. Special consideration will be given to the identification and function of membrane proteins. (Prerequisites: 59-360 and 59-361 or 59-362 and 59-363, or equivalent.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Perturbation and variation theories. Theories of many electron atoms and general theories of chemical bonds in diatomic and polyatomic molecules. (Prerequisite: 59-341 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Analysis of drugs and other toxic substances in biological fluids. The metabolism of drugs as well as the symptomology of poisoning of common therapeutic drugs and the more common industrial chemicals will be discussed. (Prerequisites: 59-360 and 59-361 or 59-362 and 59-363, or consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
A detailed study of the existing clinical chemistry laboratory procedures. Seminars, papers, and field trips will be required. (Minimum 700 hours.)
A special course of studies with content and direction approved by the student's research advisor and supervisory committee. Although there may be no formal lecture requirements, the course will be equivalent to three one-hour lectures a week for one term. The student will be required (a) to produce a critical review which will be assessed by his or her supervisory committee; the presentation and standard of the review must be appropriate for publication in a scientific journal; (b) to spend one term working in an agreed industrial setting; the quality of work will be assessed by the supervisory committee. This work may be related to but not part of the research undertaken in 59-797 or 59-798. (Prerequisite: approval of the Department.)
The course cannot be repeated for credit under (a) above. Under normal circumstances, M.Sc. students may take this course only once; Ph.D. students may register under (b) above for two terms of this industrial experience.
Surface spectroscopic techniques and their application to the analysis of chemisorbed and physisorbed species and monomolecular layers. (Prerequisite: 59-321 or equivalent.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
A study of some important organic reactions with emphasis on their practical application in synthesis. (Prerequisites: 59-330 and 59-331, or consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
The design, execution, and methodology of total syntheses of complex molecules will be discussed. Emphasis will be placed on both retrosynthetic pathways and execution. (Prerequisites: 59-330 and 59-331, or consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Topics to be arranged by the instructor, based primarily upon new developments in the field as illustrated by the current research interests of the faculty, as well as by a study of the current literature. (Prerequisites: 59-330 and consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Special topics in organic chemistry will be described. Some of these may include natural product chemistry, organometallic chemistry or heterocyclic chemistry. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
A survey of structure, mechanism, and theory in organic chemistry. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
A detailed study of selected advanced topics in organometallic chemistry. Typical subjects include (at the discretion of the instructors) main group organometallic chemistry; thermochemical methods in organometallic chemistry; catalysis by organometallics, detailed structural studies. (2 or 3 lecture hours a week.)
Topics to be arranged by the instructor, based primarily upon new developments in the field as illustrated by the current research interests of the faculty, as well as by a study of the current literature. (2 lecture hours a week.)
Spectroscopic applications to inorganic systems. Typical of topics covered from year to year are optical spectroscopy, vibrational spectroscopy and normal coordinate analysis, ESR and NMR spectroscopy, and photoelectron spectroscopy. (2 lecture hours a week.)
Protein chemistry; chemical modification, protein folding, post-translational modification, lipoproteins, and glycoproteins. (Prerequisite: 59-365 or equivalent.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Biophysical chemistry; advanced kinetic techniques, pre-steady state, perturbation based methods, review of instrumentation, and examples of how these techniques are currently used to solve biochemical problems. (Prerequisite: 59-660.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
(Prerequisites: 59-360 and 59-361, or 59-362 and 59-363, or equivalent.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Topics to be selected by registrants but will generally be molecular orbital calculations for organic and inorganic chemists. (2 lecture hours a week.)
A study of the chemistry, significance, and applications of current techniques in clinical chemistry. The application of radiochemistry in the clinical laboratory will also be discussed. Term paper, field trips, and seminars will be required. (Prerequisites: 59-360 or 59-362, or equivalent, and 59-321 or equivalent.) (2 lectures a week.)
The continuation of Clinical Chemistry I. (Prerequisite: 59-680.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
A discussion of the biochemistry of human disease, including various aspects of physiological chemistry. Term paper and/or seminars will be required. (Prerequisites: 59-360 and 59-361 or 59-362 and 59-363, or equivalent.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
The continuation of Clinical Biochemistry I. (Prerequisite: 59-682.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Introductory course in human pathology with special emphasis on chemical aspects of disease. An examination of the interrelationships and homeostatic control of the major biochemical parameters in health, and the cause and nature of the anomalies of these parameters occurring in disease. (Prerequisites: Biology 55-110 and 55-111, 59-360 or 59-362, or equivalent, and consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week and demonstrations.)
An advanced course in human pathology with special emphasis on the chemical aspects of disease. A case-oriented approach to the diagnosis of disease based primarily on examination of the biochemical parameters, with the aim not only of identifying the disease, but also of explaining the significance of the pertinent biochemical parameters. (Prerequisite: 59-684 and/or consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
(Prerequisite: 59-360 or 59-362, or equivalent.) (2 lecture hours a week.)
Original research and comparative studies leading to the development of new clinical chemistry methods. Seminars and papers will be required. (Prerequisite: 59-589.) (Minimum 800 hours.)
This course focuses on the development and presentation of a research proposal, as well as the cultivation of a wide base of knowledge of the chemical and biochemical literature. Techniques of research proposal composition, with particular reference to subject area, budgetary considerations, and written and oral presentation techniques will be discussed. The student will be required to develop and defend his or her own research proposal in chemistry and/or biochemistry. The subject of this proposal must not be from the research work undertaken for the Ph.D. thesis. A written proposal will be submitted to the student's advisory committee and will be followed by an oral presentation and defense of the proposal. The advisory committee will evaluate the originality, the significance, the clarity of the written and oral presentation, and the student's knowledge of the area in the defense. (Prerequisite: registration in the Ph.D. program. The oral presentation and proposal defense will take place during the term of registration.)
Romanow, Walter I.; B.A. (Saskatchewan), M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1965.
Edmunds, Hugh H.; B.A. (Saskatchewan), M.Ed., (Wayne State)—1971.
Cunningham, Stanley B.; B.A. (Manitoba), M.S.L. (Pontifical Institute of Mediaeval Studies), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1961.
(UNISA)—1977.
Surlin, Stuart H.; B.S. (Roosevelt), M.S. (Illinois), Ph.D. (Michigan State)—1977.
Cuthbert, Marlene L.; B.A. (Queens), M.A. (Columbia), Ph.D. (Syracuse), Dip. Communication Policy and Planning for Development (The Hague)—1986.
Linton, James M.; B.A. (York), M.A. (Pennsylvania)—1972.
King, Christopher R.; B.A. (Grinnell College), M.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Wisconsin), M.B.A. (York)—1974.
Winter, James P.; B.J., M.J. (Carleton), Ph.D. (Syracuse)—1981.
Goldman, Irvin; B.A. (Winnipeg), M.S. (Purdue), Ph.D. (Iowa)—1981.
Lewis, Richard F., B.S. (Loyola College), M.S., M.S., Ph.D. (Syracuse)—1983.
Hildebrandt, Kai; M.A. (Hamburg), M.A., Ph.D. (Michigan)—1985.
Assistant Professor
Ruggles, Myles A.; M.A., Ph.D. (Simon Fraser)—1994.
Programs of Study
The graduate program in COmmunication Studies is devoted to the study, analysis, and understanding of the role of communication in contemporary culture in Canada and abroad. The program focuses on two major areas: Canadian and International Communication Policy and Systems, and Culture and Theory.
Course Areas
Required Core: 40-500, 40-535, 40-537, 40-575.
Supplementary Core: 40-505, 40-572.
Political Economy and Policy: 40-557, 40-561, 40-570, 40-577.
Culture and Communication: 40-502, 40-560, 40-562, 40-565.
Special: 40-591, 40-595.
Thesis Media Production, Project or Paper, Thesis: 40-795, 40-796, 40-797.
Admission Requirements
In addition to the general requirements outlined in 1.6.2, the following requirements must be met by all students proceeding to the Master's degree.
For admission to the final year of the program, the Department requires an honours Bachelor's degree in Communication Studies or its equivalent, including evidence of familiarity with research methods and communication theory. Students with a general degree, or an honours degree in another discipline, may be admitted to a Master's program requiring selected make-up courses. Generally, applicants should have a B+ or better grade average.
In addition to the requirements given in 1.3, complete application for admission includes the following:
(a)three completed confidential report forms, normally from academic references;
(b)a statement of purpose in pursuing graduate studies of about 500 to 750 words;
(c)a substantial example of written academic work from an undergraduate course or elsewhere; applicants who are seriously considering the thesis or major paper production option may want to include an example of production work as well;
(d)acceptable performance in the Graduate Record Examination (GRE);
(e)for students whose native language is not English, a score of at least 600 on the TOEFL (Test of English as a Foreign Language).
The deadline for September admission is March 31st. Students wishing to compete for scholarships are advised to submit all required application materials by February 1st. Although not encouraged, owing to timing of course offerings, students occasionally may be admitted in January. Deadline for completion of January applications is October 15th.
1) After receiving advising within the Department, the candidate may proceed toward the degree in one of the following programs of study:
(a)six courses, including: Communication Studies 40-500, a graduate-level research methods course, a graduate-level theory course, plus a thesis or a thesis media production. At least four courses must be at the 500 level in Communication Studies; the other two may be at the 400 level and/or in a cognate field. Most students will take at least five courses at the 500 level;
(b)eight courses including Communication Studies 40-500, a graduate-level research methods course, a graduate-level theory course, plus a major paper or a major project. At least six courses must be at the 500 level in Communication Studies; the others may be at the 400 level and/or in a cognate field.
2) The thesis media production and the major project will be social scinces productions equivalent to a research thesis or a major paper respectively, but may be submitted primarily in a non-print form with appropriate scholarly documentation. Students pursuing either of these options should have adequate background and experience in the appropriate non-print medium to be used , or undertake to attain such skills through course work (as part of required make-up courses, if appropriate, or on a non-credit basis). Students who choose either of these options are normally expected to complete 40-505 or 40-572.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year.
A survey of approaches to communication studies, and of current theory and research in the field. Required of all graduate students.
This seminar will focus on examining the connections between social relations and the politics of meaning. Attention will be paid to the ways in which social divisions and marginalized discourses, including those of race, class, and gender are made meaningful. A variety of institutionalized discourses will be examined, such as literary studies, anthropology, organizational culture, feminist theory, semiotics, linguistics, and structuralism/poststucturalism.
A study of the various ways research is, and can be utilized, in the production process to shape media form and content. Topics range from initial needs assessment, through content, audience, and mediation research, to formative and summative evaluations.
An examination of, and practice in, the role of quantitative approaches to the study of communication and mass communication, including such topics as content analysis, experimental and survey research, and the use of bivariate and multivariate statistics.
An examination of humanistic, critical, cultural, and historical approaches. Topics will be taken from a range of cultural studies and interpretative sources and will include a selection of methods, such as: collaborative/case inquiry, historical method, interpretive interactionism/biography, Q-methodology, field studies/ethnography, and discourse analysis.
An examination of selected mass media and telecommunication issues. Set in an historical context, the issues will be studied in terms of their social, cultural, political, economic, regulatory, and jurisdictional implications.
A study of the relationship between national/cultural development and communication systems with attention to national and international structural constraints. The seminar critiques the dominant paradigm and focuses on alternative paradigms, including indigenous and participatory approaches.
A study of communication policy issues and processes at the international level with particular reference to the implications of transnational data flows. Relevant international organizations, as well as national/regional/international constraints impinging upon the formation of policy, are also discussed.
An investigation into communication, nationally and internationally, between people of different cultures in mediated and personal, nonverbal and verbal contexts. Drawing on theory from both communication and other areas, the course examines film, literature, historical documents, business case studies, traveller's accounts, newspaper materials, and other data, and emphasizes practical as well as theoretical approaches.
An examination of the theory, operation, and effects of propaganda and persuasion strategies in historical and contemporary contexts.
A advanced inquiry into the social, cultural, economic, and political implications of digital communication and information technology. Participants will investigate selected planning and design issues in interactive communication infrastructure and applications.
This course involves the study of theoretical principles from various fields and their application in the message design process, as well as the recognition and analysis of the operation of theoretical elements in existing messages. Topics covered will be selected from the following areas: perception and attention; motivation; attitude change and persuasion; learning and infromation processing theories; models of needs analysis and message design; and content analysis, rhetorical analysis, semiotics, and discourse analysis.
A seminar dealing with contemporary communication theory. Discussion will focus on issues drawn from an array of theories and topics, including: the social limits of knowledge (knowledge claims); theories of ideology; social constructionism; cultural studies; systems theory; hermeneutics; semiology; and neo-psychoanalytical and post-modern approaches.
An exploration of theory in the tradition of political economists. Special attention will be given to broad, political-economic perspectives relating normative structures to ideology, discourse, and consciousness.
Special treatment of topics of current interest which may vary from year to year. Consult the Department for specific offerings in any given term. (May be repeated for credit with the permission of the Department Head.)
An individual tutorial in a topic not already covered in other graduate course listings. (By consent of Department only.)
(Prior completion of 40-505 or 40-572 is strongly recommended.)
Kent, Robert D., B.Sc. (British Columbia), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1982.
Bandyopadhyay,Subir;B.Sc.,B. Tech., M. Tech. (Calcutta), M. Math. (Waterloo), Ph.D. (Calcutta)—1984.
Frost, Richard A.; B.Sc. (Hons.) (London), M.Sc. (Aberdeen), Ph.D. (Strathclyde)—1987. (Director of the School)
Tsin, Yung H.; B.Sc. (Nanyang), M.Sc. (Calgary), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1985.
Morrissey, Joan; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Dublin)—1989.
Li, Liwu; M.Sc. (Beijing), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1991.
Park, Young G.; B.Sc. (Seoul), M.Sc. (K.A.I.S.T.), M.Sc., Ph.D. (N.Y.U.—1992.
Graduates of the University of Windsor or of other recognized colleges or universities may be admitted to programs leading to the Master's degree. A student with an honours Bachelor's degree or equivalent with adequate specialization in Computer Science and with at least B standing in the major subject may be admitted to a minimum one-year Master's program (II Master's Candidate). A student with a general Bachelor's degree with a major in Computer Science or an honours Bachelor's degree in a related subject and with at least B standing in the major subject may be admitted to a minimum two-year Master's program (I Master's Qualifying followed by II Master's Candidate) or to a minimum two-year II Master's Candidate program depending upon prior qualifications.
Students with deficiencies in some areas of Computer Science may be required to make up those deficiencies by registering in undergraduate courses prior to or as part of their graduate program or by following a program of supervised reading.
1) The requirements for the degree of Master of Science may be satisfied by pursuing a program of studies consisting of six approved courses and a thesis. (A thesis is a major research project which must involve substantial innovative work generally culminating in original results.)
2) Courses 60-510 and 60-520 will be required of all candidates. Master's II students must register in 60-510 in the first term of their studies.
3) With prior approval, candidates may be permitted to include at most one advanced undergraduate computer science course in their program.
4) With prior approval, candidates may be permitted to include graduate courses offered by other departments in their program.
5) No student will be allowed to include in his or her program a course which substantially overlaps a course previously taken.
6) All candidates' programs are subject to approval by the graduate coordinator.
A student who fails to achieve satisfactory performance in all aspects of the program (course work, thesis or major paper) may be required to withdraw.
The Master's committee is chosen in the manner described in 1.6.2 of this Graduate Calendar. The final examination will take the form of an open seminar in the presence of the Master's committee. The examination will be open to the public.
Each student must obtain approval of his or her program, in writing, from the graduate coordinator within three weeks of registration. Subsequent changes require written approval from the graduate coordinator.
Not all of the courses listed below will necessarily be offered in any one year. A component of certain courses will be offered in conjuction with an advanced undergraduate course; in such cases the undergraduate course work will comprise one half of the graduate course.
Note: Certain courses listed below require more than one term to complete. Unless sych courses are officially graded as "In Progress" (IP), regulations for incomplete grades will apply (see 1.4.3).
The purpose of this course is to prepare students for conducting the specific research on which their major paper or thesis will be based. Students are required to complete a thorough literature search on the general area in which they intend to conduct research and to undertake extensive supervised reading. Students must submit a comprehensive survey of relevant research, together with an annotated bibliography of important papers, theses, books, and conference proceedings. The survey should include a "citation lattice" indicating clearly the major papers in the area. The bibliography should include names and current addresses of scientists working in the student's chosen area and also a list giving details of relevant forthcoming conferences and workshops relevant to the student's chosen research area. Master's II students must register in 60-510 in the first term of their studies.
Candidates are required to attend the School seminars throughout their M.Sc. studies and, during each academic year, to present one seminar on a topic approved by the graduate coordinator. Students are also required to investigate, through reading and experimentation, eight "computing tools" including, for example, parser generators, database management packages, simulators, typesetters, synthesizer generators, VLSI design packages, and state-of-the-art programming languages. Each candidate will be required to submit a report comprising summary descriptions and evidence of successful non-trivial use of the eight tools investigated, together with critical reviews of four particular tools. The selection of tools to be investigated will be made by the student with the approval of the graduate coordinator within the first two weeks of the term. (This course has the same weight as the other courses, but is extended over a full academic year.)
Current developments in the theory and practice of system performance evaluation.
Current developments in selected aspects of database management. Topics covered may include data models, database languages, database logics, database machines, and transaction management.
Fundamental principles and advanced topics in the design of information retrieval systems. Theoretical as well as practical aspects will be discussed.
Current developments in the theory and practice of programming language design and implementation. Various languages will be considered and may include imperative, applicative, logic, constraint, object-oriented, and equational languages.
Current developments in computer graphics. Topics covered will include hardware, software, human interfaces, graphics standards, rendering techniques, and computational geometry.
Study of the limitations and complexity of computation.
Current developments in computer architecture. Topics will include parallel processing architectures and application/language specific architectures.
A programming-oriented introduction to selected topics in artificial intelligence. Topics to be covered may include: AI programming techniques, pattern matching systems, knowledge representation schemes, AI software engineering tools, and developments in software/hardware integration.
Current developments in the design, application, and implementation of pure lazy functional programming languages.
Current developments in the theoretical and practical aspects of knowledge base systems. In particular, the course will be concerned with the integration of database and AI theories and technologies.
With approval of the graduate coordinator, a student may undertake to write an original paper on a specialized topic which would enhance his or her program of study. The course will involve directed supervised reading and informal discussion with the graduate supervisor. The work undertaken in fulfilling the requirements for this course will not be counted directly for credit in the evaluation of either 60-796 (Major Paper) or 60-797 (M.Sc. Thesis). (May be taken more than once, with permission of the graduate coordinator, provided the topics are different.)
Selected advanced topics in computer science. (May be taken more than once, with permission of the graduate coordinator, provided the topics are different.)
(Prerequisite: 60-510.)
Gillen, William John; B.A. (Assumption), M.A. (Toronto)—1959.
Guccione, Antonio; Laurea (Palermo), Ph.D. (California)—1967.
Fortune, J. Neill; B.Sc.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Western Ontario), Ph.D. (Indiana)—1969.
Primorac, Emile; B.A., M.Comm. (Toronto), Ph.D. (London)—1971.
Charette, Michael F.; B.A., M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1976. (Head of the Department)
Meng, Ronald; B.Sc. (Trent), M.A., Ph.D. (Carleton)—1987.
Anglin, Paul; B.Sc. (Toronto), M.A., Ph.D. (Western Ontario) 1988.
Bajic, Vladimir; B.A., M.A. (Belgrade), M.A. (Williams), Ph.D. (Toronto—1984.
Fan, Yanqin; B.Sc. (Jilin), M.A., Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1989.
Hong, Chansik; B.A. (Seoul), Ph.D. (Chicago)—1989.
Gencay, Ramazan; B.Sc. (Middle East Tech. U., Ankara), M.A. (Guelph), Ph.D. (Houston)—1991.
Shi, Shouyong; B.Sc. (Huaxhong), M.A. Ph.D. (Toronto)—1991.
Wen, Quan; B.Sc. (Jilin), M.A., Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1991.
1) A student with an honours Bachelor's degree in Economics or its equivalent, with at least a major average of B, may be admitted to a minimum one-year Master's program. Applicants are expected to have completed one course in each of calculus, linear algebra and statistics. Applicants who have not completed the above mathematics requirements are encouraged to do so prior to beginning their graduate course work.
2) A student with a general degree, or an honours graduate in another discipline, with at least a B standing, may be admitted to a minimum two-year Master's program.
1) Students in the two-year program are required to take a make-up or qualifying year in their first year of the M.A. program. Selection of courses is to be made in consultation with a departmental graduate advisor.
2) Students in the one-year M.A. program (Candidate year) are required to complete:
(a)eight graduate courses and a major paper normally to be in conjunction with one of the courses;
(b)at least one course in microeconomics, one in macroeconomics and one in econometrics. Students intending to enter a Ph.D. program are advised to take 41-501, 41-502, 41-503, 41-504, 41-541, and 41-542.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in every term. Courses are normally three hours a week.
An intensive review of the theory of the firm and consumer theory.
An intensive review of theories of the determination of aggregate output, employment and price level.
Additional topics in microeconomic theory.
Additional topics in macroeconomic theory.
An introduction to the problem of international trade goods and services, and the related issues of exchange rate determination and balance of payments control.
The demand and supply analysis; human capital; trade unions and collective bargaining; wage structures; labour mobility.
Employment and unemployment; wage adjustment; distribution of income; selected policy issues.
This course covers the problems of social choice and institutions of collective decision making. Applications may include topics such as evaluating public sector projects and the response to externalities.
A theoretical and empirical analysis of firms and markets.
The general linear model, selected single equation problems, and an introduction to simultaneous equations methods.
Additional topics in econometric theory (Prerequiste: 41-541.)
The specification, estimation and testing of economic models. Emphasis will be on the classical linear regression model, the implications or violations of its basic assumptions and diagnostic testing. (This course is not intended for students who take 41-541.)
A survey of recent developments in the theory of money and monetary control of an economy, in addition to selected topics.
Selected topics in public expenditure theory such as public goods, externalities, public choice, and bureaucratic behaviour.
Optimal taxation, efficiency, equity, and fiscal effects of taxes; tax structure, user charges, government debt and borrowing.
A review of selected theoretical and policy issues based upon recent literature on the economic growth and development of less-developed economies. will be discussed.
This course studies the problems associated with significant changes in the economic organization of an entire economy. possible topics include the role and effectiveness of common incentive systems and the effects of an entrenched bureaucracy.
A review of game theory showing how strategic reasoning can be used as a tool in decision theory. Topics include solution concepts for Normal form and Extensive form games, plus applications.
An in-depth study of one or more centrally planned economies. Countries studied will vary from year to year but will be selected from among the USSR and other Eastern European countries.
The formal properties of selected economic models. Includes an examination of the problems of existence, uniqueness and stability of solutions.
An examination of the most recent literature on one or two selected topics in theory.
Theoretical and policy issues relating to large regions, including, for example, distribution of wealth, distribution of productive resources, and migration.
Theoretical and policy issues relating to urban areas, including, for example, urban growth and land use.
Research and reading course in a selected field approved by the Department.
Students are expected to attend the major paper seminar in at least two terms.
Undergraduate senior courses, which may be assigned at the discretion of the Department Head to form part or all of the requirements for the first year of the two-year graduate program, may be found in the Undergraduate Calendar (see 4.5.3).
Crawford, W. J. Ian; B.Sc. (Windsor), M.A. (Ed.) (Ottawa), M.Ed., Ed.D. (Wayne State)—1973. (Co-ordinator of the Pre-Service Program)
Awender, Michael A.; B.A., M.A. (Windsor), M.Ed. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Claremont)—1975. (Dean of the Faculty of Education)
Laing, Donald A.; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1976. (Co-ordinator of Graduate Studies)
Ball, Colin J.; M.A. (Oxon.), M.Ed. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Michigan)—1973.
Meyer, John R.; A.B. (St. John's, Minnesota), M.A. (Strasbourg), Ph.D. (Iowa)—1976.
Williams, Noel H.; B.A. (Sir George Williams), M.Ed. (McGill), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1976.
Kuendiger, Erika; Staatsexamen (Aachen), Dr. Phil. (Saarbruecken)—1984.
Diffey, Norman R.; B.A., Dip. Ed. (Oxon.), M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (McGill)—1987.
Morton, Larry; B.A. (Waterloo), B.Th. (O.B.C.), B.Ed. (O.T.E.C.), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1988.
Rubenstein, Rheta N.; B.A. (Michigan), M.Ed., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1989.
Flewelling, Janet; B.A. (Guelph), B.Ed. (Queen's), M.Ed., Ed.D. (Toronto)—1990.
The courses and programs leading to the academic professional degree of Master of Education are designed with two objectives: first, to provide the candidate with an opportunity to acquire advanced knowledge of the theoretical bases of education as expressed in philosophical concepts and elucidated by research findings and, second, to bridge the gap between theory and practice through increased understanding of educational issues and problems.
1) In addition to the requirements set forth in 1.3 and 1.6.1 for admission to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research, and to programs leading to a Master's degree, applicants to the Master of Education program must:
(a)present an undergraduate degree from an approved university with B standing overall and at least B standing in the final two years of study;
(b)present a Bachelor of Education degree or the equivalent professional preparation;
(c)have at least one year of successful professional experience in education;
(d)submit a "Statement of Personal Objectives" outlining the applicant's professional background and reasons for seeking a graduate degree in education.
2) In exceptional cases, the Faculty may admit applicants holding an honours Bachelor's degree or the equivalent with B standing overall and at least a B standing in the final two years of study who can demonstrate experience, interests and motivation that make them appropriate applicants to the program.
3) Advanced Standing: Applicants may be granted credit for up to two graduate term courses completed before application to the Master of Education program and taken in another Faculty at the University of Windsor or at another accredited institution. Requests for advanced standing will be considered only at the time of application and only for graduate courses completed with at least B standing. The Faculty will not grant credit for any course taken more than seven years before all the requirements for the degree have been fulfilled.
4) Admission to the Master of Education program is to the II Master's Candidate level.
1) Candidates for the Master of Education degree will pursue studies in one of two areas of concentration:
(a)Curriculum Studies;
(b)Educational Administration.
2) Candidates will follow either a major paper or a thesis program. Those who wish to include a thesis in their program must request approval from the Graduate Committee of the Faculty. Normally, the Committee will not consider such requests from part-time candidates until four courses have been completed.
Additional information concerning the procedures for theses and major papers may be obtained from the Coordinator of Graduate Studies.
3) In addition to the general requirements for a Master's degree set forth in 1.6.2 and 1.6.3, all candidates are required to complete successfully the equivalent of a minimum of ten term courses and the comprehensive examination in Education. Specific requirements include:
(a)two compulsory courses, 80-527 (Research in Education) and 80-510 (Statistics in Education);
(b)a research project resulting in either a major paper (80-796), with the value of two term courses, or a thesis (80-797), with the value of four term courses;
(c)in the case of candidates in Curriculum Studies proceeding to the degree by major paper, two courses must be selected from 80-524, 80-554 and 81-503, and an additional four courses must be selected from those listed under Curriculum Studies;
(d)in the case of candidates in Curriculum Studies proceeding to the degree by thesis, two courses must be selected from 80-524, 80-554 and 81-503, and an additional two courses must be selected from those listed under Curriculum Studies;
(e)in the case of candidates in Educational Administration proceeding to the degree by either major paper or thesis, at least four courses must be selected from those listed under Educational Administration. Candidates with four courses in Educational Administration may choose courses from Curriculum Studies to complete their programs;
(f)in the case of candidates following thesis programs, the comprehensive examination is the responsibility of their thesis committees.
4) Candidates with previous courses in research methods or statistics may request the Graduate Committee of the Faculty for permission to substitute other courses for either one or both of 80-527 and 80-510.
5) Transfer Credit: While the student is registered in the M.Ed. program, credit for up to two graduate term courses normally may be applied towards the degree from another Faculty at the University of Windsor or transferred from another accredited institution. Candidates must receive the approval of the Dean of the Faculty of Education or designate before taking such courses. Credit will be granted only for courses completed with at least a B standing.
6) Full-time candidates must complete all requirements for the degree within three years of their first registration.
7) Part-time students may not carry more than two courses in any term and must complete all requirements for the degree within five years of their first registration.
80-524.Fundamentals of Curriculum Theory and Development
80-554.Fundamentals of Instructional Design
81-503.The Psychology of Learning and Teaching
80-534.Individual Reading
81-537.Language Arts in the Elementary School
81-539.Second Language Teaching: Theories and Applications
81-541.The Social Sciences Curriculum
81-547.Learning in Science
81-551.Microcomputers for Educators
81-552.Curriculum Developments in Mathematics Education
81-553.The Teaching and Learning of Mathematics
81-556.Approaches to Literacy Development
81-557.English Education in the Intermediate and Senior Divisions
81-558.Psychology of Learning Problems
81-572.Theory and Practice in Early Childhood Education
A course may be selected from those listed under Educational Administration.
80-531.Supervision of the Instructional Process
80-534.Individual Reading
80-555.Strategies for the Implementation of Changes in Education
82-529.Theories of Educational Administration
82-532.Organization and Administration of the School
82-535.Organizational Behaviour in Educational Institutions
82-550.Issues in Educational Administration
82-560.Politics of Education
82-561.Legal Aspects of Education
82-562.Educational Finance
82-565.Sociological Aspects of Educational Administration
82-566.Interpersonal Relationships in Education
All courses will not necessarily be offered each year.
This course will deal with the following: descriptive and inferential statistical procedures; commonly used one- and two-sample tests; an introduction to analysis variance and corresponding research designs. (Prerequisite: 80-527 or permission of the instructor.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
A survey of the major theories of curriculum that have influenced education Canada. An outline of the techniques employed in curriculum development, including sources of influence and control, specification of outcomes, selection and coordination of activities, strategies, resources and evaluation. (3 hours a week.)
An overview of educational research methods: e.g., the interpretation of research literature, the identification and use of data bases, the design of research proposals and the application of specific methods to research projects. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A practice-oriented course designed to develop administrative competency in the supervision of instruction. The focus will be threefold: (1) awareness and recognition of specific technical skills, (2) the development of competence in interpersonal and group skills, and (3) a general examination of supervisory approaches. (3 lecture hours a week.)
The Individual Reading course is intended to permit students with special interests in, and knowledge of, particular areas of education not covered in sufficient depth in available courses to pursue those interests through independent, supervised study. (Permission of an advisor and of a subcommittee of the Graduate Studies Committee is required.)
This course will consider current principles, research, theory and practice in the design, development, implementation and evaluation of instruction within various learning and teaching settings. (3 hours a week.)
Procedures for dissemination, adoption, implementation, and integration of changes for teachers, administrators, and leaders of professional organizations. Attention will be given to theoretical models and their applications, change agency, and modification of organizational climate and structure. (3 hours a week.)
Conducted under the guidance of at least two members of the Faculty, a major paper may analyze and evaluate a substantial body of scholarly literature or describe or interpret a research project undertaken by the student. The major paper is subject to an oral examination (see Thesis or Major Paper, 1.6.3, and Program Requirements, 8.2.1).
(See Thesis or Major Paper, 1.6.3, and Program Requirements, 8.2.1.)
This course will provide students with an indepth view of psychological theory and research towards the understanding of learning and teaching. While both behavioural and cognitive perspectives will be discussed, the emphasis will be upon cognitive theory and application. Topics will include behaviourism, behaviour modification, information processing, metacognition, cognitive behaviour modification, cognitive strategy training, motivation and individual differences.(3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will examine issues in language arts instruction in the light of current language theories. The focus is on current research and its practical application, with special emphasis on methods of instruction, teacher strategies, student activities and evaluation practices. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course reviews current thinking on the nature of language, communication and second-language learning and examines implications for teaching methods and curriculum design. (3 lecture hours a week.)
An examination of trends and development of social science curricula. Curriculum theory will be applied to one or more of the social sciences within the context of provincial guidelines and the academic and professional qualifications of the students. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will consider current research and theory in the promotion of science as a process and product. Included will be a critical survey of recent issues in science education. The focus will be on their implications for curriculum and practice at the classroom level. An examination of some of the major difficulties in the design, development, implementation, and evaluation of science curricula. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A comprehensive survey of the uses of microcomputers in the classroom, including a discussion of current issues in the use of microcomputers by educators. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will examine recent developments in curriculum, instruction, and evaluation in elementary and secondary mathematics education. Trends will be discussed in light of recent research findings, technological advances, and social goals. International comparisons will be made.
This course will examine research into students' learning and the teaching of mathematics. First, the motivational aspects of teaching and learning will be considered, including those related to the topic "Women in Mathematics." Second, specific mathematical topics will be dealt with, selected according to the interests of students. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will consider current research and theory in the development of reading and writing abilities, and will examine some aspects of assessing literacy development. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will offer a critical survey of several recent theories and issues in English education. The focus will be on their implications for curriculum and practice at the classroom level. Current issues at the local or provincial level, determined by the group, will be examined in detail. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course reviews current theories of learning disabilities and learning problems. Various approaches to diagnosis and remediation are presented. Students are expected to discuss case study examples during the course, and to develop a particular interest area to great depth. (Prerequisite: 81-503 or permission of instructor.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
An examination of theory and current practice in Early Childhood Education. The emphasis will be on the translation of theory into sound educational practice. Organization and management of Early Childhood programs will be of concern as well as teaching procedures. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course examines curent knowledge in educational administration. Theory, research, and the practice of leadership within the educational system are the main focii. Emphasis will be placed on administrative problems, such as staff development, team building, and motivation. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course considers and analyzes the many variables impacting upon school administrators as they organize their schools. The effects of administrative theory, past and present, will be considered. A case study approach will be taken to the problems of day-to-day operation. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A study of theory and research in the socio-behavioral sciences which concerns the behavior of individuals and groups in educational settings. Attention is given to the implications of such theory and research for administration in educational institutions.
This course critically examines current issues affecting contemporary Canadian education. Issues will be addressed from a philosophical and sociological perspective in an educational administration context. Specific course content and instructors will be published in advance.
This course will examine the administration of education from a political perspective. Both the legal and extra-legal factors that influence educational outcomes will be examined. Their roles will be viewed in terms of comparative forms of educational administration. Finally, several administrative decisions will be analyzed using the perspectives gained throughout the course. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will focus on legislation and court decisions dealing specifically with the educational process. Both the historical and philosophical basis of these and the practical application of the same in a contemporary setting will form the primary emphasis for the course. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course is concerned with educational finance in Canada, with particular emphasis on Ontario. It examines such topics as equity, accountability, efficiency, and adequacy of educational revenues and expenditiures. Provincial grant systems are analyzed within the contexts of political governance and the economics of education. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will examine the school and its occupants and their relationship to the contemporary social order. Analysis of topics such as student culture, learning and social class, roles within the school setting will occur. The focus will be on theoretical positions, representative research findings and representative research methods. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course will analyze the importance and dynamics of interpersonal behaviour. Students will be given the opportunity to examine and develop their own skills in this area. Emphasis will also be placed upon a practical orientation toward utilizing these skills in the educational environment. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Ph.D. and M.A.Sc. degrees are offered in Civil Engineering, Electrical Engineering, Engineering Materials, Environmental Engineering and Mechanical Engineering. The M.A.Sc. degree is offered in Geological Engineering and Industrial Engineering.
Program requirements common to these Departments and supplementary to the general requirements of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research are listed below.
The areas of specialization are listed by Department.
An applicant for admission to a course of graduate studies leading to the Doctor of Philosophy degree in Engineering must normally be a graduate of a recognized university with a Master's degree in Engineering or Applied Science. Applicants with degrees in related fields will be considered but will normally require strengthening of their background in engineering. At the discretion of the Department, Graduate Record Examinations (GRE) will be required.
All applicants whose native language is not English are required to satisfy the English proficiency requirement as described in 1.3.
Possession of the minimum requirements does not automatically ensure acceptance.
Candidacy: Admission to graduate study does not imply admission to candidacy for a degree. The candidacy of a student normally will be determined within the second year after initial registration in the doctoral program.
Candidacy will be granted to students who meet all of the following requirements:
(a)satisfactory completion of the comprehensive examination;
(b)demonstration to the doctoral committee of ability to conduct independent research;
(c)acceptance by the doctoral committee of the research proposal.
The doctoral committee will assess the student's competence to continue research on the basis of (a), (b) and (c), and make a recommendation to the Department Head.
The specific minimum program requirements for the Ph.D. include the successful completion of:
1) Course Requirements: Satisfactory completion of at least four courses, comprising a minimum of eight term hours, beyond the courses required for the Master's degree.
2) A comprehensive examination.
3) Satisfactory progress in research within each review period. The doctoral committee will establish by periodic review, which will include at least one formal seminar a year, that adequate progress in research has been accomplished by the candidate. The doctoral committee will also grant permission to write the dissertation when it decides the candidate has achieved sufficient competence in carrying out research, and when the candidate has done substantial research.
4) A dissertation on the research. Each candidate will be required to make an oral presentation of the dissertation research and will be examined orally on the subject of the dissertation and related fields.
Residence and Time Limits: Every student will undertake a full program of study for a minimum of three years beyond the Baccalaureate of Engineering or its equivalent. Credit for one of these years may be given for the time spent in proceeding to a Master's degree. Credit for one of these years may also be given for work done at another institution. However, in no case shall the student spend fewer than two of the three required years of residence in full-time attendance at the University of Windsor.
A student admitted to a Ph.D. program requiring the student's attendance for a minimum of three years must complete all requirements within seven years. Students admitted to a program requiring a minimum of two years' residence must complete all requirements within six years.
Committees: Research undertaken as part of a doctoral program is normally directed and supervised by a doctoral committee. Whereas the student's advisor provides day-to-day guidance and direction, the committee is ultimately reponsible for the overall supervision to ensure that adequate progress is being maintained. The doctoral committee will consist of at least four members, with the student's advisor as chairperson. At least one member shall be from a department within the University of Windsor other than the one in which the student is majoring.
The student's advisor will propose the names of members for the doctoral committee, and these will be subject to the approval of the departmental Graduate Committee and the Executive Committee of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. Within one month after initial registration, each student will be assigned to a doctoral committee.
The final appraisal of the dissertation and the conduct of the final oral examination of the dissertation will be carried out by an examining committee. The examining committee will consist of the doctoral committee, the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research or designate as chairperson (non-voting), and an external examiner.
Examinations: At the discretion of the doctoral committee a qualifying examination may be required. A qualifying examination is one in which the student is asked to demonstrate a reasonable mastery of the fundamentals in the major subject; it is designed to test the student's preparation for advanced graduate work. If such an examination is required, it must be administered and passed before the student registers for the second year of Ph.D. work.
In addition to the usual examinations on course work, all students must meet the following requirements:
1) Review of Progress on Research: Within the first year, the student will present in the form of a seminar an outline of his or her proposed thesis research. This will be presented to the doctoral committee who must approve, with or without modifications, or reject the proposal. Thereafter, at least once a year the student will report his or her progress in the form of a seminar.
2) Comprehensive Examination: Students who have previously obtained a Master's degree must attempt this examination within twelve months of registering for the Ph.D. program. Other students must take it within twenty-four months of registration for the Ph.D. program. This set of examinations requires the students to demonstrate an adequate background in the general discipline of engineering, and an advanced knowledge in their fields of specialization. The comprehensive examination will be conducted by a departmental comprehensive committee in two sections:
(a)a scheduled, supervised written portion, of at least three hours' duration, designed to test the student's general knowledge on core subjects in the field of study, with questions set and answers evaluated by the departmental comprehensive committee;
(b)an oral examination to be evaluated by the departmental comprehensive committee. The objective of this part of the examination is to test the student's ability to integrate general knowledge from different areas of the field of study in order to solve problems the student has not previously encountered.
he student's overall success on the comprehensive examination will be determined by the departmental comprehensive committee. If the student is unsuccessful, the committee may require:
(a)that the student repeat all or part of the comprehensive examination at a specified time,
(b)that the student take and pass remedial coursework before repeating all or part of the examination, or
(c)after consultation with and approval by the doctoral committee, that the student withdraw from the program.
3) Final Examination: The passing of the final oral examination of the dissertation requires both an adequate dissertation and a satisfactory defense of the dissertation. This examination will be conducted by the examining committee. Following the acceptance and provisional approval of the dissertation by the doctoral committee, and a satisfactory preliminary report from the external examiner, a date for the oral examination can be set. Except under very unusual circumstances, the external examiner must be present at the oral examination. If the examining committee cannot arrive at a unanimous decision to award a passing grade, the majority decision will be accepted provided that there is no more than one dissenting vote. However, if the dissenting vote is that of the external examiner, a new external examiner may be appointed and another oral examination will be required. If the new examiner also gives a dissenting vote, the dissertation will not be accepted.
The areas of specialization are listed by Department.
A candidate for the degree of Master of Applied Science shall hold the degree of Bachelor of Applied Science from this University or an equivalent degree in Engineering or Applied Science. In addition, the applicant must have at least second-class standing or its equivalent in the final year and be recommended by the department in which the candidate plans to undertake studies.
Applicants with degrees in related fields will be considered but will normally require strengthening of their background in engineering. At the discretion of the Department, Graduate Record Examinations (GRE) will be required.
All applicants whose native language is not English are required to satisfy the English proficiency requirement as described in 1.3.
Possession of the minimum requirements does not automatically ensure acceptance.
The specific minimum program requirements for the M.A.Sc. include the successful completion of:
1) Course Requirements: Satisfactory completion of courses comprising between twelve and twenty-four term hours, depending on the term hour equivalence assigned to the mandatory thesis or major paper. A thesis may be equivalent to as many as eighteen term hours, and a major paper to as many as six term hours of the total minimum requirement of thirty term hours.
2) Either a thesis or a major paper as specified below:
(a)Thesis: A thesis incorporating the results of an original investigation is required of all candidates except those students who are doing non-thesis research toward a major paper. Before writing the thesis the student must meet with the Master's committee to obtain permission to write the thesis. The Master's committee will grant this permission when the student has shown sufficient competence and has accomplished substantial research. After completion of the thesis, each candidate will be required to make a satisfactory oral presentation and defense of the thesis as described below.
(b)Major Paper: For those candidates doing non-thesis research, a major paper is required. The topic of the major paper is normally research based on the existing literature in the field of study. The candidate will be required to make an acceptable oral presentation to the Master's committee based on the major paper (see below).
Residence and Time Limits: The minimum period of study for a Master's candidate is twelve months. The maximum duration of full-time study as a Master's candidate is three years. Part-time Master's candidates will undertake the equivalent of a minimum of one year of full-time study. For a part-time Master's candidate the maximum time limit generally will not exceed five calendar years. Master's candidates who expect to require an extension of these time limits must petition the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research, giving reasons for the request and plans for completion of the work. The Department Head will then make a recommendation to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research.
Committees: Research undertaken as part of a Master's program is normally directed and supervised by a Master's committee. Whereas the student's advisor provides day-to-day guidance and direction, the committee is ultimately repsonsible for the overall supervision to ensure that adequate progress is maintained. The Master's committee will consist of at least three members with the student's advisor as chairperson. At least one member shall be from a department within the University of Windsor other than the one in which the student is majoring. The student's advisor will propose the names of the Master's committee and these will be subject to the approval of the departmental Graduate Committee and the Executive Committee of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. Within one month after registration, each student will be assigned to a Master's committee.
The final appraisal of the thesis and the conduct of the final oral examination of the dissertation will be carried out by the examining committee. The examining committee will consist of the Master's committee and the Department Head or designate of the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research as chairperson (non-voting).
Examinations: At the discretion of the departmental Graduate Committee a qualifying examination may be required. A qualifying examination is one in which the student is asked to demonstrate a reasonable mastery of the fundamentals in the major subject; it is designed to test the student's preparation for advanced graduate work. If such an examination is required, it must be administered and passed before the student registers for the final candidate year of Master's work.
In addition to the usual examination on course work, all students must meet the following requirements:
1) Review of Progress on Research or Major Paper: Within the first year a full-time student will present in the form of a seminar an outline of his or her proposed thesis research or outline the content of his or her major paper. This will be presented to the Master's committee, who must approve, with or without modifications, or reject the proposal. Thereafter, at least once a year, the student will report his or her progress in the form of a seminar.
2) Final Examinations: The passing of the final oral examination on the thesis (or the major paper) requires both an adequate thesis (or major paper) and a satisfactory defense. The examination will be conducted by the examining committee and the thesis defence will be chaired by the Department Head or appointed designate. If the examining committee cannot arrive at a unanimous decision to award a passing grade, a majority decision will be accepted provided there is no more than one dissenting vote. If there is more than one dissenting vote, the student may be required to carry out additional work if the thesis is judged to be adequate in all other respects, or the student may be required to withdraw.
Grading: The grading system is outlined in 1.4.3.
The Faculty of Engineering requires that students maintain at least a B average at all times.
Courses in which a grade of B or higher is received will be accepted for graduate credit. In addition, upon the positive recommendation of the Department Head and advisor concerned, credit may be granted by the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research for not more than two term courses in which a grade of C or C+ has been obtained.
If a student fails to obtain credit in a course, the course may be repeated only once, at the discretion of the Department concerned and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. No student may repeat, or replace with another course, more than two term courses in which credit was not obtained.
All research work for which a letter grade is assigned must be graded B or better to receive credit.
Make-up courses will not count for graduate credit. Make-up courses are those courses required to compensate for deficiencies in the student's academic background.
In exceptional cases, at the discretion of the Department Head and the advisor, a graduate student may take one undergraduate course for credit.
Research for the Ph.D. or M.A.Sc. degree, in part or in whole, may be carried out in an outside institution (e.g., industrial, governmental, or academic university). A student who does research at an outside institution must fulfill the same requirements as a student doing on-campus research. The only exception is that the time spent doing the off-campus research relevant to the thesis or dissertation will be credited toward the residence requirement. In addition to the general requirements, a student applying for permission to do research at an outside institution must provide:
1) A detailed statement of the research proposal, including arrangements for supervision, and of the circumstances under which the research is to be carried out;
2) Evidence that the institution has adequate facilities for the research; and that the applicant will be able to pursue independent research;
3) A proposed time schedule;
4) A letter of support from a responsible person in the outside institution giving approval of the proposal and accepting these regulations.
MacInnis, Cameron; B.Sc. (Dalhousie), B.E. (Hons.) (Nova Scotia Technical College), Ph.D. (Durham), F.C.S.C.E., F.E.I.C., F.A.C.I., P.Eng.—1963.
Kennedy, John B.; B.Sc. (Hons.) (Cardiff), Ph.D. (Toronto), D.Sc. (Wales), F.A.S.C.E., F.C.S.C.E., P.Eng.—1963.
Gnyp, Alex William; B.A.Sc., M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Toronto), P.Eng.—1958.
Monforton, Gerard R.; B.A.Sc. (Assumption), M.A.Sc. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Case Inst.), F.C.S.C.E., P.Eng.—1962.
St. Pierre, Carl Clifford: B.A.Sc., M.A.Sc. (Assumption), Ph.D. (Northwestern), P.Eng.—1964.
McCorquodale, John Alexander; B.E.Sc. (Western Ontario), M.Sc. (Glasgow), Ph.D. (Windsor), F.C.S.C.E., P.Eng.—1966.
Abdel-Sayed, George; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Cairo), Dr.Ing. (T. U. Karlsruhe), F.C.S.C.E., P.Eng.—1967.
Chee, Sek Por; B.C.E. (Melbourne), Ph.D. (Aberdeen), P.Eng., C.Eng.—1967.
Bewtra, Jatinder K.; B.E. (Roorkee), M.S., Ph.D. (Iowa), P.Eng.—1968.
Temple, Murray Clarence; Diploma (R.M.C., Kingston), B.A.Sc. (Toronto), S.M. (Massachusetts Inst. Tech.), Ph.D. (Toronto), F.E.I.C., F.C.S.C.E., P.Eng.—1969. (Head of the Department)
Madugula, Murty K.S.; B.E. (Hons.), M. Tech., Ph.D. (I.I.T., Kharagpur), P.Eng.—1979.
Asfour, Abdul-Fattah Aly; B.Sc. (Hons.), M.A.Sc. (Alexandria), Ph.D. (Waterloo), P.Eng.—1981.
Biswas, Nihar; B.E. (Calcutta), M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Ottawa), P.Eng.—1981.
Budkowska, Bozena Barbara; B.A.Sc., M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Gdansk)—1989.
Hudec, Peter; B.Sc. (Western Ontario), M.S., Ph.D. (Rensselaer Polytech. Inst.), A.I.P.G.—1970.
Sklash, Michael G.; B.A.Sc. (Windsor), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Waterloo), P. Eng.—1977.
The Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering offers programs of graduate studies and research leading to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy and Master of Applied Science. Both the Ph.D. and M.A.Sc. degrees may be obtained in the areas of Environmental Engineering, Structural Engineering, and Water Resource Engineering. In Environmental Engineering research focuses on air and water quality, sanitation and environmental impact. In Water Resources, research is in hydraulics, hydrology, water quality and wastewater treatment. In Structures, research encompasses steel, concrete, and timber structures, concrete technology, soil mechanics, foundations and soil-metal structures.
Courses offered by Civil and Environmental Engineering at the graduate level are listed below. Students may, with the permisson of the Department Head and the advisor, take courses from departments other than the one in which the student is registered.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year.
Analysis of stress and strain; elastic and plastic stress-strain relations; general equations of elasticity; yield criteria; applications to elastoplastic problems, including rotating disks, thick-walled tubes, reinforced disks, torsion of various shaped bars; stress concentration. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Matrix methods for various deformable bodies and structural systems; direct and energy formulations; finite element method; computer-oriented solution techniques. (3 lecture hours a week.)
General theory of thin shells. Membrane stresses in shells of revolution and shells of double curvature. Bending stresses in shells of revolution, cylindrical shells and folded plates. Design of cylindrical shell roofs. (Prerequisite: 87-500 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Small deflection of laterally loaded rectangular and circular, isotropic and orthotropic plates with various edge conditions, Navier and Levy solutions, energy methods, finite difference approximation, plates under combined action of lateral loading and forces in its plane, local buckling of column elements, buckling of plates under pure shear and under bending stresses, post-buckling strength in plates. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course is designed to give an insight into the basic phenomenon of structural stability. Elastic and plastic flexural-buckling of columns with axial and eccentric loads is studied. Energy and numerical methods are used. Stability functions are introduced and used to study trusses and rectangular frames, with and without sidesway. Some discussion of torsional and torsional-flexural buckling, lateral buckling of beams. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course is designed to develop and expand the design concepts in steel structures; multiple-storey frames, sway and non-sway frame systems; beam-columns; laterally unbraced beams; local buckling of flanges and webs; plate girders; plastic analysis and design; characteristics of light gauge steel components; design of cold-formed steel structures. (3 lecture hours a week)
Critical examination of design code requirements for: flexure, shear, bond, eccentrically loaded columns; yield line theory, strip method, and design of slabs. Design of hyperbolic paraboloid shells, domes, cylindrical tanks and rigid-frame structures. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Materials, principles of prestressing systems; prestressing losses; analytical treatment of the effect of shrinkage, creep of concrete, and cable friction on stresses; analysis and design of statically determinate and indeterminate structures; design codes; research background; introduction to prefabricated concrete structures. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Cementing materials—basic constituents and manufacture, hydration of cement, structure of hydrated cement paste, physical properties of fresh and hardened paste. Aggregate materials—geology and petrography of concrete aggregates, aggregate problems, e.g., alkali-aggregate reactivity. Admixtures-accelerators, air-entraining, set-retarding and water-reducing agents. Concrete mix design. Properties and tests of fresh and hardened concretes. Statistics applied to the control of concrete quality and the design of experiments. Special concretes, e.g., light-weight and heavy-weight concretes. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Formulation of equations of motion; single degree-of-freedom systems: free vibration response and response to harmonic, periodic, impulse, and general dynamic loading; analysis of non-linear structural response; multi degree-of-freedom systems: equations of motion, structural property matrices, undamped free vibration, Raleigh's method, forced vibration response, practical vibration analysis; continuous systems: partial differential equations of motion, analysis of undamped free vibration, analysis of dynamic response, wave propagation analysis. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Properties of soils, stresses, consolidation, settlements, bearing capacity, flownets and seepage, stability of slopes with drained and undrained conditions, special foundation problems. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A thorough treatment of the basic techniques for analyzing one-dimensional multiphase, multicomponent flows in order to predict flow regimes, pressure drop, etc. Practical applications in fluidization, sedimentation and boiling heat transfer. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Analysis and synthesis of the hydrograph. Streamflow routing. The hydrograph as a function of drainage characteristics; estimation of runoff from meteorological data. Snowmelt. Flow in rivers with an ice cover. Infiltration theory. Sea water intrusion in coastal aquifers. Application of hydrologic techniques including statistical methods. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Theory and analysis of uniform, gradually varied, rapidly varied and steady and unsteady flow in open channels; fluvial processes; design of channels; design of hydraulic control structures. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Theory and analysis of flow through porous media. Application to ground water flow problems. Confined and unconfined flow. Seepage below dams. Well problems. Theory of models. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Dimensional analysis, similarity and model testing in hydraulic structures and hydraulic machinery; special model laws and practical applications. (3 lecture hours a week.)
This course deals with advanced methods of analyzing hydraulics and water resource systems. Exact and approximate methods are reviewed. The formulation and solution of problems by finite difference and finite element methods is a major part of the course. Typical examples from open channel and ground water flows are included. The method of characteristics is applied to transient flow in open channels and closed conduits. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Regime approach; turbulence theories; suspended sediment; tractive force method; bedforms and bedload transport; the Einstein method; modified Einstein method; reservoir siltation; recent developments; design of mobile bed channels; design of sedimentation basins; channel degradation. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Introduction to linear and nonlinear wave theory. Wave transformation: shoaling, refraction, defraction, reflection and breaking. Wave interaction with piles, walls and rubble mounds. Computation of forces and moments. Stability analysis. Wave generation and prediction. Computation of design water levels. Statistical nature of wind-generated waves in deep and shallow waters. Littoral zone processes. Computation of longshore transport. Effect of shore structures on littoral processes. Design of shore protections. Design of small harbours. This course involves the use of microcomputers and physical models. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Basic characteristics of traffic, road users, vehicles, speeds, volumes, etc.; traffic surveys; basic considerations in traffic regulation; control devices and aids; factors in traffic design; traffic engineering functions and organizations. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Selected advanced topics in the field of civil engineering. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Current topics include:
Soil-Steel Structures;
Advanced Concrete Technology;
Analysis of Engineering Problems in Soils.
Water quality criteria; methods of wastewater disposal and their effects on ecology; theory and design of different unit operations and processes for water purification; theory and design of different design operations and processes of wastewater treatment; reuse and recycling of wastewater. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Discussion on recent advances in the design of water and wastewater treatment plants and new developments in water pollution control practices. (Prerequisite: 93-530 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Man and his environment; evaluation of biosphere; ecological balances; pollution and environment; impacts of engineering activities on the environment—land, air, water, vegetation and other living beings; criteria, standards and goals; environmental factors to be considered in the engineering designs. Consideration and discussion of typical examples. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A study of municipal and industrial solid wastes, quantities, composition, methods of disposal or reclamation, and the economic viability of the various methods related to the quantities involved. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Application of the principles of surface chemistry to separation processes involving phase equilibria, ion exchange, membrane separation, adsorption, absorption, flocculation, spherical agglomeration, sedimentation, filtration, and centrifugation. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Water quality criteria; methods of wastewater disposal and their effects on ecology; stoichiometry, reaction kinetics and material balance; movement of contaminants in water bodies; modelling of water quality in natural systems. (3 lecture hours a week.)
An advanced study of the application of classical thermodynamic principles to environmental engineering practice; flow systems; composition relationships between equilibrium phases; systems involving surface effects, electric or magnetic fields. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Basic concepts of chemical reaction kinetics; characterization of chemical and biochemical systems; reactor flow models and consideration of non-ideality. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Selected advanced topics in the field of environmental engineering. (3 hours a week.)
Current topics include:
Air Pollution Control;
Biological Wastewater Treatment;
Land Treatment of Wastewater;
Principles of Water Quality;
Coastal Engineering;
Separation Processes;
Transport Phenomena;
Industrial Hygiene Engineering.
Jullien, Graham A.; B.Tech. (Loughborough), M.Sc. (Birmingham), Ph.D. (Aston), P.Eng.—1969.
Miller, William C.; B.S.E. (Michigan), M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Waterloo), P.Eng.—1968.
Soltis, James; B.Sc. (Windsor), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Michigan), P.Eng..—1974.
Watson, Alan; B.Sc., M.Sc.Tech. (Manchester), D.U.S. (Southampton), Dr. rer. nat. (Kassel, W. Germany), P.Eng.—1977.
Hackam, Reuben; B.Sc. (Technion, Israel), Ph.D., D. Eng. (Liverpool), F.I.E.E.E., P. Eng.—1978.
Sid-Ahmed, Maher A.; B.Sc. (Alexandria); M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1978.
Raju, G.R. Govinda; B.E. (Mysore), Ph.D. (Liverpool), F.I.E., P. Eng.—1980. (Head of the Department)
Ahmadi, Majid; B.Sc. (Tehran), D.I.C., Ph.D. C.Eng., F.I.E.E. (Imperial College)—1981.
Kwan, Hon K.; B.Sc. (London), M.Phil. (Chinese University of Hong Kong), D.I.C., Ph.D. (London), C. Eng.—1988.
Alexander, Philip H.; B.A.Sc. (Assumption), M.A.Sc. (Windsor), P.Eng.—1964.
Chikhani, Aziz Y.; B. Sc., M. Sc. (Cairo), Ph.D. (Waterloo), P. Eng.—1985. (Royal Military College of Canada)
Shridhar, Malayappan; B.Sc. (Bombay), D.M.I.T., M.S. (Brooklyn), Ph.D. (Aston), P.Eng.—1986. (Head, Electrical Engineering Department, University of Michigan, Dearborn)
The Department of Electrical Engineering offers graduate programs leading to the degrees of Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) and Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc.). Research is carried out in the two broadly defined areas of (a) Signals and Systems and (b) High Voltage and Power Systems.
Within the area of Signals and Systems such research topics as speech processing, image processing, digital filtering, discrete transforms, number theory and hardware realizations of signal processing-related devices are investigated. Within this research area the VLSI Research Group investigates modern VLSI implementations of high speed digital signal processing algorithms.
Research within the High Voltage and Power area deals with such topics as power systems, high voltage technology, electrical arcs, insulation and electric and magnetic field calculations.
The graduate course offerings in the Department of Electrical Engineering are designed to complement the two major areas that define the research orientation of the department. Course requirements for the Ph.D. and M.A.Sc. degrees in Electrical Engineering will be selected from the courses listed below and related courses in other departments.
Graduate students in the Department will be associated with one of the two major areas of research. Their program of studies will be formulated in consultation with the departmental graduate advisors and approved by the Department Head.
Only a selected number of the courses listed below will be available each year. The current list will be provided by the departmental Coordinator of Graduate Studies. The following courses all are two hours a week for one term.
Advanced theory and applications of electromagnetic fields and wave propagation.
Selected topics in the properties of electrical, electronic, dielectric and magnetic materials. Measurement techniques of the properties and applications of the materials.
Generation and measurement of high voltages, non-destructive and destructive testing techniques.
High voltage surges, origins, propagation and reflections; transients in power equipment; protection of substations.
Development and application of analytic and numerical techniques for calculating electromagnetic and electrostatic fields. Computer-oriented approaches are emphasized and a project is required.
Ionization and decay processes, electrical breakdown mechanisms in gaseous, liquid and solid insulation.
Thermodynamics of gaseous plasmas. Elenbass-Heller description of the steady state arc. Current zero phenomena in power circuit interruption. Theory of unsteady and transient arc columns. Low and high pressure arcs and their radiative properties. Cathode, anode and wall phenomena. Vacuum arcs in rectifiers and circuit breakers. Arc gas heaters and plasma torches. Thermionic arcs in searchlights and thyratrons. Glow to arc transition.
Discrete processes, Z-transform, recursive and non-recursive digital filters, quantization effects, hardware implementation.
Continuous and discrete signals; sampling theory and practice; filtering, interpolation, coding, statistical concepts, transform methods; power density estimation, correlation functions, convolution.
Continuous and discrete time systems, state formulation techniques, controlability and observability concepts, and system simulation.
Development and applications of probability models in the analysis of stochastic systems; review of probability, random variables and stochastic processes; correlation functions applications to filtering, prediction, estimation and system identification.
Fundamentals of 2-D signals and transforms; Laplace, Z, Fourier, etc. Design, stability, stabilization and implementation of 2-D LSI systems. Reconstruction of signals from their projections.
2-dimensional transformation: translation, scaling, rotation. Clipping and windowing. Transformation system. Interactive graphics. 3-D computer graphics. 3-D transformation. Wire frame perspective display. Hidden line and shading. Display devices, vector generators, display files.
Physiology of human speech production and hearing; mathematical models for vocal tract; estimation of speech parameters; computer synthesis of speech; machine recognition of speech and speakers through speech analysis; applications.
Digital image representation, elements of image processing system, image enchancement, 2-D sampling theorem, image transforms, image restoration and colour image processing.
Introduction to orthagonal transforms, DFT, DCT, DHT; implementation methods; fast algorithms, FFT, WFT; polynomial transforms; finite rings and fields; number theoretic techniques; residue number systems; conversion and computation; finite polynomial rings; VLSI implementation consideration.
Selected topics in the analysis and design of digital systems and sub-systems and their applications in the area of signal processing. (May be repeated more than once for credit if the topics are different.)
Overview of VLSI designs, CAD tools, application, technology; review of properties of silicon, solid state physics and devices; SPICE models; analog simulation; IC technology; target CMOS process; static CMOS logic; principles of standard cell CMOS design; dynamic characteristics of static CMOS logic; dynamic logic; system level considerations; synchronous docking; hardware description languages; silicone compilers.
Introduction to neural networks, the human brain and nervous system; pattern associators; auto-associators and Hopfield network; Hamming network; feed-forward network; other supervised learning neural network models; unsupervised learning neural network models; VLSI implementation; real-world applications.
Introduction to systolic array architectures; mapping methodology; systolic array realization of convolution and discrete Fourier transform; systolic array realization of digital filters; bit-level systolic array realizations; fault-tolerance; VLSI implementation.
Selected advanced topics in a field of research in the Department. (May be repeated more than once for credit if the topics are different.)
Youdelis, William V.; B.Sc. (Alberta), M.Eng., Ph.D. (McGill), P.Eng.—1965.
Watt, Daniel Frank; B.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McMaster), P.Eng.—1969.
Northwood, Derek Owen; B.Sc. (Eng.), A.R.S.M. (London), M.Sc. (Part I), Ph.D. (Surrey), F.I.M, F.A.S.M., FIMMA, F.I.E. Aust., C.P.Eng. (Australia), P. Eng.—1976.
Associate Professors
Alpas, Ahmet T.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Middle East Tech.), Ph.D. (Open University, U.K.)—1989.
Sokolowski, Jerzy; M.M.E., Ph.D. (Tech. U. Silesia, Poland), Ford/NSERC Chair—1993.
Chao, Benjamin S.; B.S., M.S., Ph.D. (Syracuse)—1993.
Yamauchi, Hisao; B.Eng. (Tokyo), M.S., Ph.D. (Northwestern), P.Eng.—1993.
Ph.D and M.A.Sc. graduate programs in Engineering Materials are administered by the Department of Mechanical and Materials Engineering upon the advice of its Graduate Studies Committee for Engineering Materials.There is ongoing research in the areas of phase transformations, deformation and fracture at ambient and elevated temperatures, wear, microstructure-property relationships, corrosion and hydrogen-metal interactions. This work is applied to the development of steels, aluminum alloys, zirconium alloys, electronic materials, polymers, composites, concrete, dental materials and hydrogen (energy) storage materials.
Course requirements for the Ph.D. and M.A.Sc. programs in Engineering Materials will be selected from the courses listed below and related courses in other programs. A student's course program will be formulated in consultation with the Graduate Studies Committee for Engineering Materials and requires approval of the research advisor and Department Head.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year.
Application of X-ray diffraction principles to the study of materials, application of Fourier series, single crystal techniques, studies of preferred orientation, imperfections. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Phenomenological treatment of transformation processes; diffusion controlled and diffusionless (martensitic) transformations; application of thermodynamic and phenomenological rate laws to transformations: nucleation, recrystallization, precipitation, spinoidal decomposition, ordering, eutectoid decomposition, etc. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Fluctuation theory and Onsager's reciprocal relations, phenomenological treatment of irreversible processes, entropy production rate and conjugation of fluxes and forces, coupling of irreversible processes and Curie's symmetry principles, linear transformation of fluxes and forces, stationary states of various orders and minimum entropy production rate, determination of phenomenological relations and coefficients for various processes; chemical and thermal diffusion, chemical reactions, heat and electrical conduction, thermoelectric phenomena, etc. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Dislocation-particle interactions, strengthening by dislocation substructures, particle and fiber reinforcement, strong microstructures from the melt, strong microstructures from the solid. (3 lecture hours a week.)
The theoretical and technical aspects of the study of microstructure and composition of materials, optical microscopy, electron microscopy (scanning and transmission) including electron diffraction and image analysis principles, electron microanalysis, x-ray topography, field-ion microscopy, relationship of observed microstructures to the macroscopic properties of materials. (2 lecture, 2 laboratory hours a week.)
The fracture mechanics approach to design; physical significance of fracture toughness; measurement of fracture mechanics parameters; non-destructive inspection techniques; principles of fracture-safe design; the relation between the microscopic and macroscopic aspects of plane-strain fracture; fracture of specific metallic and nonmetallic materials. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Theory of radiation-induced defect production; observation of defect production by energetic particle bombardment; defect annealing processes; radiation-enhanced diffusion; defect clustering and void formation; simulation experiments in HVEM; irradiation strengthening, embrittlement, growth and creep. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Anisotropic crystals—elasticity, dielectricity, piezoelectricity, pyroelectricity, thermoelastic effects, ferroelectricity, sonicwave propagation; amorphous solids—structure, stability, magnetic properties, mechanical properties; mixtures—local atomic arrangements, order-disorder transformations.
Selected advanced topics in the fields of engineered materials and materials engineering. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Current topics include:
Creep of Metals and Alloys;
Microscopy of Materials II
Electron Theory of Metals
Wear
Introduction to Numerical Methos
Composite Materials
Fatigue of Metals and Alloys
Advanced Thermodynamics of Alloys
Transport Processes in Metallurgical Systems
Metal Casting Technology
Smith, Terence E.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Wales)—1969.
Hudec, Peter P.; B.Sc. (Western Ontario), M.S., Ph.D. (Rensselaer Polytech. Inst.)—1970.
Symons, David T.A.; B.A.Sc. (Toronto), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Toronto), P. Eng.—1970.
Turek, Andrew; B.Sc. (Edinburgh), M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (Australian National U.), P. Eng.—1971.
Simpson, Frank; B.Sc. (Edinburgh), Dr. Nat. Sc. (Jagiellonian U., Krakow), P. Eng.—1974.
Sklash, Michael G.; B.A.Sc. (Windsor), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Waterloo), P. Eng.—1977.
Blackburn, William H.; B.Sc. (St. Francis Xavier), Ph.D. (Massachusetts Inst. Tech.)—1989. (Head of the Department)
Fryer, Brian J.; B.Sc. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Massachusetts Inst.Tech.)—1993. (Dean of the Faculty of Science)
Rodrigues, Cyril G. I.; B.Sc. (British Columbia), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Carleton)—1979.
Samson, Iain M.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Strathclyde)—1986.
Al-Aasm, Ihsan S.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Baghdad), Ph.D. (Ottawa)—1989.
The Department of Earth Sciences offers the M.A.Sc. degree in Geological Engineering. The main areas of research specialization are:
1) Engineering Geology: durability of construction materials, properties of industrial rocks and minerals.
2) Hydrogeology and Environmental Geology: contaminant transport, surface run-off, stable isotope studies in groundwater, underground storage.
3) Economic Geology: characteristics, exploration methods and valuation of ore deposits.
Courses offered in Geological Engineering at the graduate level are listed below. The candidate for the M.A.Sc. degree will be required to take a minimum of four 500-level courses, at least three of which should be Earth Sciences and/or Geological Engineering courses. Not more than two courses may be in Special Topics (90-590), and not more than two courses may be from the same instructor. Additional 500-level courses may be taken in Earth Sciences, other Science, or Engineering departments on the recemmendation of the Graduate Studies Committee. Students may be required by the Graduate Studies Committee to take up to four additional courses in or outside the Department as prerequisites or required background courses.
The total of all courses taken shall not exceed eight. The Graduate Studies Committee will recommend to the Head of the Department all courses to be taken for graduate credit after discussion with the student and his or her advisor.
All degree candidates in the M.A.Sc. program must register in 90-580 in each term of full-time registration. Satisfactory completion of 90-580 includes the presentation of one seminar each term and participation in the departmental seminar series. Completion of 90-580 does not count toward the minimum course requirements described above.
Ore reserve calculation methods; supply and demand factors and their projection; capitalization, discounting and amortization of ore deposits; marketing including cartels, taxation, legislation and national interest. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Occurrence, origin, exploration and exploitation methods; physical and chemical properties of industrial minerals and their uses; economics of industrial rocks and minerals; potential uses of mineral processing byproducts. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Geologic and physio-chemical factors affecting the stability of construction materials (rock aggregate, expanded aggregate, tile, brick, etc.) under conditions of natural weathering and exposure to salts and other pollutants. (3 lecture hours a week.)
An introduction to the use of geophysics to find deep-seated ore and petroleum deposits emphasizing gravitational, magnetic, induced potential, and other relevant methods. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Advanced topics in hydrogeology related to waste disposal effects on groundwater. Topics include: groundwater contaminants, groundwater monitoring strategies, site evaluation, site remediation, and case histories. (Prerequisite: 90-436, or equivalent, or permission of instructor.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Advanced topics in hydrogeology, including: applied isotope hydrogeology, groundwater flow in fractured rocks, theory of contaminant transport in groundwater systems, evaluation of hydraulic conductivity, tracer tests, modelling of hydrogeologic systems, and case histories. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Exploitation of subsurface space for storage of industrial products and wastes. Possible environmental impact of poorly planned underground storage. Economics of subsurface vs. surface storage. Emphasis on Canadian case histories. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Examination of geology, geochemistry and current genetic models for important hydrothermal metallic mineral deposits. (Prerequisite: 61-542 or permission of instructor.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Recent advances in geochemical exploration techniques. Topics such as: volatile and airborne surveys, surveys in contaminated terrains, isotope methods. Interpretation and handling of survey data. (Prerequisite: 61-424.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Oral presentation and discussion of current problems in the earth sciences. (Students must register in this course in each term of full-time registration in the M. A. Sc. Program.) (1 hour a week.)
Selected advanced topics in a field of research in the Department.
Lashkari, Reza S.; B.Sc. (Tehran), M.S.I.E., Ph.D. (Kansas State), P. Eng.—1977.
Dutta, Sourin P.; B.E., M.Tech. (Durgapur), Ph.D. (I.I. Sc.), P. Eng.—1984.
El Maraghy, Hoda A.; B.Eng. (Cairo), M. Eng., Ph.D. (McMaster), P.Eng. —1994. (Dean of the Faculty of Engineering)
El Maraghy, Waguih; B.Eng. (Cairo), M. Eng., Ph.D. (McMaster), P.Eng.—1994. (Head of the Department)
Taboun, Salem; B.Sc. (Tripoli), M.Sc. (Miami), Ph.D. (Windsor)—1992.
Du, Ruxu; B.S. (Wahung Iron and Steel Inst.), M.S. (South China Inst. Tech.), Ph.D. (Michigan)—1991.
Wang, Hunglin (Michael); B.S. (National Tsing-Hua U.), M.S. (State U. of New York, Buffalo), Ph.D. (Iowa)—1991.
The Industrial and Manufacturing Systems Engineering Department offers M.A.Sc. and Ph.D. graduate programs in the area of Manufacturing Systems, encompassing basic as well as applied research.
Courses offered by Industrial and Manufacturing Systems Engineering at the graduate level are listed below. Students may, with the permission of the Department Head and the advisor, take courses from departments other than the one in which the student is registered.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year.
Classical theory of optimization. Kuhn-Tucker conditions. Unconstrained optimization; gradient methods, conjugate gradient methods, variable metric methods, search techniques. Constrained optimization. Approximation methods, projection methods, reduced gradient methods; penalty function methods; computational algorithms. Recent advances in optimization. Use of computer software packages. (Prerequisite: 91-312 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Distributions of functions of variables, estimations and tests of hypotheses, power of tests, non-parametric tests, sampling techniques, analysis of variance, randomized blocks. Latin squares and factorial experiments. (Prerequisite: 91-227 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Discrete-event system simulation. Random number generation. Stochastic variate generation. Input parameters; identification and estimation. Output analysis. Static and dynamic output analysis; initial and final conditions; measures of performance and their variance estimation; confidence interval. Design of experiments. Various sampling techniques. Single and multifactor designs. Fractional designs. Response surfaces. Regeneration method for simulation analysis; Monte Carlo optimization. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Analysis of production-inventory systems. Inventory systems; deterministic, single-item and multi-item models; quantity discounts; stochastic, single-period models; periodic review and continuous review models. Production planning. Static demand models; product mix and process selection problems; multi-stage planning problems. Dynamic demand models; multi product and multistage models. Operations scheduling; job shop scheduling; line balancing. New directions in production systems research. (Prerequistie: 91-413 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Theory and computational techniques for solving linear and integer programming problems. Theoretical foundations of the simplex algorithm. Duality, sensitivity analysis and parametric programming. Network flow methods. Integer programming problems. Cut algorithms, branch and bound, and implicit enumeration methods. Dynamic programming. (Prerequisite: 91-312 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Probabilistic O.R. models. Decision theory and games. Markovian decision process. Queueing theory. Single channel and multichannel queueing systems. Queues with general arrival and service patterns. Bulk queues and priority queues. Applications of queuing models. Probabilistic dynamic programming. (Prerequisite: 91-412 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Job and skill profiles; workload definition and measurement; workload and performance modelling; information theory applications, models of the process operator; optimal control models of human response; queuing models for monitoring and supervisory behaviour; manual control skills and automation; signal-flow graphs and their uses in operations design and planning. (Prerequisites: 91-315 and 91-415, or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Ergonomics and work design; human workload measurement in industry; visual display terminals at the workplace; signal detection and visual inspection; user-computer interaction; human factors aspects of flexible manufacturing systems; effects of individual and combined environmental stressors on human performance. (Prerequisites: 91-415 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Design for system effectiveness; reliability program; failure patterns for complex products; reliability measures; static reliability models; mathematical concepts of reliability; interference theory and reliability computation; reliability bounds in probabilistic design; dynamic reliability models; sequential life testing. (Prerequisite: 91-227 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Development of CIM; the CIM pyramid—key functions. System integration; standards for communications—MAP. Data base as the hub of CIM—types of data base. Role of simulation and support systems—decision support systems and expert systems. Sensor technology, robot vision, and group technology. Impact of CIM. Factory of the future. (Prerequisites: 91-411 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Principles and methods for engineering analysis of industrial projects and operations. Criteria for economic decisions, project investment analysis, gain and loss estimating and techniques for economic optimization under constraint are included. Emphasis is placed on the construction and use of analytical models in the solution of engineering economy problems. Elements of risk and uncertainty are included through use of probabilistic techniques. (Prerequisite: 85-313 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Stochastic processes. The Poisson process—relationship to exponential, Erlang and uniform probability distributions. Markov chains—basic limit theorem. Continuous time Markov chains—birth-and-death processes, time-dependent probabilities, limiting probabilities, relationship to the exponential distribution, uniformization. Renewal theory—the renewal function, stopping times, Wald's equation, the key renewal theorem, alternating processes, age, remaining life and total life distributions at an arbitrary time-point. Brownian motion. Random walks. Martingales. (Prerequisite: Statistics 65-542 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
FMS as CIM—implemented at the shop floor. Hierarchial network of computers, programmable controllers and work centres. Data base for parts and factory status. Manufacturing automation protocol. Tool management system—acoustic emission. Signature analysis. Planning, design and implementation of FMS—role of management commitment. Impact of FMS on manufacturing industry—job specification of FMS engineers. (Prerequisite: 91-413 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Developments in nontraditional methods in EDM and ECM. Trends in automation. Recent developments in manufacturing processes; micromanufacturing—integrated circuits and laser machining. Advances in computer technology, CAD and CAM. Kinematics of manipulation robots, artificial intelligence, monitoring and vision systems. (Prerequisite: 91-321 or equivalent.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Selected advanced topics in the field of Industrial Engineering. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Current topics include:
Engineering Design Theory
Computer-Aided Design (CAD)
Computer-Aided Manufacturing
Industrial Control and Robotics
Sustainable Manufacturing
AI Applications in Manufacturing
Management of Technology
Time Series Applications in Manufacturing
McDonald, Thomas William; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Purdue), P.Eng.—1968.
Reif, Zygmunt Francis; B.Sc. (Eng.), Ph.D. (London), P.Eng.—1969.
Sridhar, Krishnaswamy; B.Sc. (Madras) D.M.I.T. (Madras Inst. Tech.), M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Toronto), P.Eng.—1963.
North, Walter P.T.; B.Sc. (Queen's), M.Sc. (Saskatchewan), Ph.D. (Illinois), P.Eng.—1965. (Associate Dean of the Faculty)
Rankin, Gary W.; B.A.Sc., M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor), P. Eng.—1980.
Gaspar, Robert George Stephen; B.A.Sc., M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1983.
Zhang, Chao; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Xi'an Jiaotong), Ph.D. (New Brunswick)—1990.
Yuan, Jing; B.S. (North Jiao-Tong), M.S. (Akron), Ph.D. (Victoria)—1993.
Khalighi, Bahram; B.S. (Arya-Mehr U. of Tech.), M.S., Ph.D. (Iowa)—1994.
Barron, Ronald Michael; B.A., M.Sc. (Windsor), M.S. (Stanford), Ph.D. (Carleton)—1975.
Zamani, Nader G.; B.Sc. (Case Western), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Brown)—1986.
El Maraghy, Hoda A.; B.Eng. (Cairo), M. Eng., Ph.D. (McMaster), P.Eng. —1994. (Dean of the Faculty of Engineering)
El Maraghy, Waguih; B.Eng. (Cairo), M. Eng., Ph.D. (McMaster), P.Eng. —1994.
Ph.D. and M.A.Sc. graduate programs in Mechanical Engineering are administered by the Department of Mechanical and Materials Engineering upon the advice of its Graduate Studies Committee for Mechanical Engineering. Ph.D. and M.A.Sc. programs are offered in the areas of Manufacturing Automation and Thermo-Fluids. Within the Manufacturing Automation area, a graduate student may concentrate upon Automotive Manufacturing Engineering by the selection of appropriate courses and the choice of the research topic.
Course requirements for the Ph.D. and M.A.Sc. programs in Mechanical Engineering will be selected from the courses listed below and related courses in other programs. A student's course program will be formulated in consultation with the advisor and requires approval of the Graduate Studies Committee for Mechanical Engineering and the Department Head.
With the permission of the advisor and Department Head, Mechanical Engineering courses with numbers greater than 449 and related to the graduate field of study may be taken for graduate credit. Not more than a total of six term hours of credit shall be allowed for the undergraduate courses offered by any department.
Rate equations for mass, momentum, and heat transfer. Governing conservation equations for mass, momentum, and heat transfer. Dimensional analysis and design equations. Typical engineering process applications. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Laminar flow. Navier-Stokes equations with exact and approximate solutions, approximate solution of the boundary layer by momentum theorem. (3 lecture hours a week.)
General turbulence theories, wall turbulence and free turbulence. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Application of advanced analysis techniques to problems in the areas of conduction, diffusion, free and forced convection, boiling, condensation and radiation. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Advanced systems design requiring the application of economics, heat transfer, simulation and optimization. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A course covering the theory of flow and velocity measurement. Emphasis will be placed on hot wire instruments and turbulence measurements. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Applications and limitations of ideal fluid flow theory. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A thorough treatment of the basic techniques for analyzing one-dimensional multiphase, multicomponent flows in order to predict flow regimes, pressure drop, etc. Practical applications in fluidization, sedimentation and boiling heat transfer. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Measurement techniques in manufacturing and production industries, statistical quality control, optical metrology, machine vision and inspection. (3 lecture hours a week.)
An introduction and analysis of deflection-strain-stress measurements using mechanical, electrical and optical methods. (3 lecture, 3 laboratory hours a week.)
Vibration of lumped parameter and continuous systems. Exact and approximate methods of solution, stability and self-excited vibration. Non-linear vibration of single degree of freedom systems. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Hearing damage risk criteria and in-plant noise regulations; determination of permissible exposure levels due to continuous and intermittent noise. Measurement of machine noise and standard procedures. Fundamentals of noise control. Characteristics and levels of motor vehicle and traffic noise; motor vehicle noise control legislation and standard procedures for measurement. (3 lecture hours a week.)
92-517.Automated Machining
Fundamentals of metal cutting processes, machine tool condition monitoring, and cutting process monitoring. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Man and his environment; evaluation of biosphere; ecological balances; pollution and environment; impacts of engineering activities on the environment—land, air, water, vegetation and other living beings; criteria, standards, and goals; environmental factors to be considered in the engineering designs. Consideration and discussion of typical examples. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A special course of studies with content and direction approved by the student's chief advisor. Although there may not be formal lectures, the course will carry the weight of three lecture hours.
MacLeod, Alistair; B.A., B.Ed. (St. Francis Xavier), M.A. (New Brunswick), Ph.D. (Notre Dame), LL.D. (St. Francis Xavier)—1969.
Ditsky, John M.; Ph.B., M.A. (Detroit), Ph.D. (New York)—1967.
Janzen, Henry David; B.A. (Assumption), M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1970.
MacKendrick, Louis King; B.A., M.A. (Western Ontario), Phil.M., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1971.
Dilworth, Thomas R.; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1977. (Killam Research Fellow, 1992-1994)
Herendeen, Wyman H.; B.A., M.A. (Brown), Ph.D. (Toronto)—1984. (Head of the Department)
Harder, Bernhard D.; B.A., M.A. (British Columbia), Ph.D. (North Carolina)—1970.
Atkinson, Colin B.; B.Eng. (McGill), B.A. (Sir George Williams), M.A. (Columbia), Ph.D. (New York)—1971.
Straus, Barrie Ruth; B.A. (Oregon), M.A., Ph.D. (Iowa)—1990.
Quinsey, Katherine M.; B.A. (Trent), Ph.D. (London)—1989.
Campbell, Wanda R.; B.A. (New Brunswick), M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1991.
Bucknell, Bradley W.H.; B.A., M.A. (Alberta), Ph.D. (Toronto)—1993.
The Department of English offers programs leading to the M.A. in English and Creative Writing and the M.A. in English Literature and Language. Within the English Literature and Language program, there are three different streams: the Thesis Stream, the Course Work Stream, and the Cultural Studies Stream.
The English and Creative Writing program allows students to combine graduate-level study of literature with advanced work on creative writing in a two-term workshop and by developing a significant independent writing project. Within the English Literature and Language program, the Course Work Stream offers exposure to a wide variety of topics inliterature and linguistics. The Thesis Stream allows students to investigate a single topic in depth through independent, extended research with faculty supervision. The Cultural Studies Stream is intended for the student who wishes to work across traditional academic and creative disciplines to explore a cultural studies topic in depth.
The specific requirements for each option are:
26-590.Creative Writing Seminar (over both the Fall and Winter terms)
26-794.Creative Writing Project (a novel, a play, a collection of poems or short stories)
and four graduate seminar courses.
26-797.Thesis/Project (of at least 20,000 words)
and five graduate seminar courses.
26-585.Literary Genres: Criticism/Cultural Studies
26-797.Thesis/Project (of at least 20,000 words)
and four graduate seminar courses.
eight graduate seminar courses.
For all programs, students who have not taken 26-309 (Scholarship and Bibliography) or its equivalent must include 26-500, a four-week course in Methodology (offered on a Pass/Non-Pass basis) in addition to their regular course load.
In addition to the requirements set forth in 1.3 and 1.6.1 for admission to the Faculty of Graduate Studies nad Research and to programs leading to the Master's degree, applicants for admission to the Candidate year in the programs leading to the Master of Arts degree in English should expect to satisfy the following particular requirements:
1) Two courses, or the equivalent, from the 100 series, or a similar introductory literature course, taken usually in the first undergraduate year.
2) Six undergraduate courses, or the equivalent, distributed as evenly as possible among the following four categories:
(a)Early English and Medieval Literature
(b)Renaissance Literature
(c)Restoration and Eighteenth-Century Literature
(d)Nineteenth-Century British Literature
3) Six undergraduate courses, or the equivalent, from three or more of the following six categories:
(a)Twentieth-Century Literature
(b)Canadian Literature
(c)American Literature
(d)Critical Theory and Practice
(e)Language and Linguistics
(f)Special Topics
4) Two terms of Honours seminars or the equivalent (directed readings, independent study, honours essay, etc.), in the final undergraduate year.
5) Additional courses from areas in 2) and 3) above to make up the total number of courses required for an honours degree.
Students who are deficient in any of these particular requirements may be asked to register in appropriate undergraduate courses in order to satisfy the requirements (see below, "Qualifying or Placement Examination").
Students who are admitted to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research in the minimum two-year M.A. program will be expected to elect courses in their first year to complete the requirements specified above.
In addition to the documents specified in 1.3.2, applicants must submit a "Proposal of Studies" (about 500 words) with their applications indicating the program and stream to which they are applying and discussing such issues as their areas of academic or creative interest, their undergraduate training, and their academic or career goals. Students with a B.A. in Honours English may apply to either of the degree programs and to any of the streams. Students with interdisciplinary interests, with honours degrees combining English with another discipline, or with abilities or backgrounds that do not correspond to the particular requirements for admission listed below, but who have an overall average of A-, may apply to the Cultural Studies Stream of the English Literature and Language program, which allows for flexible program design.
Qualifying or Placement Examination: An applicant for admission to the Candidate year for the Master's degree who is deficient in any of the stated requirements for admission to this level of graduate study may be invited, or may request, to write a qualifying examination. A similar examination is available as a placement test, on the basis of which students in the two-year M.A. program may be granted advanced standing.
Students from other universities may arrange to take these examinations in other centres provided the Department is notified well in advance.
Counselling: Students admitted to one of the Master's degree programs in English will be assigned a faculty advisor who will be available to counsel them on all aspects of their work. The Department Head (or a delegate) must approve a student's program of study before registration.
Grades: After admission to candidacy, graduate students in the M.A. program in English must maintain at least a B- average, but graduate credit is only given at the A and B level. A student whose grade in a graduate course is less than B- may be allowed to repeat the course or to substitute another for it, at the discretion of the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research and the Department Head. The student may not repeat more than one course (see 1.4.3).
All graduate courses are seminars. Enrolment is limited in these courses, because considerable contribution is expected from each member of the seminar. For such courses, the corresponding undergraduate survey course, or an acceptable equivalent, is ordinarily a prerequisite. This condition may be waived only by agreement of both the Department Head and the professor offering the seminar. The specific topics of individual courses may vary, depending upon the interests and needs of professors and students. It is thus impossible to list in detail the many topics that may from time to time be offered. The schedule below lists only the major periods or forms of literature in which special topics courses may be available.
Special topics courses having the same course number may be taken more than once providing the course content is different and with the permission of both the Department Head and the professor offering the course. More than one seminar or course numbered in sequence in any of the listed areas may be offered in a given term.
In the Winter term each year, the Department publishes a booklet giving complete information as to specific topics of the courses to be offered in the coming academic year, with texts, reading assignments, and other material about requirements of the course, wherever possible. Students are welcome to write to or call at the Department office for a copy of this booklet.
Not all of the following areas will necessarily be represented by course offerings in any one year.
26-500.Methodology
26-501.Tutorials
26-505.The English Language and Linguistics
26-510.Literature of the Old English Period
26-515.Literature of the Middle English Period
26-520.Literature of the Renaissance
26-525.Renaissance Drama
26-530.Literature of the Restoration Period
26-535.Literature of the Eighteenth Century
26-540.Literature of the Romantic Period
26-545.Literature of the Victorian Period
26-550.Literature of the Twentieth Century
26-555.Literature of the United States
26-560.Literature of Canada
26-565.Literature of the British Commonwealth
26-570.Literary Genres: Poetry
26-575.Literary Genres: Drama
26-580.Literary Genres: Fiction
26-585.Literary Genres: Criticism/Cultural Studies
26-590.Creative Writing Seminar
26-794.Creative Writing Project
26-797.Thesis
Stebelsky, Ihor; B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Washington)—1968.
Trenhaile, Alan S.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Wales)—1969. (Head of the Department)
Romsa, Gerald H.; B.Sc. (Manitoba), M.A. (Waterloo), Ph.D. (Florida), M.C.I.P.—1970.
Innes, Frank C.; B.Sc. (Glasgow), M.A., Ph.D. (McGill)—1972.
Phipps, Alan G.; B.A. (Manchester), M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Iowa), M.C.I.P.—1988.
La Valle, Placido D.; B.A. (Columbia), M.A. (Southern Illinois), Ph.D. (State U. of Iowa)—1969.
Blenman, E. H. Morris; B.A. (London), M.A. (Calgary), Ph.D. (McGill)—1974.
Lakhan, V. Chris; B.A. (Guyana), M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Toronto), F.R.G.S. (U.K.)—1984.
Matthew, Malcolm R.; B.A., M.Sc. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Waterloo), M.C.I.P.—1988.
Wang, Jinfei; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Peking), Ph.D. (Waterloo)—1990.
Duncan, Kirsty E.; B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Edinburgh)—1993.
Vakil, Anna C.; B.A. (Carleton), M.U.P. (McGill). Ph.D. (Michigan)—1993.
The offerings of the Department emphasize two areas: physical geography and resource management, and urban geography and planning. Within the urban stream is an applied program leading to the degree of Master of Arts in Geography (Planning).
The general admission, residence, and period of study requirements may be found in the regulations of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research (see 1.3 and 1.6.). The Department's Handbook of Procedures for Graduate Students in Geography and Planning provides additional information on requirements for specific programs.
All graduate students will be assigned to an advisory committee and may be examined to determine research capabilities and deficiencies in background courses. Remedial courses or supplemental readings may be required.
After being counselled in the Department, candidates may proceed toward the degree in one of the following programs:
(a)a minimum of six courses, one of which may be replaced by a senior undergraduate course with the permission of the Department, and a thesis on an approved research problem, plus an oral examination on the thesis;
(b)a minimum of eight courses, one of which may be replaced by a senior undergraduate course with the permission of the Department, and a major paper on an approved topic. The completion of the major paper will be followed by a comprehensive written examination covering two subject areas of the candidate's choice.
The option to complete program (a) or (b) will be kept open in consultation with the Department.
All candidates will take 42-230 and 42-231 as non-credit courses, if they have not taken them or equivalent course(s) at the undergraduate level.
All candidates will take 42-500 and 42-504 as required courses.
This special program enables graduates from the disciplines of Architecture, Biological and Earth Sciences, Business Administration, Civil and Environmental Engineering, Forestry, Geography, Law, Planning and the Social Sciences to combine their undergraduate interests with applied and methodological training in the field of planning.
The program is enriched by the opportunity to select planning courses offered by Wayne State University in Detroit, Michigan, as available. This may be of interest to those wishing to pursue professional careers in Canada and the United States.
The Program is administered by the Director of Planning, the Department Head and the Graduate Admission Committee.
1) After review of academic background and counselling, candidates may select one of the following options:
(a)a minimum of six courses, a thesis and an oral examination on the thesis;
(b)a minimum of eight courses, one of which may be replaced by a senior undergraduate course with the permission of the Department, and a major paper on an approved topic. The completion of the major paper will be followed by a comprehensive written examination covering two subject areas of the candidate's choice.
2) Students who do not have an honours undergraduate planning degree will be required to take up to six additional undergraduate courses in planning and/or geography. Planning Law 50-502, or its equivalent, if not already taken, will be required.
3) All candidates are required to take 50-500, 50-503, 50-504, and 50-518.
The following courses are normally offered for two hours a week. All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any one year.
Designed to inform the student of rational inquiry through modern social science literature and thought. (Prerequisites: 42-230 and 42-231, or equivalent.)
The translation of statistical methods used by geographers and planners into operational computer programs; nad the introduction of other advanced spatial analysis techniques. (Cross-listed with 50-504.)
A discussion of medical geography based on the concept of ill-health as maladjustment to the environment; world-wide examples of inappropriate development and human disease, with an emphasis on prevention techniques and appropriate amelioration.
Readings and discussion of economic, demographic, and cultural basis for development and regional inequalities in a developed or developing region.
A research seminar on current problems in climatology, selected in consultation with the instructor.
Readings and seminars on different interpretations of urban dynamics. Selected topics are assigned for analysis. (Cross-listed with 50-517.)
Supervised readings and seminars relating to the development of modern geomorphological theory and its application.
This course concentrates on the various aspects of geomorphology that relate to human use of the natural environment. Discussions and selected readings will demonstrate that geomorphology can contribute toward the analysis of several environmental problems.
A seminar of research and readings on environmental systems, their analysis, and application to the management of natural and human resources.
Selected research projects involving the management of resource systems and the planning of resource control schemes, applying concepts evolved in 42-521. Particular emphasis is placed on the discussion of agricultural resource systems.
A seminar on selected problems in cultural geography such as culture-ecology relationships, cultural landscape analysis, multiculturalism and ethnic communities and their spatial dynamics and impact.
Supervised readings and seminars on selected aspects of population distribution and redistribution; migration mechanism, theories and applications; international and internal migrations in Canada or a selected region; population theories and their geographic implications.
Selected research projects in applying geographic information systems (GIS) and computer analysis of remotely sensed data to resource management, urban planning, and other geographic and environmental problems. A GIS system (SPANS) and a computer image analysis system (EASI/PACE) are used. (Prerequisites: 42-402 and 42-405.)
Readings and seminars on the forces and sectoral needs influencing the locational decisions of firms and the resulting patterns of activities, with emphasis on the service, information, and control sectors.
Theoretical developments in economic geography; application to transport systems planning and to developing countries.
Topics to be selected in consultation with the instructor.
(Cross-listed with 42-500.)
An introduction to the legal principles and rules governing the planning process in Ontario; the course will examine the Planning Act and other related statutes and their interpretation by the courts and will focus on substantive and procedural aspects of the law governing the operation of planning boards, committees of adjustment, land division committees, and municipal councils in the exercise of their planning powers and the function of the respective ministers and the Ontario Municipal Board in the planning process. (Cross-listed with 99-213.)
A study of social policy issues related to housing. Emphasis is on housing market management, program design, land use regulations and urban growth assessment.
The translation of statistical methods used by geographers and planners into operational computer programs; nad the introduction of other advanced spatial analysis techniques. (Cross-listed with 42-504.)
(Available at Wayne State University.)
Readings and seminars on different interpretations of urban dynamics. Selected topics are assigned for analysis. (Cross-listed with 42-517.)
Issues raised in the literature of planning will be discussed in lectures and seminars. Metropolitan expansion and various planning responses to it, living environments, community arrangements, economic development, transportation and similar topics may be included.
50-526.Urban and Regional Planning in Developing Areas
This course is concerned with issues associated with planning in the developing areas of Canada and the Third World. Taking a case study approach, the course addresses key theoretical, methodological, and implementation problems related to planning in inner city, native, and other disadvantaged communities in Canada, as well as in urban squatter settlements and poor rural communities in the Third World.
Current topics in strategic planning: meeting the needs of an aging society; provision of leisure activities; addressing problems at the urban fringe.
(Available at Wayne State University.)
(Available at Wayne State University.)
(Available at Wayne State University.)
(Available at Wayne State University.)
Smith, Terence E.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Wales)—1969.
Hudec, Peter P.; B.Sc. (Western Ontario), M.S., Ph.D. (Rensselaer Polytech. Inst.)—1970.
Symons, David T.A.; B.A.Sc. (Toronto), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Toronto), P. Eng.—1970.
Turek, Andrew; B.Sc. (Edinburgh), M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (Australian National U.), P. Eng.—1971.
Simpson, Frank; B.Sc. (Edinburgh), Dr. Nat. Sc. (Jagiellonian U., Krakow), P. Eng.—1974.
Sklash, Michael G.; B.A.Sc. (Windsor), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Waterloo), P. Eng.—1977.
Blackburn, William H.; B.Sc. (St. Francis Xavier), Ph.D. (Massachusetts Inst. Tech.)—1989. (Head of the Department)
Fryer, Brian J.; B.Sc. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Massachusetts Inst. Tech.)—1993. (Dean of the Faculty of Science)
Rodrigues, Cyril G. I.; B.Sc. (British Columbia), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Carleton)—1979.
Samson, Iain M.; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Strathclyde)—1986.
Al-Aasm, Ihsan S.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Baghdad), Ph.D. (Ottawa)—1989.
1) Course Requirements: The candidate for a Master's degree will be required to take a minimum of four 500-level courses, of which at least three should be Geology and/or Geological Engineering courses. Not more than two courses may be in Special Topics (61-590), and not more than two courses may be from the same instructor. Additional 500-level courses may be taken in Earth Sciences, other Science, or Engineering departments on the recommendation of the Graduate Studies Committee. Up to four additional courses may be required to be taken in or outside the Department as prerequisites or required background courses. The total of all courses taken shall not exceed eight. The Graduate Studies Committee shall recommend to the Head of the Department all courses to be taken for graduate credit after discussion with the candidate and his or her advisor. In addition, original research work must be pursued and embodied in a thesis submitted for degree credit. Credit for graduate study previously undertaken may be given, but the duration of study at the University of Windsor may not be reduced to less than the minimum of one year.
2) Examination Requirements: The final examination of a candidate for the Master's degree shall be an oral defense of the thesis at a public lecture or a seminar.
3) All degree candidates in the M.Sc. program must register in 61-580 in each term of full-time registration. Satisfactory completion of 61-580 includes the presentation of one seminar each year and participation in the departmental seminar series. Completion of 61-580 does not count towards the minimum requirements described above in (1).
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any one year.
Origin and chemistry of fluids in the earth's crust. Physical chemistry of hydrothermal fluids. Fluid-mineral equilibria and wallrock alteration. Isotope systematics of hydrothermal systems. Fluid inclusions. Transport and deposition of ore components. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Hydrodynamic significance of primary sedimentary structures, post-depositional modification of sediments; biostratification and trace fossils; sedimentary environments; sedimentological methods in economic geology. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A study of the petrology and petrogenesis of igneous rocks emphasizing current concepts and recent developments. (2 lecture, 3 laboratory hours a week.)
A study of modern concepts of metamorphic petrology including the interplay of tectonism, deformation, and metasomatism. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Geochemistry of sedimentary rocks and natural waters; chemistry and mineralogy of weathering; geochemical cycles; geochemical facies analysis; fractionation of elements and isotopes during sedimentation; chemical diagenesis; organic matter and mineral diagenesis; geochemical evolution of sedimentary rocks during geologic history. (3 lecture hours a week.) (Prerequisite: 61-324 or equivalent, or permission of the instructor.)
Carbonate mineralogy, carbonate sedimentation and environments, diagenetic processes and products, carbonate evolution through time. (Prerequisite: 61-324 or consent of instructor.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Theory, systematics, and application of radioactive and stable isotopes in earth sciences. Current advances in the field. Selected case studies. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Global dimensions of environmental degredation, anthropogenic factors, scope for technological innovation; the industrialized ecosystem and the remedial action plan (RAP) process; the international development connection, structural adjustment and the environment; business opportunities in environmental-economy integration, mineral-resource development and use, energy options, efficienceis and waste avoidance, recycling and waste disposal. (3 lecture hours a week.)
A review of pertinent thermodynamics and phase equilibria. The use of physical, chemical, and thermodynamic data to evaluate petrogenetic models of igneous and metamorphic rock suites. (3 lecture hours a week.)
The morphology, classification, paleoecology, and geologic history of selected microfossil groups; field and laboratory techniques of collection and preparation. (2 lecture, 3 laboratory hours a week.)
The application of microfossils to biostratigraphy and paleoenvironmental interpretation. Lectures and seminars on fundamentals and selected case histories. (Prerequisite: 61-572.) (3 lecture hours a week, including seminars.)
The detailed study of selected topics in igneous petrology, such as the origin and significance of high-magnesian magmas, the role of orogenic volcanism in crust-mantle recycling, continental tholeiites and the subcontinental lithosphere, or the origin and evolution of granitic magmas.
Oral presentation and discussion of current problems in the earth sciences. (Students must register in this course in each term of full-time registration in the M.Sc. Program.) (1 hour a week.)
(May be taken for credit more than once provided that the topics are different.)
Ore reserve calculation methods; supply and demand factors and their projection; capitalization, discounting and amortization of ore deposits; marketing including cartels, taxation, legislation and national interest. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Occurrence, origin, exploration and exploitation methods; physical and chemical properties of industrial minerals and their uses; economics of industrial rocks and minerals; potential uses of mineral processing byproducts. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Geologic and physio-chemical factors affecting the stability of construction materials (rock aggregate, expanded aggregate, tile, brick, etc.) under conditions of natural weathering and exposure to salts and other pollutants. (3 lecture hours a week.)
An introduction to the use of geophysics to find deep-seated ore and petroleum deposits emphasizing gravitational, magnetic, induced potential, and other relevant methods. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Advanced topics in hydrogeology related to waste disposal effects on groundwater. Topics include: groundwater contaminants, groundwater monitoring strategies, site evaluation, site remediation, and case histories. (Prerequisite: 90-436, or equivalent, or permission of instructor.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Advanced topics in hydrogeology, including: applied isotope hydrogeology, groundwater flow in fractured rocks, theory of contaminant transport in groundwater systems, evaluation of hydraulic conductivity, tracer tests, modelling of hydrogeologic systems, and case histories. (Prerequisite: 90-436, or equivalent, or permission of instructor.) (3 lecture hours a week.)
Exploitation of subsurface space for storage of industrial products and wastes. Possible environmental impact of poorly planned underground storage. Economics of subsurface vs. surface storage. Emphasis on Canadian case histories. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Examination of geology, geochemistry, and current genetic models for important hydrothermal metallic mineral deposits. (Prerequisite: 61-542 or consent of instructor.)
Recent advances in geochemical exploration techniques. Topics such as: volatile and airborne surveys, surveys in contaminated terrains, geochemical prospecting in glaciated terrains, isotope methods. Interpretation and handling of survey data. (3 lecture hours a week.)
Oral presentation and discussion of current problems in the earth sciences. (Students must register in this course in each term of full-time registration in the M.A.Sc. Program.) (1 hour a week.)
Selected advanced topics in a field of research in the Department.
Pryke, Kenneth G.; B.A. (Carleton), M.A., Ph.D. (Duke) —1963. (Head of the Department)
McCrone, Kathleen E.; B.A. (Saskatchewan), M.A., Ph.D. (New York)—1968. (Dean of the Faculty of Social Science)
Sautter, Udo; B.Phil, St. E. 1st and 2nd, Ph.D. (Tuebingen)—1969.
Klinck, David M.; B.A.; M.A. (Western Ontario), Ph.D. (Wisconsin)—1968.
Kulisek, Larry L.; B.S. (Northwest Missouri State), M.A. (Omaha), Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1968.
Pemberton, Ian C.; B.A. (Bishop's), M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1968.
Murray, Jacqueline; B.A. (British Columbia), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1988.
Tucker, E. Bruce; B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Brown)—1988.
Simmons, Christina; A.B. (Radcliffe), M.A., Ph.D. (Brown)—1990.
Howsam, Leslie; B.A. (Waterloo), M.A., Ph.D. (York)—1993.
Mason, Philip P.; B.A. (Boston), M.A. (Brown), Ph.D. (Michigan)—1990.
Candidates for the Master of Arts degree will normally prepare a major paper on a topic selected in conjunction with one of the seminar courses. Students will also take at least six graduate courses, two of which may be in a cognate field (with permission of the Department), and including at least one of either 43-503 or 43-504.
Major Paper students not specializing in Archival Studies may receive credit for no more than two archival courses.
Students must select a major paper topic not later than the end of the second term of enrolment in the program.
Candidates for the Master of Arts degree who wish to prepare a thesis must submit a thesis proposal to a graduate subcommittee for approval. Students will also take at least four graduate courses one of which may be in a cognate field (with permission of the Department), and including at least one of either 43-503 or 43-504.
Thesis students not specializing in Archival Studies may receive credit for no more than one archival courses.
Candidates for the Master of Arts degree who wish to specialize in Archival Studies must so indicate, preferrably upon application to the graduate program. All such applications will be reviewed by the departmental Admissions Committee. Students allowed to specialize in Archival Studies must consult with both the departmental Gradualte Counsellor and the Director of Archival Studies.
Accepted candidates will complete the following program of studies:
(a)Required Archival Courses: 43-571, 43-572, 43-578, 43-581, and 43-582;
(b)Required History Course: either 43-503 or 43-504;
(c)Other Archival Courses: two of 43-573, 43-574, 43-576, 43-579, or 43-580;
(d)Other History Courses: one of 43-503, 43-504 (whichever was not taken to satisfy the requirement of (b) above), or any of 43-507, 43-521, 43-522, 43-542, 43-543, 43-547, 43-561, 43-563, 43-585, 43-587, or 43-598.
(e)plus a major paper (43-796) in Archival Studies.
1) All graduate students must consult with the departmental Graduate Counsellor.
2) Students in any Master of Arts program in History are advised that they may be required to have proficiency in a language other than English in order to do their research for major paper or thesis.
3) There shall be a public, oral examination on the major paper or thesis.
Graduate seminars will be selected from the following areas:
Canada
United States
Great Britain
Europe
Local History
Women's History
Archival Studies
All of the following courses will not necessarily be offered in any one year.
This course will introduce students to current methodological and theoretical issues in the study of history. Students will review the diverse modes of contemporary historical analysis. Particular attention will be paid to the relationship between history and the social sciences, the role of narrative in historical writing, and the application of models in historical explanation.
The subject of this course will vary from year to year, but its focus will be on the development of historiographical interpretation in particular fields.
The focus of this course may vary from year to year. The primary perspective will be that of social history, and subjects may include social problems, social protest, social reforms, and the women's movement in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.
This course will provide a thematic approach to the Middle Ages from the perspective of social historians. Themes will vary from year to year and may include marriage and the family, social institutions, women, the history of sexuality, or popular religion.
This course focuses on political life during the Revolutionary era, perceived as comprising a variety of symbolic practices including language and imagery.
This course explores the evolution of Russian society from the perspective of social, cultural, and intellectual history. Although the themes, issues, and groups examined are present throughout the imperial period, the focus of this course will be primarily on developments in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries.
This course will examine the historic Canadian-American relationship with particular reference to issues of the twentieth century.
The approach in this course is both thematic and historiographical. Themes from social, political, economic, and intellectual history receive attention, with some emphasis on the relations among them.
An combination of Canadian urban and local history using Windsor and the Border Cities as a case study. Economic growth and metropolitan development, the urban landscape, population growth, and ethnic relationships; the urban community—social, cultural, and political life.
This course will provide a thematic approach to the history of the United States in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Themes will vary from year to year and will touch on various social and political developments.
This course examines major themes in the history of women and gender in North America, predominantly the United States. Themes include labour and economic development; women and political life; the Afro-American experience; the Native-American experience.
An introduction to the development of archives in the western world, especially upon United States public and private institutions; terminology and differences between library and archival techniques; the arrangement, description and servicing of archival materials.
A continuation of 43-571 designed to deal with more advanced and complicated aspects of archival administration, such as literary legal rights, libel and appraisal of records for historical and income tax purposes.
A basic course in the fundamentals of archival and literary conservation essential for effective management of programs of preventative and restorative conservation for books, documents, maps, broadsides and works of art on paper.
Management of information, including records creation, records inventory and appraisal, retention/disposition, scheduling, filing systems, maintenance of inactive records, micrographics, vital records protection, and electronic impact on records management.
43-580.Computer Applications for Archives and Records Management
Basic course on computer applications for the control, access, and processing of archival materials and records in archives, libraries, historical agencies, businesses, and museums.
Description and indexing of archives using rules for description and formation of access points. Specialization in development of archival finding aids at institutional and collection levels.
Archival students will be required to undertake a practicum of at least one month's duration in a recognized archival institution. This will be under the supervision of a senior archivist. The student will gain experience in basic archival operations. (Prerequisite: successful completion of first-year graduate courses.)
A methodology for research techniques of gathering data from individuals for use in research classroom teaching, in historical, cultural or other contexts.
The operation of public and private historical agancies, archives, and museums. Determination of agency priorities, problems of staffing and fnance, government regulations, community relations, and professional ethics.
Undergraduate senior courses, which may be assigned at the discretion of the Department Head to form part or all of the requirements of the first year of the two-year graduate program, may be found in the Undergraduate Calendar (see 4.7.3).
Moriarty, Richard James; B.A., M.A. (Assumption), M.Ed. (Wayne State), Ph.D. (Ohio State)—1956.
Hermiston, Ray Talbot; B.A., B.P.H.E. (Queen's), M.S., Ph.D. (Michigan)—1966.
Leavitt, Jack L.; B.Ed. (Alberta), M.S. (Oregon), Ed.D. (California)—1967.
Metcalfe, Alan; D.L.C. (Loughborough), B.P.E. (British Columbia), M.S., M.A., Ph.D. (Wisconsin)—1969.
Olafson, Gordon A.; B.P.E., M.P.E. (British Columbia), Ph.D. (Illinois)—1969. (Head of the Department of Kinesiology)
Salter, Michael A.; D.P.E. (Sydney), B.P.E., M.A. Ph.D. (Alberta)—1972. (Dean of the Faculty)
Boucher, Robert L.; B.Sc. (Mankato State), M.Sc. (Illinois State), Ph.D. (Ohio State)—1974. (Head of the Department of Athletics and Recreational Services)
Marino, G. Wayne; B.A., B.P.E. (McMaster), M.P.E. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Illinois)—1977.
Kenno, Kenji; B.P.H.E. (Lakehead), M.H.K., (Windsor), Ph.D. (Toledo)—1984.
Paraschak, Victoria; B.P.E. (McMaster), M.H.K. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1984.
Corlett, John T.; B.Sc. (Brock), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Simon Fraser)—1986.
Weese, W. James; B.H.K., M.H.K. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Ohio State)—1986.
Weir, Patricia; B.H.K., M.H.K (Windsor), Ph.D. (Waterloo)—1991.
There are two streams to the program: one includes a thesis and normally will lead to doctoral work; the other, which involves course work and a major paper, is designed to serve as an enrichment experience.
1) In addition to the general admission requirements of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research outlined in 1.3 and 1.6.1, the following are employed in the determination of a candidate's admission status: (The admission deadline for first round admission is February 15th. The Department of Kinesiology in conjunction with the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research will make first round offers of acceptance on March 30th.)
(a)A student must have a faculty research advisor before being admitted into one of the following areas of specialization:
i) Historical/Sociological Study of Sport;
ii) Movement Science;
iii) Psychology of Human Movement;
iv) Sport Management.
(b)A person who holds a three-year degree in another discipline is required to complete the requirements for the Master's degree as outlined in the Graduate Calendar. Up to ten kinesiology undergraduate courses beyond the minimum requirement may be deemed necessary by the departmental admission committee.
Normally, the courses are to be selected from the areas of specialization: Leisure Studies; Movement Science; and Sport Management. Further, a minimum of two courses are to be taken from each area of specialization.
Undergraduate courses, assigned at the discretion of the admissions committee and the student's advisor to form part or all the qualifying or make-up requirements, may be found in the Undergraduate Calendar (see 9.4).
1) In addition to the general requirements for the Master's degree, the candidate must:
(a)complete as a minimum five graduate-level courses and a thesis, or substitute three graduate-level courses and a major paper in lieu of the thesis, with a maximum of two graduate-level cognate courses in the major paper stream and one or two graduate-level courses in the thesis stream;
(b)pass an oral examination based on a thesis or major paper;
(c)present a seminar once during the graduate program;
(d)complete 95-562, Research Methods, if required, during the first year of study.
2) Only one Special Problems course may be taken regardless of area of specialization.
3) Master's Committee and Advisors: Prior to a candidate's initial registration, the Head of the Department will assign a program advisor for each candidate.
The program advisor may or may not act as chairperson of the Master's thesis committee, which will include at least two additional members, one of whom shall belong to a department outside the Faculty of Human Kinetics. An additional member from the graduate faculty of another university may be invited to serve on the Master's thesis committee.
4) Examinations
(a)Thesis Stream: The thesis committee will conduct the oral examination of the thesis proposal. When the thesis has been completed, the thesis committee, in consultation with the candidate, will determine whether to proceed with or postpone the final oral examination. The grade on the written thesis shall be submitted prior to the examination and shall be worth sixty percent (60%) of the final grade. For the final oral examination of the thesis, the committee will be supplemented by another member of the Kinesiology graduate faculty who will act as the chairperson. Following the successful defense, the candidate will deposit all copies of the thesis in the Office of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research for binding and distribution (two copies for the Leddy Library, one or two copies to the Faculty of Human Kinetics).
(b)Non-Thesis Option:
i) Major paper Option: The major paper must include the collection and analyses of data. A written outline must be approved by the advisor and other reader prior to data collection. Following completion of the major paper, the student is required to pass an oral examination supervised by the advisor and other reader on the topic of the paper. Seventy percent (70%) of the grade for the major paper will be based on the written manuscript and thirty percent (30%) on the final oral exam. Following the successful defense, the candidate deposits all copies in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research (two copies for the Leddy Library, and two copies for the Department of Kinesiology).
ii) Sport Management Internship Option: The sport management internship consists of a minimum of 360 hours of applied work experience in a sport management setting. The internship option is open exclusively to sport mangagement students who have completed four graduate courses. Students develop an internship experience in conjuction with a graduate faculty memeber from the sport management program prior to registering for the internship. Students are required to complete the "Internship Objectives Form" prior to completing 50 hours of their experience. Their work experience is supervised and evaluated (mid-term and final evaluation) by the cooperating field professional. Final evaluation is on a Pass/Non-Pass basis and the student is required to pass both the experience and the report components of the internship. The internship report in Sport Management is administered by the Cooperative Education and Placement Office and adjudicated by the sport management group. Following the successful completion, the candidate deposits two copies of the internship report in the Department of Kinesiology.
The following summaries of requirements apply to thesis and sport managment internship options. Students interested in the major paper option must consult with their advisor regarding additional courses.
The program focuses on the form and function of sport, its relationship to particular institutions, and the way it relates to societal patterns of domination and subordination in terms of race, class, ethnicity, and gender. Each candidate is to address questions that emerge through the course work and conduct thesis research that incorporates a historical and sociological perspective in Canadian sport. To fulfill the degree requirements, each candidate must complete all of the following:
1)All of: 95-510, 95-514, 95-515.
2)Two graduate courses chosen from the Department of Kinesiology or from a cognate department.
3)Graduate Seminar (95-530).
4)A Thesis (95-797).
The program focuses on a selective approach to the understanding of the biomechanical and physiological perspectives of physical activity. Students pursue course work and thesis research that examines basic and applied principles of physiology and biomechanics. To fulfill the degree requirements, each candidate must complete the following:
1)A minimum of two courses from: 95-510, 95-523, 95-528, 95-595.
2)minimum of one graduate cognate course.
3)Graduate Seminar (95-530).
4)Thesis (95-797).
This program focuses upon psychological factors influencing human perceptual motor behaviour. Students pursue course work and thesis research that examine theorectical foundations and practical application of motor control, learning, development, and performance. To fulfill the degree requirements, each candidate must complete the following:
1)Three courses chosen from 95-510, 95-524, 95-525, 95-526, 95-527, 95-595.
2)Two graduate courses from the Department of Kinesiology or a cognate department.
3)Two semesters of 95-529.
4)Graduate Seminar (95-530).
5)A Thesis (95-797).
The program focuses upon the understanding of the components of organizational behaviour in the context of amateur and professional sport environments. Students will pursue course work and thesis research that focuses on topics such as leadership, organizational effectiveness, sport marketing, and organizational change. To fulfill the degree requirements, each candidiate must complete all of the following:
1)Three courses from 95-500, 95-501, 95-502, 95-503, 95-510, 95-595.
2)Research Methods (95-562) or equivalent.
3)One graduate course chosen from the Department of Kinesiology, or a cognate department.
4)Graduate Seminar (95-530).
5)A Thesis (95-797).
1)Five courses from 95-500, 95-501, 95-502, 95-503, 95-510, 95-595, and an additional kinesiology graduate course from another program.
2)Three graduate courses, one of which must be a cognate.
3)Graduate Seminar (95-530).
4)Internship (95-795).
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given term. All courses are three hours a week unless otherwise noted.
The following summaries of requirements apply to the thesis stream. Students interested in the major paper stream should consult the Department regarding additional courses.
This course is intended to be a survey course using the current research and literature relating to leadership in sport environments. The specific focus involves administrative leadership in sport settings. Several leadership theories will be reviewed, analyzed and discussed. The merits of various models will be discussed with respect to their relevance in understanding the leadership phenomenon.
Analysis of research and professional practice related to the establishment, growth, development and potential decline of organizations in the area of sport and physical activity. Intervention techniques and coping strategies of organizational members as agents of change will be studied. The role of legislation and litigation in bringing about change serves as a focal point.
An analysis of the interactive nature of the social/psychological components of organizational behaviour. Specific reference will be made to the interdependence and the coupling of individual, interpersonal, and group behaviour, and the organizational effectiveness of sport organizations.
An analysis of the literature and research related to the marketing of sport and physical activity programs. Specific emphasis is to be on the theory and application to profit and not-for-profit sport organizations.
Independent study conducted under the advisement of a graduate faculty member. This course cannot be used as a review of literature for thesis or major paper. (Prerequisite: consent of instructor.)
An analysis of modern-day Canadian sport through various sociological perspectives. This examination will include the assessment of sport with respect to both social differentiation and societal institutions.
An analysis of the historical antecedents of Canadian sport. Emphasis will be placed on those forces instrumental in the moulding of nineteenth and twentieth-century Canadian sport.
This course will focus on the application of biomechanics concepts and measurement techniques in the study of human movement. Specific topics will reflect the interests of students and may include areas such as sport, ergonomics, rehabilitation, growth and development, locomotion, and activities of daily living. (Prerequisite: 95-480 or consent of instructor.)
This is a lecture/seminar course that focuses on the cognitive operations involved in the learning of motor skills. Emphasis is on the demands made by movement on information-processing resources and changes that occur in the organization and execution of movement through practice. These processes will be discussed as they operate in the general population as well as how they depend upon performers' physical and emotional states. (Prerequisite: 95-310 or 95-410, or consent of instructor.)
This course examines the enabling and disabling effects on movement of individual differences in competence at identifying desired goals, focusing attention, coping with distraction, responding to emotions, making decisions, and managing anxiety. (Prerequisite: 95-211 or consent of instructor.)
This is a lecture/seminar course focusing on issues, concepts, and methods in motor control. Through a comprehensive examiantion of the literature different theoretical approaches are presented, and their relative merits are evaluated. Emphasis is placed on the control of those movements crucial to our everyday interactions with our environment. (Prerequisite: 95-310 or consent of instructor.)
This lecture/seminar course provides students with a broad understanding of development theory from both biology and psychology. These theoretical bases provide a foundation for understanding the development of motor behaviour from infancy to puberty. (Prerequisite: 95-285 or consent of instructor.)
This course emphasizes the acute regulation and chronic adaptive nature of selected physiological systems directly related to movement. General topics will be excitation contraction coupling of skeletal/cardiac/smooth muscle, cardio-respiratory physiology, pathophysiology as well as current topics of interest in physiology. (Prerequisites: 95-260 and either 95-360 or 95-460, or consent of instructor.)
This course involves the presentation and discussion of current topics. (Restricted to students in Psychology of Human Movement area.)
A one hour per week pass/non-pass seminar involving oral presentations and discussions of current problems in kinesiology. Students must register and attend this course each term of full-time registration.
A review and appraisal of qualitative and quantitative research methods with special reference to design, data collection, analysis and generalization. (Prerequisite: 95-270 or consent of instructor.)
This course has seminar, a series of lectures, and a project directed towards the understanding of advanced hardware and software and their management in kinesiology. The development of practical problem solving, communications, and current software management will be the basis of the course. (Prerequisite: 95-363 or consent of instructor.)
(Must be a course approved by the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research).
Topics developed by individual faculty members, based on new developments in a particular area of study. (Must be approved by Departmental Council.)
Undergraduate courses, which may be assigned at the discretion of the admissions committee and Department Head to form part or all of the requirements for admission to candidacy of a student deficient in entrance requirements, may be found in the Undergraduate Calendar ( see 9.4).
Tracy, Derrick Shannon; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Lucknow), M.S., Sc.D. (Michigan)—1965.
McDonald, James F.; B.S., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1967.
Chandna, Om Parkash; B.A. (Panjab), M.A. (Delhi), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1968.
Duggal, Krishan L.; B.A. (Panjab), M.A. (Agra), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1968.
Kaloni, Purna N.; M.Sc. (Allahabad), M. Tech., Ph.D. (Indian Inst. of Tech.)—1970.
Lemire, Francis William; B.Sc. (Windsor), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Queen's)—1970.
Wigley, Neil M.; B.A., Ph.D. (California)—1970.
Britten, Daniel J.; B.A. (Merrimack College), M.S., Ph.D. (Iowa)—1971.
Wong, Chi Song; B.S. (National Taiwan), M.S. (Oregon), M.S., Ph.D. (Illinois-Urbana)—1971.
Barron, Ronald Michael; B.A., M.Sc. (Windsor), M.S. (Stanford), Ph.D. (Carleton)—1975.
Fung, Karen Yuen; B.A., M.S., Ph.D. (U.C.L.A.)—1976.
Paul, Sudhir R.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Dacca), Ph.D. (Wales)—1982.
Zamani, Nader G.; B.Sc. (Case Western), M.Sc., Ph.D. (Brown)—1986.
Traynor, Tim Eden; B.A., M.A. (Saskatchewan), Ph.D. (British Columbia)—1971.
Caron, Richard J.; B.M., M.M., Ph.D. (Waterloo)—1983. (Head of the Department)
Hlynka, Myron; B.Sc. (Manitoba), M.A., Ph.D. (Pennsylvania State)—1986.
For admission requirements and period of study, the general regulations of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research should be consulted (see 1.5). Qualifying examinations will not normally be required.
Students will be recommended for candidacy (see 1.5.1) only after successful completion of the Comprehensive Examinations and course work.
1) Course Work: Students admitted with an M.Sc. or equivalent must successfully complete at least four graduate courses numbered with the prefix 62-; further graduate courses may be assigned by the Graduate Studies Committee in consultation with the advisor. Transfer credits will not be allowed. In addition, graduate courses completed at this institution must include two of the following: Real Analysis (62-510), Functional Analysis (62-512), or Partial Differential Equations (62-561).
Students admitted with an Honours B.Sc., or equivalent, which is done only in exceptional cases, must successfully complete at least twelve graduate courses, eight of which must be numbered with the prefix 62-; further graduate courses may be assigned by the Graduate Studies Committee in consultation with the advisor. Transfer credits will not be allowed.
2) Doctoral Committee: Within the student's first term of study at the doctoral level, a doctoral committee will be appointed by the Head of the Department upon the advice of the Graduate Studies Committee. The doctoral committee must be approved by the Executive Committee of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. The doctoral committee shall include the student's advisor as chairperson, at least two other members of the Department, one faculty member from outside the Department, and an external examiner, who shall not be involved in the preparation of the dissertation. The selection of the external examiner is subject to the approval of the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. Members of other departments may also be invited to join the committee (see also 1.5.2).
3) Dissertation: The dissertation shall be defended at an oral examination (see also 1.5.2).
4) Comprehensive Examinations: Each student will be required to pass a series of three written comprehensive examinations. These will test the student's background knowledge and preparedness for research in a particular area of mathematics. If a student fails an examination, it may be repeated once, but if the examination is failed a second time, the student must withdraw from the program (see also 1.5.3). In any case, these examinations must be successfully completed within twenty-five months of registration in the doctoral program. If this deadline is not met, the student must withdraw from the program.
1) Course Work: Students admitted with an M.Sc. or equivalent must successfully complete at least four graduate courses numbered with the prefix 65-; further graduate courses may be assigned by the Graduate Studies Committee in consultation with the advisor. Transfer credits will not be allowed. (Up to two courses prefixed 65- may be replaced by 62-510 and/or 62-511.)
Students admitted with an Honours B.Sc., or equivalent, which is done only in exceptional cases, must successfully complete at least twelve graduate courses, eight of which must be numbered with the prefix 65-; further graduate courses may be assigned by the Graduate Studies Committee in consultation with the advisor. Transfer credits will not be allowed.
It is strongly recommended that all Ph.D. students in Statistics take a measure theoretic probability course.
2) Doctoral Committee: within the student's first term of study at the doctoral level, a doctoral committee will be appointed by the Head of the Department upon the advice of the Graduate Studies Committee. The doctoral committee must be approved by the Executive Committee of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. The doctoral committee shall include the student's advisor as chairperson, at least two other members of the Department, one faculty member from outside the Department, and an external examiner, who shall not be involved in the preparation of the dissertation. The selection of the external examiner is subject to the approval of the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. Members of other departments may also be invited to join the committee (see also 1.5.2).
3) Dissertation: The dissertation shall be defended at an oral examination (see also 1.5.2).
4) Comprehensive Examinations: A student must pass a series of three written comprehensive examinations as follows:
(i)Paper I—Mathematical Statistics and Probability
(ii)Paper II—Statistics OR Probability
(iii)Paper III—Topics (two topics mutually agreed upon by the advisor and student).
If a student fails an examination, it may be repeated once, but if the examination is failed a second time, the student must withdraw from the program (see also 1.5.3). In any case, these examinations must be successfully completed within twenty-five months of registration in the doctoral program. If this deadline is not met, the student must withdraw from the program.
The candidate shall successfully complete one of the following courses of study:
(i)eight graduate courses, or
(ii)seven graduate courses and a major paper, or
(iii)six graduate courses and a thesis.
In addition, graduate courses completed at this institution must include two of the following: Real Analysis (62-510), Functional Analysis (62-512), or Partial Differential Equations (62-561).
The candidate shall successfully complete one of the following courses of study:
(i)eight graduate courses, of which at least six must be numbered with the prefix 65-; or
(ii)seven graduate courses, of which at least five must be numbered with the prefix 65-, and a major paper; or
(iii)six graduate courses, of which at least four must be numbered with the prefix 65-, and a thesis.
(In all three program options, up to two courses prefixed 65- may be replaced by 62-510 and/or 62-511.)
If the thesis option is taken for either the M.Sc. (Mathematics) or the M.Sc. (Statistics), a Master's committee must be appointed within the student's first term of study at the II Master's (Candidate) level. The Master's committee must be approved by the Executive Committee of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. The Master's committee shall include the student's supervisor as chairperson, one other member of the Department, and one faculty member from outside the Department.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year.
62-500.Mathematical Logic
62-501.Axiomatic Set Theory
62-510.Functions of a Real Variable I
62-511.Functions of a Real Variable II
62-512.Functional Analysis I
62-513.Functional Analysis II
62-520.Abstract Algebra I
62-521.Abstract Algebra II
62-523.Lie Algebras
62-524.Representation Theory
62-525.Matrix Algebra and Analysis
62-530.General Topology
62-533.Differential Geometry
62-536.Riemannian Geometry
62-561.Partial Differential Equations
62-568.Numerical Analysis I
62-569.Numerical Analysis II
62-570.Continuum Mechanics
62-572.Fluid Dynamics I
62-573.Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics
62-575.Compressible Flow I
62-577.Numerical Techniques in Fluid Dynamics I
62-579.Visco-elasticity and Plasticity
62-582.Fluid Dynamics II
62-583.Perturbation Methods in Fluid Mechanics II
62-585.Compressible Flow II
62-587.Numerical Techniques in Fluid Dynamics II
62-590.General Relativity
62-592.Relativistic Fluid Dynamics
62-593.Introduction to Finite Element Method
62-595.Mathematical Programming
62-598.Special Topics
62-796.Major Paper
62-797.Thesis (M.Sc.)
62-798.Dissertation (Ph.D.)
65-540.Theory of Probability
65-541.Stochastic Processes
65-542.Advanced Mathematical Statistics I
65-543.Advanced Mathematical Statistics II
65-544.Multivariate Analysis I
65-545.Multivariate Analysis II
65-546.Statistical Data Analysis
65-548.Non-parametric Statistics
65-549.Discrete Multivariate Analysis
65-550.Linear Models
65-552.Experimental Design
65-554.Theory of Sampling and Surveys
65-555.Regression Analysis
65-556.Decision Theory
65-559.Topics in Statistics
Topics offered may include queueing theory, generalized multivariate analysis, bioassy, generalized linear models, optimal design, and Bayesian analysis.
65-796.Major Paper
65-797.Thesis (M.Sc.)
65-798.Dissertation (Ph.D.)
Rosenbaum, Janet N.; B.Sc.N., M.Sc.N., Ph.D., (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1975.
Cameron, W. Sheila; R.S.C.N. (Scotland), B.A. (McMaster), M.A. Nurs. Educ. (Detroit), Ed.D. (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1976. (Director of the School)
Carty, Laurie; B.Sc.N., B.A., M.Ed. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1980.
Thomas, Barbara Campbell; Dip.P.H.N., B.N.Sc. (Queen's), M.Ed. (Windsor), Ed.D. (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1969.
Temple, Anna; B.Sc.N. (Windsor), M.Sc.N., Ph.D. (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1971.
Abraham, Puthenvilla Y; B.Sc.N. (Alberta), B. Com. (Windsor), M.P.H., Specialist In Aging Cert., M.S. (Com. Hlth. Nsg.) Ph.D. (Michigan), Reg.N.—1971.
Fawdry, Mary Kaye; B.Sc.N. (Windsor), B.A., M.Ed., Ed.D. (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1973.
McMahon, Sharon; B.Sc.N., B.A., M.Ed. (Windsor), Ed.D. (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1973.
Drake, Mary Louise; Dip. P.H.N., B.Sc.N., B.A. (Windsor), Dip. in Midwifery (Great Britain), M.A. Nurs. Educ. (Detroit), Ed. D. (Wayne State), Reg.N.—1975.
Horsburgh, M. Elizabeth; B.Sc.N., B.A., M.Ed. (Windsor), M.Sc.N. (Wayne Sttae), Reg.N.—1984.
Foley, Donna M.; Dip. N. Educ., B.Sc.N., B.A., M.A. (Windsor), Reg.N.—1972.
Matuk, Lucia, B.Sc. (Toronto), B.Sc.N., B. A.,(Windsor), M.Sc.N. (Western), Reg.N.—1987.
Rajacich, Dale; B.Sc.N. (Windsor), M.Sc.N. (Western Ontario), Reg.N.—1987.
Snowdon, Anne; B.Sc.N. (Western Ontario), M.Sc.A. (McGill), Reg.N.—1988.
Kane, Deborah; B.Sc.N. (Windsor), M.Sc.N. (Western Ontario), Reg.N.—1989.
The mission of the University of Windsor Master of Science degree program in Nursing is to prepare graduates for advanced nursing practice. Graduates will address societal health needs relating to health promotion and illness prevention, or human responses and adaptations to alterations in health. Through the integration of theory, research, and practice students will advance their scientific base for practice. In addition the program supports development of leadership and advocacy skills for contributions to health care, education and research. Through faculty guidance and self-directed learning activities, students from diverse backgrounds will develop advanced professional knowledge through critical thinking, decision making, and scholarly inquiry in a multicultural society. This program is especially designed to meet the needs of employed baccalaureate prepared nurses.
1) All general regulations of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research admission requirements are applicable.
2) Applicanta must have a Bachelor of Science in Nursing or equivalent which includes physical assessment, and courses in research and statistics. Consideration may be given to nurse applicants holding degrees in other cognate disciplines.
3) Applicants must have maintained an overall B average in their undergraduate nursing program.
4) Applicants must be eligible for a current certificate of competence as registered nurses in Ontario.
5) Three confidential reports must be completed by academic/professional referees, with at least one from an academic who has taught the applicant and one from a recent employment supervisor.
6) An "Applicant Profile" must be completed wich includes a section addressing goals in seeking graduate education.
7) Applicants whose native language is not English must submit certification of English proficiency (official TOEFL score or equivalent MELAB).
8) Applications for admission must be completed by February 1.
1) Candidates for the Master of Science degree in Nursing will pursue studies in one of two areas of concentration:
(a)Human response and adaptations to alterations in health of individuals, families and groups to acute and chronic illness.
(b)Health promotion and illness prevention in selected populations.
2) The requirements may be satisfied by pursuing a program of studies consisting of six compulsory courses and a thesis, or six compulsory courses, two elective courses and a major paper/project. Students intending to pursue a doctoral degree after successful completion of the Master's program are advised to take the thesis option. Those who wish to include a thesis in their program must request approval from the Graduate Committee of the Faculty.
Additional information concerning the procedure for theses and major papers may be obtained from the coordinator of graduate studies (see 1.6.3).
3) Compulsory courses:
63-581.Theoretical Foundations of Nursing
63-582.Advanced Statistics
63-583.Research Methods in Nursing
63-599.Clinical Judgment in Nursing
and either 63-584 and 63-586, or 63-588 and 63-590, depending on the selected area of focus.
4) Clinical Judgement in Nursing Practice will involve one term of full-time study in a setting selected in consultation with the student. Students will select individuals, families, or groups in various health care facilities, and/or community settings, to develop their knowledge and skill in the discipline.
5) Project/major paper students will select electives in consultation with the advisor with at least one elective being in nursing. The other elective may be in another discipline. It may be possible to take Primary Care Nurse Practitioner courses as electives. Courses will be selected according to the student's research interests.
6) All candidates' programs are subject to approval by the graduate coordinator.
7) The minimum grade required in all graduate courses is B-. A student who does not successfully complete a course may repeat it once at the discretion of the Director of the School and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. The student may not repeat more than one course.
8) The maximum time limit is six years.
9) Students of the School of Nursing are required to demonstrate behaviours consistent with the "Standards of Nursing Practice for Registered Nurses and Registered Practical Nurses" and the "Guidelines for Ethical Behaviour in Nursing" of the College of Nurses of Ontario.
Failure of any Nursing student to conform to the principles of these documents may result in dismissal from any of the School of Nursing's programs.
The Master's thesis committee is chosen in the manner described in 1.6.2 of this Graduate Calendar. The final examination will be conducted by the Master's committee.
Students choosing a project/major paper must have a detailed proposal approved by at least two nursing faculty members, one of whom will serve as the primary advisor. The approved proposal application form must be submitted to the Director of the School in order to register for the project/major paper. The project/major paper committee will conduct the final oral examination.
Each student must obtain approval of his or her program in writing, from the graduate coordinator, within three weeks of registration. Subsequent changes require written approval from the graduate coordinator.
Not all of the courses listed below will necessarily be offered in any one year.
Curricular models and instructional approaches will be analyzed from both a philosophical and theoretical perspective. Curricular models will be analyzed according to their philosophical base, theory and research, and their resultant impact on teaching and learning in nursing.
Study of political, economic, legal, and ethical issues impacting on nursing leadership in educational and clinical settings.
Theories and concepts relating to health care organizations will be studied. The impact of internal and external forces on health care delivery systems will be studied.
A study of concepts, theories, and practices that will assist nurse leaders to develop effective approaches to human resource management in nursing education and service settings.
An historical and futuristic examination of the critical issues facing the nursing profession and discipline. Considering the practice orientation of nursing, students will explore issues related to education, practice, discipline, and professionalism.
Intended for students with a special interest in and knowledge of a specialty area in nursing. To explore theory and research related to human responses and adaptations to alterations in health, or health promotion and illness prevention with selected client populations. (To be taken only with permission of the School.)
The focus of this course is theory exploration in nursing. Beginning with the theoretical evolution of the discipline of nursing, students progress to issues related to development of theory in a practice discipline. Analysis, evaluation, and comparison are made of selected nursing conceptual models/theories and their major concepts. The contributions of the conceptual models to practice and research are investigated.
An advanced course with a focus on multivariate analysis. Topics include ANOVA, MANOVA, regression analyses, critique of statistical analyses of research articles, and computer data analysis.
Students will examine diverse approaches to scientific inquiry in nursing. Within selected research paradigms, students will explore design, process, and evaluation techniques. Models for research analysis will be analyzed. Opportunities will be provided for students to develop a research proposal to gain solutions to nursing problems.
With emphasis on nursing assessment, patterns of coping in life situations involving alterations in health will be explored. Theories, concepts, and research related to normatives and situational stressors for the individual and family in interaction with the environment will be studied in relation to healthy coping.
Emphasis on planning, intervening, and evaluating nursing care strategies for promotion of adaptation/coping for individuals, families, groups, and communities. Needs related to age and special populations will be examined in cultural context. Students will analyze social structure features, for example, politics, economics, values which influence resources for healthy coping and adaptation.
Students will examine theories and research related to processes which result in both positive and negative changes in health and well-being for individuals within the context of families and communities. Interactional patterns of nurses and clients, in promoting clients' right to health, will be explored. The role of the nurse as client advocate will be emphasized.
Health promotion and illness prevention for complex populations will be analyzed, with an emphasis on strategies for nursing intervention to facilitate positive health outcomes. Health issues related to gender, life-cycle, and culture will be included, with examination of related theory and research.
Students will select an area of clinical interest and will gain skills in the application of nursing theories and research in a practice setting. Using their expanded theoretical base, students will conduct comprehensive assessments of clients (individuals, families, groups, or communities) and will implement appropriate intervention strategies and evaluation protocols. Students will validate their conceptual model of nursing care.
An expansion and extension of course work in which students working with a faculty advisor will choose a major project/paper. Students must provide evidence of synthesis of previous course work relative to a selected health issue or area such as clinical practice, teaching or administration.
Before writing the thesis, the student must meet with the Master's committee to obtain approval of the thesis investigation. Permission will only be granted when the student has shown sufficient preparation and competence to carry out the thesis proposal. Upon completion, each candidate will be required to make a satisfactory oral presentation and defense of the thesis.
Johnson, Ralph Henry; B.A. (Xavier), M.A., Ph.D. (Notre Dame)—1966. Professors
Lewis, John Underwood; A.B. (North Texas State), Ph.D. (Marquette)—1964.
Blair, John Anthony; B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Michigan)—1967. (Head of the Department)
Wright, John P.; B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (York)—1983.
Pinto, Robert Charles; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1963.
Westra, Laura; B.A. (York), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1990.
Cook, Deborah; B.A., M.A. (Ottawa), Doct. 3e cycle (Sorbonne) 1989.
Fisher, Linda J.; B.A. (Wilfrid Laurier), M.A. (Ottawa), Ph.D. (Pennsylvania State)—1992.
The aim of the program is to give students the opportunity to deepen their philosophical understanding both by broadening their undergraduate background and by allowing them to concentrate their studies on specific areas of philosophy which interest them. The Philosophy M.A. program is structured in such a way as to encourage maximum participation by students in seminars and allow extensive contact with professors outside of formal class time.
See 1.6.1 for general requirements for admission into an M.A. program at the University of Windsor. The Philosophy Department normally requires the equivalent of twenty one-term courses in philosophy for admission to the one-year Master's program and the equivalent of ten one-term courses in philosophy for admission to the two-year Master's program.
For general requirements for the Master's degree, see 1.6.2. The following are particular requirements for the M.A. in Philosophy:
1) The student may proceed to the degree in any one of the following ways:
(a)successfully complete at least four and not more than six graduate courses (the fifth and sixth courses may be in a cognate field), and satisfactorily complete a thesis on which there shall be an oral examination;
(b)successfully complete six courses, two of which may be in a cognate field, and satisfactorily complete a major research paper on which there shall be an oral examination;
(c)successfully complete eight courses, two of which may be in a cognate field.
(i)
Students wishing to pursue Ph.D. studies are advised to take option (a) or (b), but not (c).
(ii)Students choosing option (c) should recognize that students in their candidate year normally take two graduate courses each term and that it will take more than one year to complete their program.
2) All students proceeding to the degree must:
(a)include the departmental seminar (Philosophy 34-590) among their courses for the degree;
(b)successfully complete the Master's examination in Philosophy.
3) M.A. Qualifying Year: Students at the I Master's level are required to take either 34-490 (Honour's Essay) or 34-491 (Honour's Seminar) (see 3.9.3 of the Undergraduate Calendar).
4) Program Approval : Each student must have his or her projected program authorized by the chairperson of the Graduate Studies Committee.
In a given academic year at least one course will be offered which will deal with a certain problem or set of problems of concern to contemporary philosophers in the following areas:
34-520.Ethical Theory
34-521.Political Philosophy
34-522.Philosophy of Law
34-525.Topics in Practical and Applied Ethics
34-540.Philosophy of Religion
34-541.Philosophy of Science
34-542.Philosophy of History
34-543.Philosophy of Language
34-544.Aesthetics
34-550.Epistemology
35-551.Metaphysics
34-552.Philosophy of Mind
34-560.Formal Logic
34-561.Theory of Argument
34-562.Theory of Informal Fallacies
34-563.Theory and Teaching of Critical Thinking
34-565 to 34-569. Advanced Seminar: Selected Topics in Philosophy
In a given academic year there will be an intensive study of a given philosopher or philosophical issue from one or more of the following:
34-570.Greek Philosophy
34-571.Medieval Philosophy
34-572.Renaissance Philosophy
34-573.Seventeenth-Century Philosophy
34-574.Eighteenth-Century Philosophy
34-575.Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
34-576.Foundations of Existentialism
34-577.Twentieth-Century Continental Philosophy
34-578.Twentieth-Century Anglo-American Philosophy
34-580 to 34-584. Advanced Seminar: Selected Topics in the History of Philosophy
The following course must be taken by all M.A. students:
34-590.Departmental Seminar: The History of Philosophy in Perspective.
The aim of the seminar is to deepen students' sensitivity to the history of philosophy and help prepare them for the Master's examination in Philosophy. Each year a specific philosophical theme is traced through a number of key figures in the history of thought.
34-796.Major Paper
34-797.Thesis
Note: Students may receive credit for more than one course offered in Groups A and B provided that the emphasis is sufficiently different. Thus, for example, credit may be received for both "34-570 Greek Philosophy: Plato" and "34-570 Greek Philosophy: Aristotle" where these are entirely distinct course offerings.
Krause, Lucjan; B.Sc. (London), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), D.Sc. (London; Nicholas Copernicus), F.Inst.P.—1958.
Holuj, Frank; B.Sc. (London), M.Sc., Ph.D. (McMaster)—1961.
Drake, Gordon W. F.; B.Sc. (McGill), M.Sc. (Western Ontario), Ph.D. (York), F.Inst.P., F.R.S.C.—1969. (Killam Research Fellow, 1990–1992)
McConkey, John William; B.Sc., Ph.D. (Queen's University of Belfast), F.Inst.P.—1970. (Killam Research Fellow, 1986–1988)
van Wijngaarden, Arie; B.Sc., Ph.D. (McMaster)—1961.
Czajkowski, Mieczyslaw A.; M.Sc., D.Sc. (Nicholas Copernicus)—1967.
Schlesinger, Mordechay; M.Sc., Ph.D. (Jerusalem), F.Inst.P.—1968.
Baylis, William Eric; B.S. (Duke), M.S. (Illinois), D.Sc. (Technical U. of Munich)—1969.
Atkinson, John Brian; M.A., D. Phil. (Oxon.)—1972.
Helbing, Reinhard K. B.; Dipl. Phys., Dr. Rer. Nat. (Bonn)—1972.
Glass, Edward N.; B.S. (Carnegie-Mellon), M.S., Ph.D. (Syracuse)—1974.
Habib, Edwin Emile; B.Sc. (Birmingham), Ph.D. (McMaster)—1959.
Jensen, Erik Troels; B.Sc. (Victoria), Ph.D. (Cambridge)—1993.
The basic qualification for admission consists of a Bachelor's degree with adequate specialization in Physics, obtained with first or second class honours or an A or B average. Students with deficiencies may be required to make up these deficiencies by registering in undergraduate courses or by following a program of supervised reading.
Applicants whose academic credentials are difficult to assess may be required to write the Graduate Record Examination (GRE) administered by the Educational Testing Service. Inquiries should be made at the time of application. Details of the examination may be obtained from the Educational Testing Service, Princeton, New Jersey, U.S.A., 08540.
1) Period of Study: A minimum of three years in full-time graduate studies is required. Credit for one of the three years may be given for a Master's degree obtained in this Department or for graduate work carried out at another institution. Not more than seven years should elapse between registration and completion of the requirements for the degree; an extension of this period may be granted only on recommendation from the Department and approval by the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research.
2) Course Work: Candidates with Master's degrees in Physics (or equivalent) will complete a minimum of four graduate courses, including 64-610, 64-612 (or 64-613), and at least one of 64-630, 64-650, or 64-651. Candidates also must take 64-550 and 64-551 if previous equivalent credit has not been obtained.
Candidates who do not have a Master's degree in Physics (or equivalent) will complete a minimum of twelve graduate courses which must include 64-510, 64-550, 64-551, 64-610, and at least three of 64-630, 64-631, 64-640, 64-650, or 64-651.
3) Doctoral Committee: Within one month after registration each student will be assigned to an advisory committee consisting of a research advisor and two other faculty members in the Department.
This committee will, from time to time, review the student's progress (see 1.5.2).
For the defense of dissertation (final oral examination) the advisory committee will be supplemented by one professor from another department and an external examiner who, as an expert in the field of physics in which the candidate's research is carried out, will appraise the dissertation and ordinarily will also be present at the final oral examination.
4) Dissertation: In order to qualify for the degree each candidate must present a dissertation embodying the results of an original investigation in a branch of physics. Graduate courses form an important but subsidiary part of the program.
The candidate, when requested, shall submit to the chief advisor from time to time portions of the dissertation and a complete draft on a date specified by the advisor, and place four typewritten copies of the completed dissertation in the hands of the advisor at least six weeks before Convocation. Rules governing binding, quality of paper, etc., of the dissertation can be found in Procedures to Follow in Preparing a Thesis or Dissertation (see 1.5.3).
5) Examinations: In addition to the examinations in the courses, all candidates must pass qualifying examinations covering the general field of physics at the level of the honours program given in this Department. The examinations must be passed after the completion of the M.Sc. degree, not later than one year after registration as a graduate student proceeding to the Ph.D. Other examinations (written or oral) may be set at the discretion of the Department.
Each candidate will, on recommendation of the advisory committee, submit to a final oral examination in defense of the dissertation.
1) The requirements for the degree of Master of Science may be satisfied by pursuing a program of studies consisting of either not less than eight and not more than ten graduate courses, or at least four and not more than six graduate courses and a thesis.
2) 64-510, 64-521, 64-550 and 64-551 will be required of all candidates.
Candidates proceeding to the M.Sc. by either of the above options may include in their program, with the approval of the Department, two undergraduate courses.
3) Candidates who are proceeding to the M.Sc. by course work alone may be permitted to include in their programs four courses in Mathematics.
Not all of the courses listed below will necessarily be offered in any one year.
In order to receive credit for this course, a student should attend the weekly departmental seminar throughout M.Sc. studies and present a minimum of one seminar on a topic approved by the Seminar Coordinator.
Radiation by moving charges, synchrotron radiation, bremsstrahlung, scattering of radiation, multipole fields, radiation reaction.
Review of atomic collisions and kinetic theory, motion of charged particles, elementary processes in the production and decay of ionization in gases, plasma waves and oscillations, transport processes, elements of magnetohydrodynamic stability theory. Applications of plasma physics.
Classical theory of scattering. Formal quantum theory. The definitions of cross sections, transition probabilities and related concepts. The Born approximation, phase shifts.
The Green function approach. Elastic scattering of particles with spin. Examples from atomic and nuclear phenomena. (Prerequisite: 64-540.)
Atomic/molecular beam methods and techniques. Collision phenomena in atomic and molecular scattering, including elastic, inelastic and reactive scattering, excitation, ionization, and charge exchange. Detailed discussion of the experimental results and their interpretation in terms of interatomic/molecular forces and potentials.
A variety of topics in electron and photon collisions highlighting current advances in these fields and including total and differential elastic and inelastic scattering of electrons and positrons, resonances, polarization, coherence and correlation effects, post-collision interactions, photon-stimulation spectroscopy. (Prerequisite: 64-542.)
Rotation matrices, 3n-j coefficients and graphical techniques for angular-momentum coupling, irreducible tensor operators, the Wigner-Eckart theorem and applications, the density matrix, interactions of atoms with external fields.
Systems of identical fermions, the central-field approximation, self-consistent-field methods, the Thomas-Fermi model, Hartree-Fock theory, configuration interaction, coefficients of fractional parentage, relativistic effects. (Prerequisite: 64-554.)
Diatomic molecules, Born-Oppenheimer approximation, adiabatic potentials, Hund's coupling cases, rotational, vibrational, and electronic states and associated spectra. Applications of group theory to the structure and spectra of polyatomic molecules.
Rotational, vibrational, and electronic spectra of polyatomic molecules. Zeeman and Stark effects and hyperfine structure. Laser spectroscopy. Van der Waals molecules. (Prerequisite: 64-546.)
General principles, representations and transformation theory. Approximation methods. Many-body problems and identical particles.
Number representations and second quantization. Dirac equation. An introduction into quantum electrodynamics and the electro-weak theory. (Prerequisite: 64-550.)
Application of group theory to condensed matter physics: the study of point groups, Bravais lattices and space groups. Inverse lattice with applications to scattering phenomena.
Electric, magnetic and thermal properties of solids, superconductivity and superfluidity. The effects of imperfections and impurities in crystals. (Prerequisite: 64-560.)
Long-lived particles; basic interactions and antiparticles; conservation laws and C, P, T; pions and nucleons; magnetic moments; strange particles; leptons; resonances; SU(3) multplets of hadrons; Regge poles, SU(6), and quarks.
The principle of equivalence, general covariance. Riemann spacetime Einstein field equations.
Simple solutions to the Einstein field equations, the crucial experiments, applications to cosmology. (Prerequisite: 64-574.)
A selection of topics from the following: characteristic properties of stars, stellar atmospheres, models of stellar interiors, nuclear reactions in stars.
Definition of thin films and their classification; methods of preparation; elements of high-vacuum technology; thin-film formation, structure and methods of investigation; mechanical, optical, electrical properties of thin films and their application in modern technology.
Stimulated emission, rate equation approach to amplification and output power calculations; Gaussian beams, stable and unstable resonators; Q-switching, mode-locking and cavity-dumping; ruby, Nd:YAG and other solid state lasers; semi-conductor, gas and dye lasers.
Physics of the atmosphere, general description and layering, interactions of incoming and outgoing radiations, greenhouse effect, atmospheric thermodynamics and stability, cloud physics, atmospheric dynamics, gravity waves and turbulence, atmospheric photochemistry, ozone layer, upper atmosphere, plasma and hydromagnetic effects, ionospere, air glow and aurora.
Non-relativistic theory of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields. Review of matrix optics, electrostatic lenses, magnetic lenses, electrostatic and magnetic vector fields. Applications to energy and mass analysis. The Liouville Theorem and its consequences. Dense electron beams and applications.
In order to receive credit for this course, a student should attend the weekly departmental seminar throughout Ph.D. studies and present a minimum of two seminars on topics approved by the Seminar Coordinator.
These courses consist of two survey lecture series to be selected from among several which will be offered each year. Each lecture series lasts for approximately half a term. Credit may not be obtained for any survey courses in subjects in which the student has taken another graduate course.
Review of thermodynamics; information theory. The many-body problem in quantum mechanics, particle number representation. Statistical (density) matrix. The perfect gas, real gases, dense plasma, applications.
The theory of macroscopic quantum phenomena. (Prerequisite: 64- 630.)
Symmetries and conservation laws, group representations, and particle muliplets; Lie groups and algebras; generators and weights of SU(n); the quark model; quantum chromodynamics; electro-weak interaction theory; supersymmetry; path integrals and Feynman diagrams.
Variational principles and conservation laws and applications, field equations and their solutions. (Prerequisite: 64-551.)
Quantization of fields; scalar, vector, and spinor fields. Quantum electrodynamics and applications; renormalization and radiative corrections. (Prerequisite: 64-650.)
Crystal field theory in the weak and strong coupling schemes. Molecular orbitals; vibronic interactions. Electronic structure and spectra of molecular complexes. (Prerequisite: 64-551.)
Soderlund, Walter C.; B.A. (Connecticut), M.A., Ph.D. (Michigan)—1968. (Head of the Department)
Briggs, E. Donald; B.A. (New Brunswick), Ph.D. (London)—1963.
Wagenberg, Ronald H.; B.A., M.A. (Assumption), Ph.D. (London)—1964.
Brown-John, C. Lloyd; B.A. (British Columbia), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1968.
Keenleyside, Terence A.; B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (London)—1971.
Price, Richard G.; B.A. (Florida State), M.A. (Wayne State)—1969. (Dean of Student Affairs)
Burton, Bruce Edward; M.A. (Oxon.), M.Soc.Sc. (Hague)—1966.
Price, Trevor; B.Sc. (London School of Economics), M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Queen's)—1968.
Krause, Robert G.; B.A., M.A. (Windsor)—1970.
Kubota, Akira; B.A. (Tokyo), M.A., Ph.D. (Michigan)—1970.
Brooks, Stephen; B.A., M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (Carleton)—1985.
Boase, Joan P.; B.Sc. (Toronto), M.A., Ph.D. (York)—1988.
Pawley, Howard; B.A. (Winnipeg), LL.B. (Manitoba), Q.C., P.C.—1991.
The normal requirement for admission to the one-year M.A. program is an honours degree or combined honours degree in Political Science, or an honours degree in a related discipline, such as International Relations or Public Administration, with a strong, overall B average. Honours graduates in fields other than these will be considered on the basis of their academic background and standing. Those with less than an honours degree, or with minor deficiencies, will be required to take additional courses, or to enter a two-year program (see 1.3.3).
After receiving advising within the Department, the candidate may proceed toward the degree in one of the following programs of study. While initial selection is not irreversible, students may change from one program to another only with the approval of the Department and the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research.
(a)A minimum of four graduate courses plus a thesis on some research subject approved by the Department. The thesis will be written under the direction of a committee composed of two members of the Department plus a member external to the Department, but from within the University. An oral defense of the thesis will be required (see 1.6.2).
(b)Six graduate courses and a major paper on some research subject approved by the Department. The major paper will be written under the direction of a committee normally composed of two members of the Department. An oral defense of the major paper will be required.
All students in the I Master's (Qualifying) year of a two-year program must normally carry a full load of ten undergraduate courses or their equivalent.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year. Courses are normally two hours a week.
A review of the state of the discipline and a survey of approaches to research.
A review of important literature in Canadian politics and government. Readings may be selected from the areas of Canadian institutions, political behaviour and political culture.
Analysis of selected topics in Canadian politics and government. Topics may be selected from the institutional or behavioural areas of the discipline. Students will normally be expected to have taken 45-511 or its equivalent.
An examination of the principal government structures found in local governments and of the way in which contemporary urban pressures produce various kinds of political effects.
A review of the way in which local governments try to cope with contemporary urban problems through the development of their administrative organization. Administrative aspects will include financial, personnel and evaluative procedures.
An examination of the theoretical and empirical literature in the field of comparative politics.
An examination of particular theoretical questions in depth, of particular institutions or processes in comparative perspective, or of the politics of particular countries or groups of countries. Students will normally be expected to have taken 45-531 or its equivalent.
The contemporary practice of public administration within Canada, with comparisons where appropriate with other developed and developing political systems.
A review of the applicability of contemporary theories of public policy-making and policy analysis to the Canadian policy process.
A critical analysis of the development of political institutions in the context of rapid socio-economic change.
The comparative study of selected problems of political development such as integration, stability, or the impact of external forces with reference to particular national experiences.
An examination of the literature of twentieth century political theory with emphasis on the period since the Second World War.
A survey of recent literature on theories and methods in the study of international politics.
The in-depth analysis of selected methods in the study of international politics. Students will normally be expected to have taken 45-561 or its equivalent.
An introduction to the case study approach to the exploration of Canadian foreign policy, together with systematic analysis of selected major Canadian foreign policy decisions since the Second World War.
An examination of selected issues in Canadian foreign policy and of related contemporary research. Students will normally be expected to have taken 45-563 or its equivalent.
An examination of the theoretical literature on such topics as the foreign policy of third world states, nonstate actors, structural dependence, North-South conflict, and regional integration.
Topics of current interest selected by the Department which may vary from year to year. (May be repeated for credit with the permission of the Deparment Head.)
Intended for students with a special interest in and knowledge of areas not covered in sufficient depth by other courses. (To be taken only with the permission of the Department.)
Auld, Frank; B.A. (Drew), M.A., Ph.D. (Yale)—1970.
Rourke, Byron P.; B.A. (Windsor), M.A., Ph.D. (Fordham)—1965.
Holland, Cornelius J.; B.S. (St. Joseph's, Philadelphia), M.A. (Detroit), Ph.D. (Catholic U. of America)—1967.
Balance, William D.; B.A. (Birmingham Southern College), Ph.D. (Alabama)—1968.
Cohen, Jerome S.; B.A. (Michigan State), M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1968.
Schneider, Frank W.; B.A. (Ohio Wesleyan), M.S. (Ohio), Ph.D. (Florida)—1968.
Kobasigawa, Akira; B.A., M.A. (George Peabody College), Ph.D. (Iowa)—1969.
Minton, Henry L.; B.A. (New York), M.A. (Southern Illinois), Ph.D. (Pennsylvania State)—1970.
McCabe, Ann E.; B.Sc. (St. Norbert College), M.S. (Iowa State), Ph.D. (Wisconsin)—1973.
Page, Stewart; B.A., M.A. (Western Ontario), Ph.D. (Toronto)—1981.
Horvath, Theadore; B.A. (Waterloo Lutheran), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor)—1968.
Frisch, Giora Ron; B.A. (City College, N.Y.), Ph.D. (Tennessee)—1969.
Morf, Martin E.; B.A. (Acadia), M.A. (Dalhousie), Ph.D. (Western Ontario)—1969.
Orr, R. Robert; B.A. (Valparaiso), M.A., Ph.D. (Iowa)—1969. (Head of the Department)
Porter, James E.; B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Roosevelt), Ph.D. (Windsor)—1980. (Psychological Services Centre)
Voelker, Sylvia L.; B.A. (Indiana), M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1984.
Wong-Rieger, Durhane; B.A. (Barnard College), M.A., Ph.D. (McGill)—1984.
Thomas, Cheryl, D.; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Simon Fraser)—1987.
Towson, Shelagh, M.J.; B.A. (York), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Waterloo)—1987.
Kral, Michael J.; B.A. (Guelph), M.A., Ph.D. (California School of Professional Psychology)—1991.
Shore, Douglas L.; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1985.
Hakim-Larson, Julie A.; B.S. (Michigan State), M.S. (Eastern Michigan), Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1991.
Lafreniere, Kathryn D; B.A. (Windsor), M.A., Ph.D. (York)—1991.
Senn, Charlene Y.; B.Sc., M.Sc. (Calgary), Ph.D. (York)—1992.
Keillor, James; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State). Associate Professor—1970.
Berek, John; B.A. (Loyola), M.A., M.Ed. (Xavier), Ph.D. (Windsor). Associate Professor—1972.
Fellbaum, Anthony; B.A. (Laurentian), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1977.
Girash, Martin; B.Sc., M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Associate Professor—1977.
McDermott, William; B.A. (Holy Cross), M.A. (Temple), Ph.D. (Windsor). Associate Professor—1977.
Ross, William; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1977.
Fisk, John; B.A. (Western Ontario), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1979.
Adams, Kenneth; B.S., M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State). Professor—1981.
Avore, Joseph; B.Sc. (College of Holy Cross), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1983.
Dobson, Lois; A.B. (New York), B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1984.
Petrimoulx, Catherine; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1984.
Bacheyie, Godfrey; M.B., Ch.B. (Ghana). Assistant Professor—1985.
Cahill, Robert; A.B. (Detroit), M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State). Assistant Professor—1985.
Daignault, Maurice; B.A., M.A. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1985.
Strang, John; B.A. (York), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1985.
Broga, Mary; B.A. (Waterloo), M.A. Ph.D. (Western Ontario). Assistant Professor—1987.
Brooker, Harvey; B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Indiana). Assistant Professor—1987.
Lycaki, Helene; M.A. (Athens), M.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State). Assistant Professor—1987.
Shatz, Rhonna; B.A., D.O. (Michigan State). Assistant Professor—1990.
Bieliauskas, Linas; B.S. (Xavier), M.A., Ph.D. (Ohio). Associate Professor—1991.
Del Dotto, Jerel; B.A. (Augsburg College), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Associate Professor—1991.
DeLuca, John; B.A. (Detroit), M.A. (Michigan), Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1991.
Finlayson, Alan; B.A., M.A. (Waterloo Lutheran), Ph.D. (Windsor). Associate Professor—1991.
Ricciardi, Philip; B.A. (Concordia), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Associate Professor—1991.
Rudzinski, Donald; B.A. (Illinois), M.A. (Roosevelt), Ph.D. (Windsor). Associate Professor—1991.
Wolfe, Vicky; B.A. (Auburn), M.A. (Southern Illinois), Ph.D. (West Virginia). Assistant Professor—1993.
Burke, Brian; B.A., M.D. (Toronto). Assistant Professor—1994.
Symons, Sonya; B.Sc. (Dalhousie), M.A., Ph.D. (Western Ontario). Assistant Professor—1994.
Abrash, Donald; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1994.
Fuerst, Darren; B.A. (York), M.A., Ph.D. (Windsor). Assistant Professor—1994.
van der Vlugt, Harry; Ph.D. (Florida), M.D. (Leiden). Professor 1995.
All graduate students in the Department of Psychology are required to comply with the ethical principles, values, and standards contained in the "Canadian Code of Ethics for Psychologists", (1991) developed by the Canadian Psychological Association, the "Ethical Principles of Psychologists and Code of Conduct" (1992) developed by the American Psychological Association, and with current standards for research with human subjects adopted by the University of Windsor.
Failure of a student in the Deaprtment of Psychology to adhere to the principles, values, and standards defined above will constitute sufficient cause to warrantr dismissal from the graduate program in the Department of Psychology.
In addition to the general requirements listed in 1.5, the following requirements must be met by all students proceeding to the Ph.D. degree.
Applicants with an honours degree in Psychology or its equivalent and who have been judged to be outstanding students may be admitted directly into the Ph.D. program. In such cases, the first phase of the doctoral program involves the completion of the Master's degree requirements which must include a thesis. Further advancement in the doctoral program would depend on the quality of performance in fulfilling the requirements for the Master's degree. Students in the doctoral program who do not complete the Master's thesis in the first year will be permitted to take courses toward the doctoral degree for one additional year only until the thesis is completed. Applicants with an M.A. degree in Psychology from the University of Windsor or from another recognized university or college may be admitted to the Ph.D. program with advanced standing in course work.
Applicants will be assessed with respect to their academic qualifications, letters of recommendation, and career-related achievements. Possession of the minimum academic requirements does not ensure acceptance. The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is required of all students seeking admission to the Department of Psychology. The Department utilizes the GRE scores, Verbal, Quantitative, Analytical, and the Advanced Test in Psychology as supplementary information in conjunction with the primary criteria indicated above. Applications for admission must be completed by January 15.
1) Course Work: Students must complete successfully a minimum of twelve graduate courses after the honours B.A. or its equivalent. Requirements vary, however, according to areas of specialization. Up to six courses may be accepted for credit from another university. The course work includes a core curriculum involving a general statistical methodology course, a methodology course in the student's area of specialization, and courses in the biological bases of behaviour, the cognitive bases of behaviour, theories of social psychology, the historical and philosophical foundations of psychology, and ethical and professional issues in psychology. The minimum passing grade in graduate courses is "B-." A student who fails one course may repeat it once at the discretion of the Head of the Department and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. The student may not repeat more than one course. If a student has failed two courses, a recommendation will normally be made to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research that the student be required to withdraw from the program. Together with the above requirements, students in the areas of clinical psychology and applied social psychology must complete an internship. The clinical internship is approximately 2000 hours and the applied social internship is approximately 1000 hours.
2) Academic Advisor: Each student is assigned an academic advisor at the beginning of his or her first year of graduate studies.
3) Doctoral Committee: Research undertaken as part of a doctoral program is directed by a doctoral committee. The membership of the doctoral committee must be appointed by the Head of the Department and approved by the Executive Committee of the Faculty Council of Graduate Studies and Research. When the student is deemed ready to undertake such research, he or she proposes the name of a research advisor and, in consultation with the proposed advisor, the names of other members of the committee consisting of at least two other members of the Psychology Department and one extra-departmental member of faculty. For the defense of the dissertation, an external examiner will be selected by the doctoral committee, subject to the approval of the Department Head and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. The external examiner is from outside of the University of Windsor and is nationally or internationally recognized as having expertise in the area of psychology in which the candidate's research is carried out. The external examiner shall not participate in the direction of the research project, but will appraise the dissertation and ordinarily will be present at the final oral examination (see below 5b).
4) Dissertation: The principal requirement for the Ph.D. degree in Psychology is the presentation of a dissertation which embodies the results of an original investigation. The results so presented should constitute a significant and original contribution to knowledge.
5) Examinations: In addition to examinations in courses, the student must meet the following requirements:
(a)Comprehensive Examination: After completion of all course requirements (with the exception of internship courses), the student must pass a comprehensive examination in his or her area of specialization. Successful completion of the examination admits the student to candidacy for the Ph.D. degree. If a student fails the comprehensive examination, he or she may retake the examination once only at the discretion of the Head of the Department and the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research.
(b)Final Examination: Each candidate will, on the recommendation of his or her doctoral committee, submit to a final oral examination in defense of the dissertation.
Applicants with an honours degree in Psychology or its equivalent may be admitted into a one-year (minimum) M.A. program, although most students are admitted directly into the doctoral program. Because of the requirements of specific programs, the length of time necessary for students with an honours B.A. to complete the M.A. requirements may be two years.
Applicants will be assessed with respect to their academic qualification, letters of recommendation, and career-related achievements. Possession of the minimum academic requirements does not ensure acceptance. The Graduate Record Examination (GRE) is required of all students seeking admission to the Department of Psychology. The Department utilizes the GRE scores, Verbal, Quantitative, Analytical, and the Advanced Test in Psychology, as supplementary information in conjunction with the primary criteria indicated above. Applications for admission must be completed by January 15.
After receiving advising within the Department, the candidate may proceed toward the degree by completing at least four and not more than six graduate credit courses, two of which may be in a cognate field, and a thesis.
Note: A thesis is required in the first phase of the doctoral program (see 26.2.1).
The Department of Psychology offers a postdoctoral certification in Adult Clinical Psychology. (Note that the Department does not offer postdoctoral certification programs in Child Clinical Psychology or in Clinical Neuropsychology.) The Postdoctoral Certification Program in Adult Clinical Psychology is designed for psychologists who: a) hold a Doctor of Philosophy degree in Psychology in areas other than clinical psychology; b) have had a minimum of three years of postdoctoral experience; and c) wish to retrain as clinical practitioners.
A committee of three faculty members (including the Adult Clinical Coordinator and the Postdoctoral Certification Program Coordinator) will constitute the admissions committee. Inquiries and requests for application forms should be addressed as follows: Postdoctoral Certification Program Coordinator, Department of Psychology, University of Windsor, Windsor, Ontario N9B 3P4.
The following courses are required and will be used by the advisory committee as the basis for designing the trainee's program:
46-580.Psychopathology
46-581.Ethical and Professional Issues in Psychology
46-582.Clinical Assessment I
46-583.Clinical Assessment II
46-584.Clinical Practice
46-585.Advanced Clinical Practice
46-680.Introduction to Psychotherapy
and four additional courses in psychotherapy (i.e., two two-term course sequences).
In addition to required courses, the Postdoctoral Certification Program requires completion of a 2000-hour clinical internship and the Clinical Proficiency Examinations. Trainees should not expect to complete the program in less than two to three years.
The advisory committee will be composed of three faculty members, including the Adult Clinical Coordinator. The committee will evaluate the specific needs of the trainee and modify the program as necessary to meet individual training needs. The advisory committee is also responsible for guiding the trainee through the program, evaluating the trainee's progress, determining the timing for the Clinical Proficiency Examination, and, ultimately, verifying that the trainee has successfully completed the certification program.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year. Some courses are restricted to students in the Clinical Program.
The origin of modern psychology as a science and profession and the philosophy of science underlying psychology. (2 hours a week.)
Basic brain/behaviour relationships are explored in the context of neuro-anatomical and neurotransmitter systems. Traditional theories of brain function are reviewed and current brain modelling techniques are introduced. Individual student presentations or projects based on reviews of specialized brain systems are required. (2 hours a week.)
An examination of the ethological/sociobiological theoretical perspective and related methodological approaches as these are applied to human behaviour. (2 hours a week.)
Systems and methodologies in areas such as attention, perception, learning, memory and thinking. (2 hours a week.)
A review of descriptive statistics, normal distribution, probability, sampling distributions, hypothesis testing, t-tests, and chi-square tests. Nonparametric tests, ANOVA, multiple comparisons, repeated measures ANOVA, correlation and univariate regression, with an emphasis on inferential decision making and mainframe and personal computer data analysis. (3 hours a week.)
Comprehensive examination of multiple regression and the general linear model. Introduction to matrix algebra. Selected topics from the following: multivariate analysis of variance and discriminant function analysis, factor analysis and principle components analysis, logistic regression and log-linear models, multidimensional scaling and cluster analysis. Mainframe and personal computer analysis of multivariate data. (Prerequisite 46-512 or equivalent.) (3 hours a week.)
Review of research values and issues in clinical psychology; survey and evaluation of common research designs and strategies in psychopathology, personality, and psychotherapy. (Prerequisite: 46-510.) (3 hours a week.)
An introduction to the philosophy of science and a review of methodology in research in child behaviour and human development. (Prerequisite: 46-510.) (2 hours a week.)
Topics will typically include quasi-experimental design, causal inferences from correlations, analysis of covariance, measurement problems and other quantitative methods used in applied research. (Prerequisite: 46-512.) (2 hours a week.)
An examination of theory, methods, and inference related to qualitative methodologies. Approaches to be covered include topics such as interviewing, case studies, ethnography, semiotics, narrative inquiry, discourse analysis, archival research, projective techniques, and hermeneutics. (2 hours a week.)
Selected topics in current theoretical descriptions of operant and Pavlovian conditioning in infrahuman organisms together with experimental findings. (2 hours a week.) (Students who wish to pursue in a laboratory setting some of the questions raised in the seminar should also register for 46-604 either concurrently or sequentially.)
Structure and function of the central nervous system. Selective study of neurosciences related to arousal, motivation, and cognition. (3 hours a week, combined laboratory and lectures.)
An in-depth study of selected neuro-anatomical and biochemical systems. (Prerequisites: 46-336, 46-337, or equivalent.) (2 lecture, 2 laboratory hours a week.)
A critical survey of research findings in neuropathology, emphasizing the diagnostic significance of such data. (Prerequisite: 46-529.) (2 hours a week.)
A review of research and theory in the area of infancy with particular emphasis on the psychological aspects of normal and delayed development. (2 hours a week.)
Review and comparison of major theoretical positions in child psychology and a consideration of important research generated from these theories. (2 hours a week.)
An introduction to theory and research in cognitive development. (2 hours a week.)
An overview of contemporary theories of emotion and motivation with emphasis on various phases of the life span. (2 hours a week.)
An examination of theories of the socialization process and research findings concerning social development in children. (2 hours a week.)
A review of current theories and research in the area of children's language acquisition and use. (2 hours a week.)
A survey of research and theory in children's learning, memory, and problem solving. (2 hours a week.)
An overview of hereditary and acquired characteristics (e.g., personality, intelligence, health-related behaviours, pathology) within the family context involving parent, child, and grandchild across the generations. Implications for applied work with families will be addressed. (2 hours a week.)
The evaluation of applied problems through the application of research and theory related to developmental psychology. (2 hours a week.)
A survey of current research and theory concerning development across the life span with particular emphasis on middle and old age. (2 hours a week.)
An examination of psychological problems of aging. The course will include such topics as: psychosocial assessment (clinical, functional, behavioural and environmental); mental health counselling (group and family therapy); support systems; and family dynamics. (2 hours a week.)
A survey of theory and research in experimental social psychology, with an emphasis on experimental research methods. Topics will be chosen from substantive areas such as impression formation, interpersonal attraction, attitude formation and change, conformity, aggression, altruism, intergroup relations, and personality and social behaviour. (2 hours a week.)
A critical analysis of such theories as attribution, cognitive consistency, systems, equity, social learning, and psychoanalysis. (2 hours a week.)
An examination of theory, research, and analytical methods appropriate to the planning, design, implementation, and utilization of program evaluation in educational, social and other organizational settings. Students will apply program evaluation techniques in applied settings. (2 hours a week.)
A survey of theory and related research in personality. Topics will be chosen from particular theoretical approaches such as psychoanalysis, phenomenology, and behaviourism, and related substantive areas such as personality measurement, development, structure, and dynamics. (2 hours a week.)
A survey of psychological research and theoretical approaches to the study of women past and present. The course will focus on one topic within the field in considerable detail (e.g., violence against women, women and "mental health"), or will cover feminist research and theory in psychology more generally, using a number of topics as exemplars. (2 hours a week.).
Survey of issues, diagnostic categories, etiological perspectives, and research in psychopathology. Emphasisis is on adult psychopathology, but the course includes an introduction to childhood disorders. (3 hours a week.)
Ethics and standards of psychological practice and research are reviewed. Legislation, privileged communication, confidentiality, informed consent, private practice, patient rights and sexism are among the topics discussed. (3 hours a week.)
Assessment of mental status and intelligence; evaluation of the clinical utility and psychometric properties of standardized intelligence tests. Focus is on assessment of older adolescents and adults. Students practice administration, scoring, and interpretation of tests, and develop basic report writing skills. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (3 seminar, 3 laboratory/practicum hours a week.)
Assessment of personality and psychopathology; evaluation of the clinical utility and psychometric properties of major personality instruments. Focus is on assessment of older adolescents and adults. Students build on skills developed in 46-582 and practice administration, scoring, and interpretation of tests, case formulation, and report writing. (Prerequisite: 46-582.) (3 seminar, 3 laboratory/practicum hours a week.)
Further exploration of assessment issues such as: the interview process, rationale for assessment, test selection, report writing, recent developments in assessment, and professional issues. (Corequisite or prerequisite: 46-583.) (3 hours a week.)
Provides opportunities for students to develop and discuss comprehensive clinical presentations based on case samples. Emphasis is on understanding how psychopathology impacts on the assessment process and on treatment selection. (Prerequisite: 46-584.) (3 hours a week.)
(2 hours a week.)
(2 hours a week.)
(2 hours a week.)
A survey of the literature dealing with brain-behaviour relationships in children. Topics emphasized include the following: the effect of brain dysfunction on perception, learning, memory, language and thinking; learning disabilities; mental subnormality. (Prerequisites: 46-336 and 46-337, or equivalent.) (2 hours a week.)
An examination of neuropsychological tests currently in use for the assessment of brain-behaviour relationships in children. Topics emphasized include the following: strategies and techniques of assessment; rationales underlying the use of various measures; modes of interpretation; approaches to habilitation and rehabilitation. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (Prerequisites: 46-336 and 46-337, or equivalent.) (2 hours a week.)
A survey of the literature dealing with brain-behaviour relationships in adults. Topics emphasized include the following: the effect of brain dysfunction on perception, learning, and thinking, memory disorders; personality disorders associated with cerebral dysfunction. (Prerequisites: 46-336 and 46-337, or equivalent.) (2 hours a week.)
An examination of neuropsychological test batteries currently in use for the assessment of brain-behaviour relationships in adults. Topics emphasized include the following: strategies and techniques of assessment; rationales underlying the use of various measures; modes of interpretation; approaches to rehabilitation. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (Prerequisite: 46-642.) (2 hours a week.)
An examination of neuropsychological approaches to the understanding, assessment and treatment of reading, spelling, arithmetic and social learning disabilities in children and adults. (Prerequisites: 46-336 and 46-337, or equivalent.) (2 hours a week.)
A study of the literature and the methods currently employed in the treatment of brain-injured adults. Topics to be stressed include epidemiology and societal impact, pathophysiology, clinical presentation and both the theories and practices of rehabilitation. (2 hours a week.)
An examination of neurological, genetic, and other medical/developmental issues in infancy and early childhood. (2 hours a week.)
A consideration of aspects of intellectual exceptionality with emphasis on giftedness and developmental deficiency. (2 hours a week.)
A survey of the literature dealing with brain-behaviour relationships across the older adult life span. Emphasis is given to the understanding and assessment of normal and dysfunctional aspects of cognitive and affective development in adulthood and aging. (2 hours a week.)
A survey of the literature dealing with child psychopathology. Current theory and research and their implications for clinical practice. (2 hours a week.)
Introduction to psychotherapy with children with an emphasis on fundamental principles and empirical foundations of effective psychotherapy. Several treatment approaches are studied. (Prerequisite: 46-650.) (2 hours a week.)
Investigation of the construction, selection, evaluation and use of ability tests. Practicum in assessment of children's intelligence and achievement. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (Prerequisite: 46-582 or consent of instructor.) (2 lecture hours a week, plus laboratory and practicum.)
Investigation of the construction, selection, evaluation, and use of tests designed for the assessment of children's personality and behavior. Practicum in administration, interpretation, and communication of results of comprehensive test batteries. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (Prerequisites: 46-583 and 46-652.) (2 lecture hours a week, plus laboratory and practicum.)
A survey of approaches to psychotherapy with children, including supervised clinical work in psychotherapy with children and their families. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (Prerequisite: 46-680.) (2 lecture, 2 practicum hours a week.)
An application of several models of psychotherapy with children and their families, including supervised clinical work. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (Prerequisite: 46-654.) (2 practicum hours a week.)
This course covers topics of individual and group differneces as related to work, job analysis and evaluation, personnel selection (including employment testing and interviewing), performance appraisal, training and development, environment and safety. The course examines theories, research, and case studies of real-world problems. (2 hours a week.)
The social psychology of behaviour in organizations. Topics include models for conceptualizing organizations and identifying problems and methods for analyzing and solving problems in areas such as motivation, leadership, satisfaction and communication. (3 hours a week.)
The organization development approach: the consultant and organizational change; consultation techniques (survey feedback, team building, experiential groups); participative management and leadership style. (3 hours a week.)
A survey of theory and research in applied social psychology, with an emphasis on applied research methods. Topics will be chosen from substantive areas such as organizational, health and community psychology, and areas of application such as social change issues, business, education, environment and law. (2 hours a week.)
Investigation of the development, selection, administration, scoring, and integration of a variety of ability, aptitude, intelligence, achievement, personality, interest, and other tests used in educational, human service, industrial, and other organizational settings. (Prerequisite: 46-511 or equivalent.) (4 hours a week, combined lecture and laboratory.)
Theory, research and practice in community psychology from clinical and social psychological perspectives. A variety of topics will be selected from a range of cultural studies and interpretative sources. (2 hours a week.)
An overview of health psychology, with emphasis on contributions made by psychology to the areas of health promotion, prevention and treatment of illness, modification of unhealthy behaviours, and improvement of health delivery. Application of the biopsychological model to health-related research and practice will be examined. (2 hours a week.)
Comparative analysis of major contemporary models of psychotherapy with an emphasis on psychodynamic, behavioural, and experiential traditions. The practicum portion of the course focuses on the development of basic interviewing and therapeutic relationship skilles. (Limited to Clinical Program students.) (3 seminar, 3 laboratory/practicum hours a week.)
Therapy courses consist of courses numbered 46-679 through 46-697 as listed below. Enrolment in the Clinical Program, 46-678, and consent of the instructor are prerequisites for all therapy courses.
Therapy courses are taught over two terms. Seminars involve readings, discussion, and presentations on the theory, relevant research, techniques, and processes that are specific to the therapeutic approach under consideration. Practica involve supervised experience appropriate to the therapeutic modality.
At least three different therapy course sequences will be offered in each academic year, but offerings will vary from year to year depending upon demand and the availability of qualified instructors.
All therapy courses consist of two seminar hours a week, plus two to four hours of practicum a week.
Theory and practice of time-limited psychotherapy and crisis intervention. Lectures, reviews of major dynamic schools and role playing. (Prerequisite: at lesat one two-term therapy course sequence.)
Supervised practicum in time-limited psychotherapy and crisis intervention. Clinical Students will carry two therapy clients at any given time under supervision (Prerequisite: 46-679.)
An examination of the theory, research, and practice of learning based behaviour change strategies. The emphasis will be on respondent and operant-based procedures, and will includie social learning.
STudents will have the opportunity to apply behavioural techniques and change processes to selected clients. Emphasis will be placed on behavioural assessment and the systematic remediation of clinical problems through the application of respondent and operant techniques. (Prerequisite: 46-681.)
Continuation of 46-683.
Continuation of 46-685.
Continuation of 46-687.
Continuation of 46-690.
Continuation of 46-692.
An examination of the theory, research, and practice of process-experiential therapy. This approach combines process directive interventions with the person-centred relationship conditions to facilitate client's resolution of specific cognitive-affective problems in therapy. The application of process-experiential techniques in brief psychotherapy and in the treatment of various disorders will be emphasized.
Students will have the opportunity to apply the techniques and interventions of process-experiential therapy in a supervised clinical practicum. The identification and formulation of process diagnoses within the session, the implementation of relevant interventions, as well as the formation and maintenance of a positive working alliance will be stressed. (Prerequisite: 46-694.)
Presentation, discussion, and practice of a humanistic/experiential model of psychotherapy which integrates client-centred, gestalt, and existential perspectives. Focus is placed on the humanistic/experiential understanding of human functioning, human change processes, and the role of psychotherapy and of the therapist in supporting change.
The humanistic/experiential approach will be applied to particular syndromes, situations, and populations in a supervised practicum. Focuas will be placed on therapist experience and understanding of issues relevant to childhood abuse, spirituality, substance abuse, vicarious traumatization, gender, and race. (Prerequisite: 46-696.)
Lectures, readings, and supervised clinical work in psychotherapy at an advanced and specialized level, with an emphasis on relating types of psychopathology and modes of psychotherapy. (Prerequisites: at least one two-term therapy course sequence and consent of the instructor.)
Under this course number, advanced clinical students are permitted to carry one or two therapy cases under the close supervision of a clinical faculty member or associate. (Students may register in 46-699 for more than one term.) (Prerequisite: 46-698.)
Supervised experience in an approved clinical setting with a focus on the development of skills related to interviewing, use of clinical assessment instruments, case formulation, and report writing. (Prerequisites: 46-582, 46-583, and consent of the Director of Clinical Training.) (500 hours minimum of supervised practicum.)
Supervised experience in an approved clinical setting with a focus on the development of basic clinical skills in preparation for practice and/or research. (Prerequisite: consent of the Director of Clinical Training.) (100 hours minimum of supervised practicum.)
Supervised experience in an approved clinical setting with a focus on the development of basic clinical skills in preparation for practice or research. (Prerequisite: consent of the Director of Clinical Training.) (100 hours minimum of supervised practicum.)
A one-year, half-time internship in an approved clinical setting. (Prerequisites: completion of M.A. requirements and consent of the Director of Clinical Training.) (1000 hours of supervised internship.)
A one-year, half-time internship in an approved clinical setting. (Prerequisites: 46-704, completion of all required courses except 46-742 and 46-798, and consent of the Director of Clinincal Training.) (1000 hours of supervised internship.)
Advanced clinical students may apply for the Clinical Supervision Traineeship at the on-campus Psychological Service Centre (PSC). The traineeship involves seminars, supervised practice, and directed readings intended to prepare the trainee for future clinical supervision roles. (Prerequisites: 46-704 and 46-705, or 46-706, and consent of the Director of Clinical Training and the PSC Training Coordinator.)
(250 hours of supervised practice.)
(250 hours of supervised practice.)
(250 hours of supervised internship.)
(250 hours of supervised internship.)
(250 hours of supervised internship.)
(250 hours of supervised internship.)
Preparation through independent study for the written Comprehensive Examination. Students may register in 46-741 for a maximum of three consecutive terms. (Prerequisite: completion of M.A. requirements.)
Preparation through independent study for written and oral Clinical Proficiency Examinations. Students may register in 46-742 for a maximum of three consecutive terms. (Prerequisites: 46-704 and 46-705, or 46-706.)
King, J. Norman; B.A., M.A. (Toronto), S.T.B. (Laval), Ph.D. (U. of St. Michael's College, Toronto)—1964. (Head of the Department)
Mehta, Mahesh; B.A., M.A., LL.B., Ph.D. (Bombay)—1969.
Amore, Roy C.; B.A. (Ohio), B.D. (Drew), Ph.D. (Columbia)—1970.
Whitney, Barry L.; B.A. (Carleton), Ph.D. (McMaster)—1976.
Lage, Dietmar; B.A. (Manitoba), M.A., Ph.D. (McGill)—1983.
Muldoon, Maureen H.; B.A. (Queen's), M.A., Ph.D. (U. of St. Michael's College, Toronto)—1986.
Sly, Dorothy I.; B.A., B. Paed., M.A. (Manitoba), Ph.D. (McMaster)—1989.
In addition to the general requirements and stipulations set out in 1.6.2, the requirements listed below must be met by all candidates.
1) Candidates may proceed toward the degree in one of the following programs of study:
(a) four graduate courses plus a thesis;
(b)six graduate courses plus a major paper upon which there shall be an examination;
(c)eight graduate courses.
Graduate courses may be taken more than once providing that the course content is different, and permission is given by both the Department Head and the professor offering the course.
2) Language Requirement: Reading knowledge of either French or German is required. Special arrangements, however, may be required for students concentrating in specific areas, e.g., biblical studies. In such cases the languages shall be chosen in consultation with the Head of the Department.
3) Part-time Students: All part-time students should complete their work within four consecutive years after admission to the Candidate year of the M.A. program. Extensions for serious reasons may be granted by request.
4) Cognate Fields: Candidates may take up to two of their required courses in a cognate field with departmental approval.
Taylor, Patricia Ann; B.A. (Assumption), B.S.W., M.S.W. (Toronto)—1968.
Kroeker, Bernhard J.; B.Ed. (Alberta), B.S.W., M.S.W. (Toronto)—1969.
Holosko, Michael J.; B.A. (York), M.S.W. (Toronto), Ph.D (Pittsburgh)—1985.
Chandler, Robert G.; B.A., B.S.W., M.S.W. (Toronto)—1968.
Hansen, Forrest C.; B.A. (Alberta), B.S.W., M.S.W., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1971.
Cassano, D. Rosemary; B.A., B.S.W., M.S.W., Ph.D. (Toronto), C.S.W.—1979.
Smith, Eve P.; B.A. (Bard College), D.S.W. (Yeshiva)—1989.
Assumption High School
F. J. Brennan High School
Canadian Mental Health Association
Catholic Central Secondary School
Children's Aid Society of Essex County
Essex County Separate School Board
Family Services Windsor
Glengarda Child & Family Services
Grace Hospital
Hiatus House
Holy Name of Mary Church
Holy Names Secondary School
Hospice of Windsor
Maryvale
Ministry of Community Health & Support Services
Regional Children's Centre
Roman Catholic Children's Aid Society
Sandwich Community Health Centre
Sexual Assault Crisis Centre
St. Annes's High School
St. Michael's Alternative School
The Child's Place
Well-Come Centre
Windsor Board of Education
Windsor Group Therapy
Windsor Roman Catholic School Board
Windsor Western Hospital
Detroit American Indian Health Center
Harper Hospital
Henry Ford Hospital
Henry Ford Maplegrove Youth Treatment Center
Hospice of Southeastern Michigan
Kirkwood Mental Health Center
New Center Community Mental Health
Northeast Guidance Clinic
Renaissance West Community Mental Health
Wayne County Children's Center
William Beaumont Hospital
Children's Aid Society of Kent County
Children's Aid Society of London/Middlesex
Children's Aid Society of Sarnia/Lambton
Community Outreach Centre, Wallaceburg
CPRI, London
Family Counselling Centre, Sarnia
Family Services, Kent
Lambton County Separate School Board
Lester B. Pearson Centre
London Regional Cancer Centre
Ministry of Community & Social Services, Regional Office
Public General Hospital Mental Health Clinic, Chatham
St. Joseph's Family Medical Centre of London
St. Joseph's Hospital, Chatham
University Hospital, London
Victoria Hospital, London
The Master of Social Work degree, which is accredited by the Canadian Association of Schools of Social Work, has been designed to provide graduate education in a specialization. The School offers full- and part-time programs. Graduates of this program are expected to be able to provide leadership in the area of specialization. The student has the opportunity to concentrate in intervention, or administration in child and family services.
The School has established a Graduate Studies Committee to oversee the graduate program. In addition, the Coordinator of Graduate Studies is the faculty advisor for each student.
1) Applicants to the one-year and part-time Master of Social Work program must apply for admission by February 1. Applicants to the two-year Master's program described in 2 below must apply by December 31.
2) Persons with a B.A. (or equivalent) degree are not eligible for admission to the Master's program. However, a limited number of students with records of outstanding academic achievement (minimum cumulative average of A- or G.P.A. 11) in a B.A. (Hons.) program may be considered for a two-year M.S.W. program. The first year will be made up of a full year of undergraduate courses over Intersession and Summer Session, and the following Fall and Winter terms. Students who complete the first year with a cumulative average of B+ (G.P.A. 10) or better will be able to proceed to the second year of the two-year M.S.W. program.
3) Otherwise, an applicant to the Master of Social Work program must have:
(a)satisfactorily completed a B.S.W. program or have equivalent standing from another university;
(b)maintained a general average of at least B- (G.P.A. 8.0) in the final year of undergraduate work;
(c)submitted an outline of their educational and career objectives that will serve to give direction to particular studies within the area of specialization chosen by the student.
4) One undergraduate course in statistics is a prerequisite.
5) Applicants may be admitted to the full-time or to the part-time program. The part-time program is intended for B.S.W. graduates who are employed in the field of social welfare. Please contact the Coordinator of Admissions at the School of Social Work for the regulations pertaining to the part-time program. Admissions to the part-time program will take place every other year.
Unless otherwise stated, the general regulations of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research will apply to students in the Master of Social Work program.
1) Students proceed to the M.S.W. degree by following one of these programs:
(a)a total of nine courses, plus 47-595 Research Project;
(b)a total of eight courses, plus 47-797 Thesis.
2) The following courses are required of all students:
47-505.The Analysis of Policies for Families and Children
47-507.Research I
47-508.Research II
47-593.Practicum (2 credits)
3) Students are further required to choose one of the following two concentrations:
47-503.Intervention I and
47-504.Intervention II
47-518.Social Work Administration I and
47-519.Social Work Administration II
4) Other courses may be taken outside of the School with the approval of the Graduate Studies Committee.
5) The following Social Work elective courses may not be offered every year:
47-511.Intervention with Children
47-513.Intervention in Mental Health Settings
47-514.Intervention in Medical Settings
47-515.Intervention in Human Justice and Correctional Settings
47-517.Evaluative Research in Social Work
47-557.Social Work in the Health Services
47-558.Social Work in Human Justice and Corrections
47-560.Supervision and Field Instruction
47-561.Social Work with Individuals
47-563.Social Work with Small Groups
47-564.Community Practice in Social Work
47-565 Independent Studies
6) Length of Program: This program is designed to occupy a minimum of one calendar year beginning with the Fall term and continuing through the following Winter term, Intersession, and Summer Session. Work will be scheduled in anticipation of graduation at the Fall Convocation.
The part-time M.S.W. Program is limited to persons with a B.S.W. (Hons.) presently employed in the social service field.
1) Students proceed to the M.S.W. degree by following one of these programs:
(a)a total of ten courses;
(b)a total of eight courses plus 47-797 Thesis.
2) The following courses are required of all students:
47-505.The Analysis of Policies for Families and Children
47-507.Research I
47-508.Research II
47-593.Practicum (2 credits)
3) Students are further required to choose one of the following two concentrations:
47-503.Intervention I and
47-504.Intervention II
47-518.Social Work Administration I and
47-519.Social Work Administration II
4) Other courses may be taken outside of the School with the approval of the Graduate Studies Committee.
5) The following Social Work elective courses may not be offered each year:
47-511.Intervention with Children
47-513.Intervention in Mental Health Settings
47-514.Intervention in Medical Settings
47-515.Intervention in Human Justice and Correctional Settings
47-517.Evaluative Research in Social Work
47-557.Social Work in the Health Services
47-558.Social Work in Human Justice and Corrections
47-560.Supervision and Field Instruction
47-561.Social Work with Individuals
47-563.Social Work with Small Groups
47-564.Community Practice in Social Work
47-565.Independent Studies
6) Length of Program: Students will be able to complete the program in two to two and one-half calendar years. A practicum is required of all students during the Fall term of the second year of the program. Students must be available on a full-time basis for this term only. Work will be scheduled in anticipation of graduation at the Fall Convocation two years after admission to the part-time program.
All courses listed below will not necessarily be offered every year. All courses are three hours a week unless otherwise noted.
Selected theories and practice modalities applicable to social work with families and children are examined. The student will be expected to develop expertise in the analysis of problems presented by families, the development of interventive strategies and the evaluation of outcomes of service to families.
Examines differential practice modalities and theoretical concepts related to the family and children as the units of study and treatment. Tapes and records from practice will be analyzed. (Prerequisite: 47-503.)
This course analyzes the needs and problems of families, children, women and men in Canada. Policy responses will be examnined via a variety of analytic frameworks. The issues of gender, class, multiculturalism, multiracialism, and aboriginal peoples cut across the course content.
Provides students with an overview of research issues and methods appropriate for social work. Focuses on exposing students to a variety of research designs, methodologies and strategies, including qualitative and quantitative approaches. The content is oriented toward enabling students to write a research proposal.
Builds upon Research I and is required for all students. Topics (at an advanced level) include data collection strategies and techniques, measurement, instrumentation, data reduction, data analyses, statistics and computer use. (Prerequisite: 47-507.)
Intervention with children calls for a special set of therapeutic modalities and techniques. The student will be required to analyze, evaluate, develop interventive strategies, and evaluate outcome in practice with children.
Focuses upon social work intervention in psychiatric settings, such as clinics, hospitals, after-care programs and rehabilitation services for the patient and the family. The student will be expected to develop expertise in assessment of needs for service, developing therapeutic strategies and the evaluation of service outcomes.
Social work intervention in hospital settings and interdisciplinary practice with a treatment team are analyzed. The versatility of a social worker in a medical setting in collaboration with outside community resources, rehabilitation, clinical and aftercare services are examined.
Intervention in settings such as courts, jails, diversion programs and after-care services related to the offender and the family is analyzed and evaluated in this course. Strategies for effecting change in organization and social work with habitual offenders and juveniles are part of this course.
Designed to enable students to learn how to evaluate both clinical practice and also the effectiveness and efficiency of social programs. Topics will include: issues involved in conducting evaluation research; the processes of evaluation; the practice realities of evaluation; the organizational context of evaluation; clinical vs. statistical significance; efficiency vs. effectiveness; and the outcomes of evaluative research efforts.
This course analyzes the organization and administrative theories and context of how human service organizations (HSOs) function in the age of economic restraint. Students are expected to apply theories related to central processes and problems in HSOs, namely: accountability, ethics, service delivery, decision making, interorganizationalrelations, power and control, and communication.
This course is taught in a sequential learning module format and is designed for Administration concentration students. It teaches the advanced practice skills necessary for managing HSOs. These include minimally: financial management, human service development, program development and planning, and policy analysis. Students will be expected to integrate their classroom knowledge concurrently with their practicum placements throughout the term. (Prerequisite: 47-518.)
Provides the student with a foundation for advanced study in the field of health services. The health needs of individuals, families and communities will be assessed as a base for examining the current interventive modalities, issues in the delivery of health services and means of practice and service evaluation.
Provides the student with a foundation for advanced study of the criminal justice system, correctional services and the roles of social workers in justice and corrections. Special attention will be paid to current practices in the field.
Critical analysis of the purpose and functions of professional field instruction. Various types of recording will be examined for their learning potential and utility. Assessment of student learning patterns, attitudes and potentials will be the focus for introspective and interactional skill learning. Concepts of authority, accountability, and autonomy in learning will be emphasized.
Examines in depth selected theories of social work practice with individuals as a process for the restoration, maintenance or enhancement of individuals' social functioning. Emphasis will be upon the basic theories and the practice theories which underlie social work practice with individuals which is differentiated from psychotherapy with individuals. Theoretical materials will be related to practice situations through the use of audiovisual aids and case records.
Examines in depth theories of social work practice with small groups. Theoretical materials will be related to practice situations through the use of audiovisual aids and case records.
Examines in depth theories and models of community practice in social work, with a strong emphasis on social processes of assessment, designing intervention strategies and measuring outcomes.
This course is intended to permit students with special interests in particular areas of social work not covered in sufficient depth in other courses to pursue those interests through independent supervised study. With prior approval of a faculty member the student will undertake an original paper which would enhance his or her program of study.
An individually planned practicum appropriate to the student's area of concentration is arranged for each student to test, refine and expand social work knowledge and skills. (Offered on a Pass/Non-Pass basis.)
Full-time students: The Practicum is offered two days per week over the Fall and Winter terms for a total of approximately 400 hours.
Part-time students: The Practicum is offered four days per week over one term for a total of approximately 400 hours.
The Research Project consists of the systematic investigation of a topic related to the student's area of concentration. The project is less extensive than a thesis, but requires a review and analysis of existing knowledge pertaining to the student's chosen topic and a data analysis appropriate to the research design which may or may not involve the collection of original data. The project culminates in a written report reflecting scholarly attainment. The project and the report must be completed to the satisfaction of the committee approved for the supervision of the student's project work.
A research project undertaken by the candidate which is directed and supervised by a Master's committee. The thesis will serve to integrate a knowledge of research methods with the student's area of the specialization and concentration, in order to encourage the extension of knowledge and understanding in the specialization. (2 credits.)
Whitehurst, Robert N.; B.A. (Butler), M.S., Ph.D. (Purdue)—1969.
Dietz, Mary L.; M.A. (Michigan State), B.A., Ph.D. (Wayne State)—1968. (Head of the Department)
Pradhan, Mahesh Chandra; B.A. (Agra), M.A., LLB. (Lucknow), Ph.D. (London)—1970.
Ramcharan, Subhas; B.A., M.Sc. (West Indies); Ph.D. (York)—1971.
Adam, Barry D.; B.A. (Simon Fraser), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1976.
Signorile, Vito; B.A., M.A. (Catholic), Ph.D. (Maryland)—1969.
Shuraydi, Muhammad; B.A. (American U. of Beirut), Ph.D. (Alberta)—1973.
Ehrentraut, Adolf W.; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1976.
Hedley, Max J.; B.A. (York, England), M.A., Ph.D. (Alberta)—1976.
Drakich, Janice; B.A., M.A. (Windsor), Ph.D. (York)—1989.
Fleming, Thomas S.; B.A., M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (London) - 1988.
Basok, Tanya; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (York)—1989.
Phillips, Lynne; B.A. (British Columbia), M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1989.
Gannagé, Charlene; B.A., M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto)—1992.
Sears, Alan; B.A., M.A. (Carleton), Ph.D. (Warwick)—1992.
Maticka-Tyndale, Eleanor; B.A. (State U. of New York, Binghamton), M.A. (McGill), Ph.D. (Calgary)—1993.
At the graduate level students in the Department of Sociology and Anthropology will be expected to specialize in one of six areas: Comparative Development; Work; Race and Ethnic Relations; Family, Sex and Gender; Criminology; or Social Psychology.
1) Applicants with an honours degree in Sociology or a related field may be admitted into a minimum one-year Master's program provided they have an adequate background in social theory and methodology. Students will be expected to comply with the general University requirements for the Master's degree (see 1.6.2).
2) Applicants with a general degree in Sociology or a related discipline may be admitted into a two-year Master's program. Besides meeting all the requirements of the minimum one-year Master's program in their second or further years, students will be expected to comply with the general University requirements (see 1.6.2).
Course selections and course changes must be made in consultation with a faculty advisor designated by the area committee in which the student is planning to specialize, and receive the approval of the Graduate Affairs Committee.
1) Students in a minimum one-year program will proceed toward the degree by completing six courses with at least a B average, among which at least two courses must be taken from one of the following course sequences: 48-515 to 48-555, 48-560 to 48-563, or 48-570 to 48-575. Also required are 48-500, 48-505, and 48-590, plus a thesis on a research subject approved by the Department and an oral defense of the thesis.
2) Students in the two-year program are required to take the following courses in their first year: 48-401 or 48-402, 48-416, two courses in the 48-403 to 48-406 sequence and six other courses at the 300 or 400 level, two of which may be outside the Department. At least an overall B average must be maintained.
3) Students with an honours degree in Anthropology must take 48-307, 48-308, 48-346 and two courses from the 48-403 to 48-406 sequence or the equivalent. Students with an honours degree in Criminology must take 48-345 and two courses from the 48-403 to 48-406 sequence or the equivalent.
Notes:
1) Students not having a sufficient background in statistics and/or social theory may be required to take 48-307 and 48-308 and/or 48-345 and 48-346.
2) Seminar classes require active class participation. Instructors may therefore take into account class participation in grading students, in accordance with Senate regulations.
All courses listed will not necessarily be offered in any given year.
All courses are taught as seminars.
A critical study of conceptual issues in both macro and micro levels of sociological theory, including such fundamental questions as the nature of theories, human nature and the nature of society. Normally, this course will be team-taught. (2 hours a week.)
A systematic exploration of the general epistemological and procedural problems as they apply to classical and contemporary methods of sociological research. The course will cover such problems as validation, measurement, computerization and statistical inference. Normally, this course will be team-taught. (2 hours a week.)
An advanced seminar examining contemporary approaches to issues of power and social change. The central focus will be on recent Canadian contributions to the study of inequality on the basis of class, gender, race, ethnicity, and sexuality.
Seminar on the theory and research of large scale social transformation through the examination of such topics as the development and impact of social movements, states and social revolutions and the mobilization of people on the bases of racial, gender and class divisions. (2 hours a week.)
Seminar on the central theoretical and empirical issues raised in understanding the ways in which national and global processes of socio-economic development are experienced locally. Questions of class, culture, household, gender, and community will be discussed in the context of both the third world and Canada.
Critical analysis of current paradigms of industrial development in both western and non-western societies focussing on such issues as socio-cultural convergence and diversity, the international division of labour, the role of international organizations, the effectiveness of competing state policies, and the political responses of workers.
Critical analysis of current theories and research on formal oraganizations, focussing on such issues as bureaucracy and control, the alienation of labour, and the external determinants of organizational rationality. (2 hours a week.)
A comparative analysis of race and ethnic relations in Canada focusing on such issues as ethnic stratification and mobility patterns, assimilation and cultural pluralism, policies and legislation governing multiculturalism, employment equity and collective rights.
A comparative analysis of the contemporary and historical relations between ethnicity and the construction of collective identities and ideologies in the context of ethnic movements for self-determination, separatism, and the process of nation-state formation.
Various forms of family organization will be examined in terms of their historical development and current configuration. The relationship between families and the economy, the polity, and education will also be studied along with family life cycle, including such issues as conjugal and intergenerational conflict, emergent family forms, and the social position of the elderly.
Examination of current debates on the formation of gender and sexuality, including such topics as: the sexual division of labour, social policy and state regulation, and gay and lesbian studies.
A seminar course involving advanced critical analysis of theory and research on crime, criminals and criminality. Particular attention will be paid to typologies of crime and criminals. (2 hours a week.)
An investigation of the salient theoretical and research problems in jurisprudence, legal structures and legal behaviour. Focus will vary according to students' and instructors' interests. (2 hours a week.)
This course will include an intensive examination of the theories of punishments and evaluative research on correctional programs both within and outside of institutions. (2 hours a week.)
48-563.Current Issues in the Study of Deviance and Criminology
This course will focus on new issues in the sociologies of crime and deviance. (2 hours a week.)
An advanced research course designed to give students the opportunity to explore issues at the leading edge in the field of social psychology. Students will be expected to do either independent or team research on selected topics and present their findings in class for peer review. (2 hours a week.)
Systematic observation methods, participant observer techniques, self-analytic groups, group structures and process category recording system. (2 hours a week.)
A critical examination of current theories in social psychology, with an emphasis on conceptual and methodological issues. Theoretical emphasis will vary from year to year. While classical theories will be scrutinized, the concentration will be on existing critiques, reorientations and developments in contemporary social psychology. (2 hours a week.)
A critical review and examination of the existing literature in applied social psychology. Students will engage in community-oriented research projects having applied significance of societal relevance. (2 hours a week.)
Theory and research on the consequences of modern urban development. An emphasis on survey methods of studying human ecology, social epidemiology, power and class, religion, education and deviance. (2 hours a week.)
Students will register for this course with a faculty advisor in their declared area of specialization with the purpose of developing a thesis proposal.
Gold/Smith, Susan; B.A., M.A. (Wayne State)—1970.
Baxter, Iain; R.C.A., B.Sc., M.Ed. (Idaho), M.F.A. (Washington State) - 1988.
Pufahl, John K. Jr.; B.F.A. (Illinois Wesleyan), M.A., M.F.A. (Northern Illinois), F.R.S.A.—1967.
Farrell, Michael J.; B.A., M.A. (Florida State)—1968.
Ferraro, Robert C.; B.A. (City College, N.Y.), M.F.A. (Southern Illinois)—1968.
DeAngelis, Joseph R.; B.F.A. (Rhode Island School of Design), M.F.A. (Syracuse)—1969.
Law, William C.; B.F.A. (Atlanta School of Art), M.F.A. (Tulane)—1970.
Dingler, Daniel W.; B.F.A. (Layton School of Art), M.F.A. (Cranbrook Academy of Art)—1971.
Bélanger, Sylvie; Bacc. Spec. (Montreal), Ed. Cert. (Quebec), B.F.A. (Concordia), M.F.A. (York)—1989.
The program provides two years of advanced training for creative development in the student's chosen field of specialization. This would include the refinement of technical and manipulative skills, but with special concern for the interrelationship between technique and creative statement. Fields of specialization within the M.F.A. program are Painting/Drawing, Sculpture, Printmaking, and Multi-Media.
Students with a B.F.A. degree from the University of Windsor are encouraged to seek their Master's degree elsewhere.
In addition to the requirements set forth in 1.3 and 1.6.1 for admission to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research, applicants for admission to the Master of Fine Arts program must satisfy the following particular requirements:
(a)have an honours B.A. with a major in Visual Arts or Bachelor of Fine Arts degree from an approved college or university; an applicant with a general B.A. with a major in Visual Arts may be admitted with the stipulation that deficiencies will be made up;
(b)present twenty slides of recent work for evaluation by the departmental graduate acceptance committee;
(c)have attained at least a B standing in undergraduate art courses;
(d)have six courses in art history;
(e)present transcripts of all university- and/or college-level work to the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research;
(f)present three letters of recommendation.
2) An applicant who has graduated from a recognized professional institution may be required to apply for entry into a special program prerequisite to admission into the M.F.A. program.
3) Students who are deficient in any of these requirements may be asked to register in appropriate undergraduate courses in order to satisfy the requirements.
4) Applications for admission to the Master of Fine Arts program should be complete by February 15 for Fall admission; applications reaching the Office of Graduate Studies after that date may not be considered.
1) Ten to twelve courses are required including Thesis (27-797):
(a)four courses in a studio area of concentration;
(b)two to four additional courses which may be taken within or outside the School of Visual Arts;
(c)one seminar on contemporary issues (28-660);
(d)one Art History Seminar (28-656) or Directed Individual Studies course (28-600);
(e)Graduate Seminar (27-596);
(f)In the second term of their first year, students must participate in a first year M.F.A. group exhibition. This exhibition will be evaluated by faculty members to determine the advisability of a student continuing in the program.
2) Thesis: The thesis will consist of an exhibition of a body of original creative works within the candidate's field of concentration. The thesis will be planned with, and executed under the direction of the candidate's principal faculty advisor. This final exhibition should be regarded as the equivalent of the scholarly thesis of an academic discipline.
3) Committees:
(a)Guidance Committee: Each student will choose a guidance committee, approved by the School's Graduate Program Committee, at the beginning of the second term of his or her Master's program. This committee will meet with the student periodically throughout the time required to complete the M.F.A. program and to assess his/her work and progress through the program.
(b)Thesis Defence Committee: This committee will assess the student's thesis exhibition, conduct the oral examination, decide if the M.F.A. degree should be awarded and determine the thesis grade. The thesis committee will be constituted as follows: a member of the graduate faculty appointed by the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research serving as a non-voting chair, the student's principal advisor and two additional faculty members, one of whom will not have been a member of the student's guidance committee. In addition a professional artist or artist-educator not from the University of Windsor or the Windsor area will be chosen as an external member of the committee. The student will choose the last three members of this committee with the approval of the School's Graduate Program Committee and subject to the approval of the Executive Committee of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research.
4) Examination and Thesis Requirements:
(a)a solo exhibition of the completed creative thesis acceptable to the student's thesis committee;
(b)a written and photographic documentation of the thesis to be retained by the School of Visual Arts;
(c)a formal oral defense of the thesis before the student's thesis committee.
5) Residence Requirements: The M.F.A. program will require a minimum of two academic years (four terms).
Transfer credits will be evaluated and may be accepted.
Work on an M.F.A degree should ordinarily be completed within three consecutive years after a student's enrollment.
All graduate studio courses are directed individual studies courses. Projects will be planned and carried out in conjunction with a faculty supervisor.
Directed individual studio projects for sculpture majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for sculpture majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for sculpture majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for sculpture majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for painting/drawing majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for painting/drawing majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for painting/drawing majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for painting/drawing majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for printmaking majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for printmaking majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for printmaking majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for printmaking majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for multi-media majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for multi-media majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for multi-media majors only.
Directed individual studio projects for multi-media majors only.
Introduction to course preparation and studio teaching practices.
Continuation of 27-580, with emphasis on studio teaching experience. (Prerequisite: 27-580 and approval of the Director of the School.)
The Graduate Seminar will meet weekly each term and will provide a forum for peer critiques and critical discussion of students' work and the issues arising from that discussion. The Seminar will also be the venue for developing the written statement required for presentation to the student's thesis defence committee and as part of the oral examination. It must be taken in each term. A grade will be assigned only at the completion of the final term.
Directed individual studio work outside the student's major. (May be repeated for credit.)
The specific topics in the Directed Individual Studies in art history and the Art History Seminar will vary from year to year, depending upon the interests and needs of professors and students. All courses are three hours a week unless otherwise indicated.
This course involves examination of a particular problem in a specific area of interest in which a paper will be required. (May be repeated for credit with permission of the School.)
A proseminar course based on group encounters with particular studies in the history of art, which will be considered by means of readings, discussions, papers and museum trips. (May be repeated for credit with permission of the School.)
Current issues in art criticism and theory will be considered through reading, discussions, museum trips, guest lectures and research papers culminating in a seminar presentation by individual students on specific issues.
While there is no guarantee of financial support for individual students, the University of Windsor is committed to supporting and encouraging graduate studies. We are proud of our record of funding for graduate study, and with the active effort of current and potential graduate students we aim to sustain and enhance that record. Your host department and the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research will be happy to assist you in the preparation of a strong and complete application for external funding.
Students wishing further information and applications on awards listed below should consult the Graduate Studies Office. As far as possible, information presented here is up-to-date at the time of calendar printing. Students are invited to consult, in addition to these listings, publications and files on graduate awards maintained in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
The five main sources of funding for graduate students at the University of Windsor are:
(a)National (Canadian) and provincial (Ontario) scholarship awards (i) tenable at Windsor, or (ii) tenable elsewhere;
(b)Internal scholarships and bursaries;
(c)Internal graduate teaching assistantships and research assistantships;
(d)OSAP (Ontario Student Assistance Program), which generally provides loans;
(e)Discipline-specific or designated awards (awarded by departments or external donors).
A sixth group of awards are "Continuing Career Awards". These often seek to identify a researcher during the period of graduate studies, and to provide the individual with ongoing support over various formative stages of the career.
International students ("visa students") may also be eligible for scholarship and bursary support through programs based in or administered through their home country. We recommend that international students investigate potential sources of support prior to making an application to graduate school, noting that, in Ontario, tuition costs for international students are significantly higher than those for Canadians and Canadian permanent residents (landed immigrants). International students are eligible to apply for all scholarships marked with an asterisk (*) in the section that follows; unmarked scholarships are open only to Canadian citizens and Canadian permanent residents. International students should note that, if they are awarded an OGS or certain other specific awards, or hold certain specific forms of visa status, they may not be required to pay the higher "international student" tuition, but instead may be eligible to pay at the same rate as Canadians and Canadian permanent residents. Details of these exceptions to the international student rate are available on an information sheet from the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research.
Generally speaking, a student should have an outstanding academic record to be in the running for these external awards. A grade average of A- in the most recent two years of study (undergraduate or graduate coursework) is usually necessary. Evidence of research capability, previous research awards (such as NSERC Undergraduate Student Research Awards), and experience of research will also strengthen an application. An application for an external scholarship will pass through several stages: first, the application must be submitted to the department by the appropriate deadline date, then applications may have to be ranked by a departmental committee. The applications will then be forwarded, along with the department's ranking, to the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. A committee representing the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research may then have to rank the applications overall. The Dean will forward recommendations and ranking to the external agency. These applications should be prepared with care. They must be typed, and complete. It is the responsibility of the student to ensure that the application package, including letters of reference, arrives in the department on time. Applicants should check to see whether an award is renewable, or if it must be applied for anew on subsequent occasions. Special requirements and conditions are mentioned in the paragraphs below, but any student who is making an application should request the full packet of background material from the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research.
Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada Postgraduate Scholarships (NSERC)
These scholarships are valued at $15,600 for twelve months as of May 1, 1993 for students in their first and second years of graduate study (PGS-A) and $17,400 for those in their third and fourth years of graduate study (PGS-B). These awards are open to students in the fields of agriculture, biology, forestry, chemistry, physics, geology, physical geography, oceanography, mathematics, engineering and some areas of psychology. At the time of application, an applicant must be either a Canadian citizen or a permanent resident. Applications must be made (1) in the fall of the fourth (senior) year of undergraduate studies for a PGS A, or (2) in fall of the second year of graduate studies for a PGS B. Timing is critical. Further information may be obtained from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, or the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada, 350 Albert Street, Ottawa, Ontario K1A 1H5.
Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada Fellowships (SSHRC)
Doctoral Fellowships are valued at $14,016 (1991-92) for twelve months. The fellowships are intended to develop research skills and to assist in the training of highly qualified personnel. Candidates must demonstrate a high standard of academic achievement in undergraduate and graduate studies in the social sciences and humanities. Applicants must be Canadian citizens or permanent residents of Canada, and by the time of taking up the award will have completed at least one year of doctoral study or a Master's degree. Application material is available in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research or from the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada, 255 Albert Street, Box 1610, Ottawa, Ontario K1P 6G4. Deadline set by the department is usually early November. (Note that SSHRC does not at present provide support for Master's degree research.)
The Government of the Province of Ontario provides annually a number of postgraduate awards, valued for 1993-94 at $3,953 per term, and tenable only at Ontario universities. The purpose of these awards is to encourage excellence in graduate studies in all disciplines. The minimum academic qualification is the Ontario Honours Bachelor's degree or its equivalent. Applicants should have an A- grade average or better in the most recent two years of study. The awards may be held for three consecutive terms and must be held for at least two consecutive terms. International students should note that while they are eligible to apply for OGS support, there is a very limited number of awards allocated to international students. Further information and application forms are available from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Deadline is normally in October.
In honour of the visit of Her Majesty Queen Elizabeth II to Ontario in July, 1959, the Government of the Province established a fund to provide annually a number of postgraduate awards with a minimum value of $13,000 plus a general expense allowance of $500. These awards will be available in the fields of the humanities, social sciences and mathematics and are open to Canadian citizens and permanent residents. The scholarships are intended for full-time students of exceptional calibre who are nearing the completion of a Ph.D. program in an Ontario university and who are expected to be in the final full year of their research and writing during tenure of the award. Preference will be given to candidates who are residents of Ontario. Further information and applications may be obtained from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Deadline for submission of applications is December 1.
Canadian Law Scholarship Foundation/SSHRC Legal Research Scholarship
This award is offered by the Canadian Law Scholarship Foundation to an outstanding law studies candidate supported by an SSHRC doctoral fellowship. The successful candidate must register in a recognized program in civil or common law at a Canadian university and must plan to undertake a significant research project. Further information is available from the Fellowships Division of SSHRC, 255 Albert Street, Box 1610, Ottawa K1P 6G4.
Up to twenty-five awards, valued at up to $14,154 (in 1993-94), are offered to Canadian citizens or permanent residents for full-time graduate studies in Master's degree programs in the fields of urban planning, law, engineering, public administration, economics, psychology, landscape architecture, sociology and architecture. Individuals wishing to apply may obtain the necessary forms from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research or from the head of the department at the university where they propose to study. Application forms may also be obtained from CMHC regional offices, or from the Administrator, Scholarships, CMHC National Office, Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0P7. Applications must be submitted to the Office of Graduate Studies and Research no later than March 27.
The value of this award is $10,000 for one year. Five graduate awards are made annually in the fields of science, engineering, social science and business administration. The program was established to recognize academic excellence and to support and encourage graduate research in specialized fields of study relating to the petroleum industry. Candidates must be Canadian citizens or landed immigrants. For application material write to: Scholarship Administration Services, Association of Universities and Colleges of Canada, 151 Slater Street, Ottawa, Ontario K1P 5N1. Application must reach Ottawa by February 1.
Research grants, valued at up to $8,000, will be awarded to Canadians or landed immigrants in doctoral programs in mental retardation or related fields. The grant may be renewed if research projects show results and can be published in related journals. Application deadline April 30.
Bursaries of a value up to $1,500 will be awarded to Canadians or landed immigrants accepted into postgraduate programs in mental retardation or related fields. Candidates must be recommended by the Provincial Association for the Mentally Retarded in their province. Application deadline March 30. Further information and application forms may be obtained from: The Secretary, Awards Committee, National Institute on Mental Retardation, Kinsmen NIMR Building, 4700 Keele Street, Downsview, Ontario M3J 1P3, or from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
Seven to nine scholarships, valued at $8,500 for study in Canada ($12,000 for study elsewhere in the Commonwealth) will be awarded to enable students to carry on studies in history, economics, the humanities, constitutional government or any subject vital to the interests of the Commonwealth. These scholarships are tenable in any university in Canada, Great Britain or within the Commonwealth. Applicants must be Canadian citizens who hold a first degree from a Canadian university, hold a Master's degree or are in the final year of studies leading to a Master's degree. Deadline for application is December 1.
The Delta Kappa Gamma Society international is an organization of professional women in the field of education. A fellowship for graduate study in the amount of $4,000 U.S. is offered to a female graduate student, with a possibility of renewal for a second year. To be eligible, an applicant must be a female student from a country other than Canada or the United States, studying under a "student authorization", and accepted for admission to graduate studies. The student must be in a program which will lead to a teaching position in an educational institution (school, college, university, library, nursing institution). In addition, the applicant must plan to return to teach in her home country on completion of studies. Applications may be obtained from the International Students' Centre, and must be submitted by November 15.
Under a plan drawn up at a conference in Oxford in 1959, each participating country of the Commonwealth offers a number of scholarships to students from other Commonwealth countries. These scholarships are mainly for graduate study and are tenable in the country making the offer. Awards are normally for two years and cover travelling, tuition fees, other university fees and a living allowance. For international students wishing to study at Windsor, details may be obtained from the relevant government office in the applicant's own country or from the Director General, External Aid Office, Ottawa, Ontario. International students may also obtain scholarship applications from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Canadian students should note that they may also apply for these awards, but the award would be held in another Commonwealth country (see section on awards tenable elsewhere, awarded externally, below).
Value $1,000. The Ontario Section of the Air Pollution Control Association offers a bursary ($1,000) and a one year membership in the Association to a student interested in the study of air pollution. The applicant must be a Canadian citizen or landed immigrant, and must be a full-time student in a graduate program in Ontario, in the study of air environment. Further information and application forms may be obtained from: Bursary and Awards Committee, Ontario Section, APCA, P.O. Box 259, Postal Stn. U, Toronto, Ontario M8Z 5P1.
Minimum stipend $1125 a month. Students who have not yet begun graduate studies, and who are enrolled full-time in the second or a higher year of an Honours program eligible for NSERC support are encouraged to apply directly to their major department for further information on these awards. In 1993 twenty-four awards were made to students at the University of Windsor; they provided an excellent opportunity for students to determine their interest in pursuing graduate research in the future. Application deadlines, set by departments, are usually early in December.
Minimum stipend $1125 a month. Female Canadian or permanent resident undergraduate students enrolled in the first year of an Honours program in the physical sciences (excluding life sciences such as biology and biochemistry) or in engineering who have obtained an A average are eligible to apply for this NSERC support and are encouraged to apply directly to their major department for further information on these awards. In 1993 two of these special awards were made at the University of Windsor. The objective of these targetted awards is to encourage outstanding female students to pursue a professional career in areas in which women are under-represented at the graduate level. The application deadlines for these awards, set by departments, are usually early in December.
* International students may apply for awards marked with an asterisk (*).
Windsor students may also apply for many of the scholarships listed above through the University of Windsor, and hold the scholarships at other Ontario (and in some cases other Canadian) universities. Please see above for details of the following scholarships: NSERC, SSHRC, OGS, Queen Elizabeth II Ontario Scholarships, Canadian Law Scholarship Foundation, CMHC, Noranda/Bradfield, Petro-Canada, National Institute of Mental Retardation, IODE, Delta Kappa Gamma World Fellowship, Commonwealth Scholarship, Air Pollution Control Association, NSERC Undergraduate Student Research Awards, and Targetted NSERC Undergraduate Student Research Awards.
These very special awards, valued at $21,300 for twelve months (as of May 1, 1993), provide support for students in each of four years of graduate study. They are made to students who are truly outstanding, and who will undertake graduate study towards the Ph.D. at another institution in Canada. In addition to superior scholarship and promise of research ability, the selection committee will take into consideration the candidate's leadership potential, ability to communicate verbally and in writing, general knowledge and interests. Students who are interested in being nominated by the University of Windsor, and believe their record is strong, should contact the Office of Graduate Studies and Research in early fall of the fourth year of undergraduate work. The review panel (in Ottawa) is particularly interested in students who have demonstrated their commitment to research, usually through publication of research results, and who have developed significant outside interests in addition to maintaining an outstanding undergraduate record. Like the regular NSERC awards, the 1967 awards are open to students in the fields of agriculture, biology, forestry, chemistry, physics, geology, physical geography, oceanography, mathematics, engineering and some areas of psychology. At the time of application, an applicant must be either a Canadian citizen or a permanent resident. Further information may be obtained from the the Office of Graduate Studies and Research or the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada, 350 Albert Street, Ottawa, Ontario K1A 1H5.
This award is offered to one or two outstanding successful (SSHRC) doctoral fellowship candidates who intend to enter a doctoral program in Canadian Studies at a Canadian university. In addition to the basic award, the Queen's Fellowship includes an allowance to cover tuition fees, travel to the main place of tenure, and travel for research purposes.
This program provides, for a nine-month period, a grant of $15,000, or $1,667 U.S. per month for lesser periods. This Fulbright program sponsors outstanding graduate students who are Canadian citizens who will spend one academic year at a host institution in the U.S. The goal of the program is to promote and improve mutual understanding between Canada and the United States. Grants are also available for students who plan to begin a doctoral program or other final degree (e.g., M.F.A., S.J.D., LL.M.) in the U.S. In this latter case funding is available only for the first year, and the student must have been accepted into a program in the U.S. Eligible topics: issues pertaining to Canada and the U.S., for example science policy issues, international trade, comparative studies of U.S. and Canadian policies and institutions, attitudes, etc. Deadline: check at the University of Windsor Office of Graduate Studies and Research; deadlines for 1994 are Sept. 15, 1994 in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, and September 30, 1994 in the Fulbright Program Office (Ottawa). This is a prestigious award, and only students in the A range should apply. If you are interested pick up an application packet from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. U.S. students should note that this is a reciprocal program, and they may be able to apply from the U.S.
A maximum of fifty awards of up to $25,000 (less income tax) per year is available for 1994-95. The objective of these long-term awards is to develop a body of Canadians competent and expert in the field of international development. The closing date for the first competition is mid-February, and the closing date for the second is early September. Applicants must be Canadian citizens; proof of citizenship must accompany the application form. Applicants must have indicated a definite commitment to and suitability for a career in international development work.
The two provincial governments will each award ten fellowships; in 1993-94 students pursuing studies at the Master's level received $10,000; doctoral students received $12,000. The Ontario-Quebec Permanent Commission, in accordance with the interprovincial Agreement for Co-operation and Exchange in Educational and Cultural Matters, sponsors an exchange program that allows students from one province to pursue, on a full-time basis, graduate studies at the Master's or doctoral level in the other province. Outstanding students from Ontario and Quebec, known as Ontario-Quebec Fellows, are offered the opportunity to live in the cultural milieu of their second language and to work in their particular field of study in their second language. Fellowship holders must be registered as full-time students in a graduate program for the tenure of the award. Students from provinces other than Ontario must have resided in Ontario for twelve consecutive months. All candidates must be Canadian citizens or permanent residents for at least one year.
Under a plan drawn up at a conference in Oxford in 1959, each participating country of the Commonwealth offers a number of scholarships to students from other Commonwealth countries. These scholarships are mainly for graduate study and are tenable in the country making the offer. Awards are normally for two years and cover travelling, tuition fees, other university fees and a living allowance. Canadian Students wishing to study in another Commonwealth country may write to the Association of Universities and Colleges of Canada, Commonwealth Scholarship Program, 151 Slater St., Ottawa, Ontario K1P 5N1, or may obtain scholarship applications from the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
Seven to nine scholarships valued at $8,500 for study in Canada ($12,000 for study elsewhere in the Commonwealth) will be awarded to enable students to carry on studies in history, economics, the humanities, constitutional government or any subject vital to the interests of the Commonwealth. These scholarships are tenable in any university in Canada, Great Britain or within the Commonwealth. Applicants must be Canadian citizens who hold a first degree from a Canadian university, hold a Master's degree or are in the final year of studies leading to a Master's degree. Deadline for application is December 1.
Six scholarships of up to $12,000 (subject to change) will be available to graduates of any Canadian university who propose to engage, either in the United States or the United Kingdom, in postgraduate studies in the field of international or industrial relations (including the international or industrial aspects of law, history, politics, economics). Application material available in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Deadline date February 1.
One one-year scholarship of $10,000 (subject to change) will be available to graduates of any Canadian university, for full-time postgraduate studies in Canada or elsewhere and in any field. Application material available in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Deadline date February 1.
The Canadian Federation of University Women offers the following awards to women holding a degree from a Canadian university and who are Canadian citizens or have held landed immigrant status for one year:
Value $10,000. The candidate must have completed at least one full calendar year in doctoral studies at the time of application.
0Value $8,000. The candidate must be studying full-time at the Master's or doctoral level in Canada or abroad.
Value $5,000. The candidate must be enrolled in graduate work below the Ph.D. level. She may be studying abroad.
Value $3,500. The candidate must be over the age of 35 at the time of application and enrolled in graduate work at an Ontario university.
Value $1,400. For graduate studies in any field, with special consideration given to study of issues related particularly to women. The onus is on the candidate to demonstrate the relevance of her work to women.
Value $1,000. For graduate study in science and technology.
Value $1,000. For graduate study at a Canadian university where one of the languages of instruction and administration is French.
Value $1,000. For graduate studies in the humanities or social sciences with special consideration given to study in Canadian history. The candidate must reside in Canada.
Value $1,000. Four awarded. The purpose is to assist women doing refresher work, specialized study or retraining in new techniques applicable to their field. Special consideration will be given to candidates returning to study after a few years.
Application forms are available in the Office of Graduate Studies and Research. Completed applications and documentation must be received by November 30, 1993 for the 1994 competition. In subsequent years please check with the Office of Graduate Studies and Research to determine the deadline. Applications should be sent to the Canadian Federation of University Women, 55 Parkdale Avenue, Ottawa, Ontario K1Y 1E5.
Value $500. These scholarships are awarded on the basis of a 500-word essay. In the 1994 competition the deadline was Feb. 28, 1994. For information please contact the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, or the Coordinator, Mensa Canada Scholarship Program, P.O. Box 1025, Station O, Toronto Ontario M4A 2V4.
The University of Windsor may ordinarily nominate a number of students for the institutional OGS awards,valued for 1994-95 at $3,953 per term, and tenable only at the University of Windsor. These awards are made by the Graduate Awards Committee to eligible Canadian or permanent resident applicants who will be beginning or continuing their graduate studies at Windsor. Priority is usually given to new, rather than continuing, students. Other eligibility criteria and conditions are the same as for regular OGS awards (see section above on awards tenable at Windsor, awarded externally). In 1993, the University of Windsor was allocated eight of these special awards. All eligible students whose files are complete by February 1 will automatically be considered for this award. Each department will provide a ranking of all its eligible students for this and other internally awarded scholarships; the ranking and other documentary information will be used as the basis of decisions by the Graduate Awards Committee.
The following scholarships, valued at tuition plus stipend, and bursaries (tuition only) will be offered annually for full-time postgraduate study in any field at the University of Windsor. All students who apply for admission to graduate studies at Windsor and whose file of documentation is complete by February 1 will be considered by their department as potential candidates for the scholarship. Eligible continuing students will also be considered. The awards are competitive and open to university graduates with high standing. They may be held concurrently with a Graduate Assistantship and/or Research Assistantship.
These prestigious awards, established in honour of the founder and first Dean of the Faculty of Graduate Studies at this University, provide tuition for one calendar year beginning with Summer term in the year of the award, and an annual stipend of $5,000 for three terms of registration.
These are special scholarships for Canadian citizens and permanent residents in areas designated by the University as of strategic importance to its mission. They provide tuition for one calendar year beginning with Summer term in the year of the award, and an annual stipend of $4,000 for three terms of registration.
These awards provide full tuition for one calendar year beginning with Summer term in the year of the award.
Most international students are obliged by the Government of Ontario to pay a much higher tuition rate than Canadians and landed immigrants. Award of a differential visa fee waiver reduces the fee required of an international student to the same level as that for Canadians and landed immigrants, for one calendar year beginning with Fall term in the year of the award. All eligible students will automatically be considered for this award, and will be ranked by their department in February of each year.
This scholarship, value $1,000, is awarded annually through the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research. It is designated for a mature married student with family or other responsibilities, on the basis of academic merit. The recipient may be enrolled in any graduate program at the University of Windsor, and shall be a Canadian citizen or British subject with landed immigrant status in Canada. This award was established in 1990 by the family and friends of Ian David Berks. Eligible students should indicate their interest in being considered for this award to the BAU head and the Graduate Coordinator or chair of the departmental graduate committee.
These awards are available to assist students in the completion of the thesis. They are terminal in that they are available only for the last summer of the research program. Students who have received this award are no longer eligible for further support from the University.
* International students may apply for awards marked with an asterisk (*).
The majority of financially eligible full-time graduate students who have been accepted to graduate studies at the University of Windsor are awarded graduate assistantships. The Graduate Assistant/Teaching Assistant manual, "GA/TA Employment" , which is included in the Graduate Student Handbook, should be consulted for details of the working arrangement, conditions etc. The maximum Graduate Assistantship requires ten hours of work a week for a total stipend of $6,400 (Master's) or $7,200 (Doctoral) during the Fall and Winter terms (1993-94 rates). Partial assistantships with prorated stipends may be offered in some departments. For further details please consult the department concerned.
A number of departments also offer Research Assistantships supported by funds received by faculty from external granting agencies. Consult your department for further information.
* International students may apply for awards marked with an asterisk (*).
Ontario Student Assistance Program (for Full-and Part-Time Students)
Students who are Canadian citizens or permanent residents, and who are residents of Ontario, may apply for an award under the Ontario Student Assistance Program.
To receive an award a student must establish a need for assistance and be enrolled in a program which leads to a (graduate or undergraduate) degree, diploma or certificate.
A common application form enables the student to apply for an Ontario Study Grant, a Canada Student Loan, and an Ontario Student Loan. Eligibility criteria and calculated financial need determine which of the plans, if any, may provide the student with assistance. Applications and information brochures are available in the Student Awards Office, which is located at 122 Dillon Hall.
A separate section on graduate awards administered by departments follows below.
31.1.5 INTERNAL, DISCIPLINARY OR DESIGNATED AWARDS (AWARDED BY DEPARTMENTS)
Students wishing further information on the awards listed below, conditions and deadlines should consult the Faculty or department concerned.
Value determined by interest earned on Trust Fund. The Biology Club is organized by the undergraduate and graduate students of the Department of Biological Sciences. Award is made annually to a student entering the M.Sc. program in Biology, on the basis of participation in departmental activities at the undergraduate level at the University of Windsor, financial need, and academic merit. This award may not be held concurrently with major awards such as NSERC and OGS. Application forms are available in the Department of Biological Sciences office; deadline for submission to the Department of Biological Sciences, University of Windsor, is August 15.
Value $2,000 including book allowance. Awarded to a graduate student in the M.B.A. program on the basis of academic merit.
Value $500. Awarded annually on the basis of academic standing to a full-time graduate student upon completion of the first year of the M.B.A. program. Established in 1985 by Mrs. Daniel Bryan and sons.
Value $500. Awarded annually to a student who has completed Year I of the M.B.A. program, entering Year II. Recipients must have a cumulative average of at least B and must have demonstrated a strong interest in the area of entrepreneurship either by high grades in related courses or by serious research. Applicants must submit a letter of application and resume to the Dean of the Faculty of Graduate Studies and Research by September 30.
Annual awards of $100. for outstanding undergraduate and graduate students in business administration, awarded on the basis of combined academic excellence and extracurricular achievement. Further information is available from the Faculty of Business Administration. Deadline for submission of applications is September 30.
Value $80. Awarded annually during the second term to the student in the candidate year with the highest standing in investment analysis. The award is funded by interest on prize money awarded to the University of Windsor's Investment Team in the Canada-wide Financial Post's "Million Dollar Portfolio" contest.
Awarded to a graduate student entering the first year of the M.B.A. program.
One or more awards totalling $500. annually to a full-time student registered in an undergraduate or graduate program of study focused on Canadian-American relations. Applicants must have a cumulative average of at least 10.5 and may be engaged in an exchange program or a joint degree program with a university in the United States. Application forms available in the Centre for Canadian-American Studies and the Student Awards office. Deadline: December 15.
Value $2,000. Awarded to a clinical intern registered in 59-589 or 59-689 in the Clinical Chemistry program, with placement at Bio-Science Laboratory (Ontario) Limited for one year, non-renewable.
Value $1,000. Awarded annually on the basis of academic achievement to a student beginning a graduate program in Chemistry or Biochemistry at the University of Windsor. Established (1972) in memory of William A. Redmond, who obtained his doctorate in chemistry at the University of Windsor in 1964.
Value up to $1,000. This award is made annually on the basis of undergraduate academic results to a student in a geology or geological engineering Master's program. The award is for financial assistance toward the preparation of a geological thesis in stratigraphical or structural surface or subsurface studies with preference to studies in Ontario sedimentary basins. Application is made to the Institute through the Department of Earth Sciences by February 15.
EDUCATION
Value $1,000. Awarded annually on the basis of scholarship and financial need to a full-time graduate student in the Faculty of Education. Established in 1981 by Dr. and Mrs. J. H. Nephew.
Value $200. Awarded annually on the basis of scholarship and financial need to a graduate student in the Department of Communication Studies. Established in 1989 in honour of a Master's student from the People's Republic of China.
Value $100. Awarded annually on the basis of scholarship and financial need to an outstanding graduate student in the Department of English. The award was established by a grant-in-aid to the Department from the Commonwealth Scholarship and Fellowship Plan, on behalf of a Commonwealth Scholarship recipient.
Value $2,000. Two annual awards, one for a doctoral student in the Department of Electrical Engineering on the basis of excellent performance in research and course work; and one award for a female Master's or doctoral student in the Department of Electrical Engineering on the basis of excellent performance in research and course work. If no female student is eligible, the award will be given to another student on the same basis. The two awards may not be held concurrently.
Value $1,000 and a gold medal. Awarded annually to a student entering the University of Windsor M.A. program in Geography, on the basis of academic record, submission and presentation of an original paper (max. 1500 words) dealing with conservation and/or resource management issues in the Great Lakes area, and commitment to pursue studies in conservation and/or resource management in Canada. The recipient will be chosen by the Paul Ernest Vandall Memorial Award Committee. The award will not be assigned if no candidate meets the standards set by the Committee. Apply to the Head of the Geography Department before September 1. (Established in 1984 by the family, friends, and former students of Professor Vandall, and the faculty and staff members of the University of Windsor, to honour the founder of the Geography Department.)
Value $100. Human Kinetics Alumni Awards are bestowed annually on the basis of scholarship. Specific areas of emphasis will be identified each year by the department.
Value up to $1,000. Awarded annually on the basis of scholarship and financial need to a graduate student in political science. Established in 1975 by friends and admirers of Walter L. White, first Head of the Department of Political Science and first Dean of Social Science.
Value $250. Awarded annually on the basis of academic standing and financial need to a graduate student in psychology. Re-established in 1986 by Mr. Richard Hurwitz.
Value $1,000. Awarded annually by Assumption University on the basis of academic merit and financial need to a graduate student in the Department of Religious Studies. Established in 1980 by the Basilian Fathers as a memorial to Father John H. O'Loane, C.S.B. Apply to the Head of the Department of Religious Studies, University of Windsor.
Value $150. Awarded annually to a deserving student registered full-time or part-time in Level 3 or 4 of the B.S.W. program or in the M.S.W. program. Established in memory of the Director of the School of Social Work, 1985-89. Application forms are available in the School of Social Work, Office of Student Awards or the Office of Graduate Studies and Research.
Value $2,000, including book allowance. Awarded to a graduate student in the M.F.A. program, specializing in sculpture, on the basis of merit in academic and studio work.
Value up to $1,000. May be awarded annually on the basis of the graduate admissions portfolio, transcript and letters of recommendation to a first-term M.F.A. student majoring in printmaking. The award will not necessarily be assigned every year.
This group of awards includes programs that often seek to identify a researcher during the period of graduate studies, and to provide the individual with ongoing support over various formative stages of the career.
Information on these programs is available from the Graduate Studies Office, University of Windsor. They include, for example:
Alzheimer Society Training Awards and Research Awards
Canadian Foundation for the Study of Infant Deaths (grants)
Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation Scholarships
Canadian Northern Studies Trust
Canadian Space Agency
Eco-Research Doctoral Fellowships (Green Plan)
Gerontology Research Council of Ontario
Health and Welfare Canada: National Welfare Scholarships
Learning Disabilities Association of Canada: Doreen Kronick Scholarship
Medical Research Council/National Health Research and Development Program: HIV/AIDS Research Initiative
Ministry of Community and Social Services: Northern Bursary Competition
Ontario Mental Health Studentships
Planned Parenthood Federation of Canada Award
Soroptimist Foundation of Canada
J.H. Stewart Reid Memorial Fellowship
Wildlife Habitat Canada (M.Sc. and Ph.D. support)
Note to Donors: The University of Windsor greatly appreciates the financial contributions of individuals, groups, and corporations who wish to support the creative and research enterprise of graduate study. Anyone who is interested in setting up a named award or trust fund to support scholarship or commemorate individuals or events is encouraged to contact the Dean of Graduate Studies and Research. Donors are often interested in directing their contribution to specific groups of students. It must be recognized that in accepting the administration of awards designated for specific groups, the University of Windsor is bound by provincial and federal human rights legislation not to deny eligibility to anyone on discriminatory grounds. The criteria of eligibility must therefore be expressed in accordance with these legislative principles. Ability to benefit is the primary criterion for the award of scholarships and may be measured by academic achievement or demonstrated potential of other kinds relevant to the particular award. Membership of a group that has been disadvantaged because of race, national or ethnic origin, colour, religion, sex, age or disability may also be a criterion of eligibility. It would be helpful if the donor could provide supporting evidence that a particular group is disadvantaged, so that such "positive discrimination" can be justified to Federal and Provincial authorities.
The University library system consists of the Leddy Library, housing the main collection, the Paul Martin Law Library, an autonomous, associated library, and the Paul E. Vandall Map Library, housed in the Department of Geography. The Leddy Library also houses the Curriculum Resource Centre, a specialized collection of K-12 materials for Faculty of Education students. The principal objectives of the libraries are to develop collections in support of instructional and research programs, and to provide reference and information services to assist the university community in making maximum use of materials available. A policy of open access to the collections affords the reader opportunity to browse at leisure, or to exploit in depth the literature of a field of special interest.
Seating is available for 1,200 readers in a variety of general seating facilities, including open and closed carrels.
The collection contains 2,375,500 volumes of print material, 1,846,400 microform (volume equivalent) items and 350,000 government documents. About 8,550 current periodicals and serials are received, including important newspapers, both foreign and domestic. The library system has extensive collections of Canadian federal and provincial government documents and publications of major international organizations.
A complete range of photocopying, microform and audio-visual equipment is available. Access to several databases is provided on CD ROM, and an on-line search service is available.
The Library is fully automated, using the NOTIS system for acquisitions, cataloguing and circulation. The on-line, public access catalogue (LUIS) is available through terminals in the library or off-site, via personal microcomputer and modem.
Computing Services is located in the Computer Centre, on the south end of the CAW Student Centre. Computing Services provides a full range of facilities and services for students, faculty and staff. The Helpdesk, Computing Consultants and operational staff are located on the main floor of the building. The lower level houses the Computer Lab and the Computer Classroom.
The Computer Lab is open from 8:00 a.m. to 2:00 a.m., seven days a week, during the Fall and Winter terms. During Christmas holidays and summer, the Lab operates on a shorter schedule. The Lab is always staffed by a Student Consultant to assist people. The UNIX Server and IBM mainframe operate from 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 a.m. They can be accessed from the Computer Lab, many other locations on campus and from home using a dial-up modem. The Helpdesk is staffed between 8:30 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. during working days. Consulting support is available during normal business hours.
The personal computers in the Computer Lab can be used by simply producing a student card. To use the UNIX server or the mainframe a Userid is required, which can be obtained through the departmental Computer Coordinator.
The following is the list of major facilities available:
The UNIX server can be accessed using X-terminals or microcomputers (with appropriate software) from various locations across campus. Fortran, IMSL, C, SPSS, SAS, SAS/GRAPH and MAPLE are some of the software available on the server. By the middle of 1994, this will be the major facility for instruction and research, replacing the mainframe.
The system can be accessed from terminals in the Computer Lab, a number of locations across the campus and from microcomputers using a hard-wired modem or from home using a dial-up modem. The IBM 4381 runs the CMS operating system. Fortran, IMSL, PL/I, COBOL, SPSS, SAS, SAS/GRAPH, BMDP, LISREL and Script/GML are some of the software available on the system.
An eight-colour Calcomp plotter is available on CMS. Output from GML and SAS/GRAPH can also be sent to the laser printer. (There is a nominal page charge for using the laser printer.)
The Computer Lab houses three JANET networks and a NOVELL network. Each JANET network has sixteen microcomputers with WordPerfect, SPSS/PC, student versions of Lotus 1-2-3 and dBASE III plus and IBM assistant series software. The NOVELL network has seventeen 486 microcomputers and provides the same software as a JANET network, with the exception of IBM assistance series and also offers MAPLE and CorelDraw.
Computing Services offers the following services to students:
Helpdesk: Single-point problem solving for telephone or walk-in contact, for any computer related problems. Solutions requiring longer or multiple contacts will be referred to the Computing Consultants.
Consulting: Consulting is available on any computing problem for graduate students and faculty members. Undergraduate students can use this service for specialized, non-assignment related problems.
Training: Computing Consultants offer lunch-time lectures and seminars on a variety of topics during each term. The seminars are open to all students at no cost. The schedules are posted in the Computer Lab and are published in Newsline and in Computing Services publications, copies of which are sent to the departmental Computer Coordinators.
An extensive HELP facility and on-line PUBLIC files are available on the systems to provide detailed information and help.
Computing Services publishes a newsletter called In Sight, which contains technical information for the active computer user. It is published monthly during Fall and Winter terms and is placed in the Computer Lab and in other buildings where computing facilities are available.
For Academic Advising, Career Planning and Placement, Financial Counselling, Students with Special Needs, International Students, and Aboriginal Education Counselling, see "Student Affairs," 33.3.
For Medical Facilities, see "Student Services," 33.2.
For Campus Ministry, see "Student Services," 33.2.
Located in two houses on Sunset Avenue, with offices at 326 Sunset, and also at Room 2104 in the C.A.W. Student Centre, the Psychological Services Centre provides confidential aid to students, staff and faculty members in dealing with crisis situations and periods of emotional duress, while at the same time promoting individual growth experiences. The staff includes one consulting psychologist, one consulting psychiatrist, four clinical psychologists, several psychology interns, and other graduate students from the Department of Psychology.
Methods of counselling can vary from individual sessions to group, family, or couple therapy. The Centre also conducts workshops in such areas as personal growth or skill training, which includes issues of self-enhancement, assertiveness, and dealing with interpersonal issues.
Appointments can be made in person or by calling the receptionist at either 973-7012 or 253-4232, Ext. 7012. Services are free to students.
The Psychological Services Centre is closed for the month of August for staff vacation.
The Office of the Ombudsperson and Race Relations Officer assists students in the resolution of conflict. This office offers students objective and confidential advice and assistance with academic or non-academic problems, race relations issues and other areas of special concern to students. Complaints pertaining to the University administration, departments or units, which have not been resolved through the usual grievance channels will be addressed.
The Office of the Ombudsperson and Race Relations Officer is completely independent of the administration and has ben empowered to investigate all complaints received. As well, it is mandated to recommend changes in institutional policies and procedures wherever warranted, so that unfairness and inequities can be reduced.
Complaints, concerns or questions should be directed to the Office, 310 Sunset Ave., or call 253-4232, ext. 3400.
Student Services provides facilities, services, programs, and activities designed to meet the diverse needs of the campus community. In addition to the administration of specific student services departments, the Office of Student Services facilitates liaison with student organizations, the general student body, and other sectors of the University.
The University residences house about one fifth of the student population. Residents come from many regions of Canada, the United States and overseas, giving the campus a cosmopolitan atmosphere. A sincere concern for scholarship prevails at the University of Windsor and residence living assists residents in making a smooth transition to university life.
Students interested in living in residence may request information about the application process, the residences, and residence life when applying for entrance to the University. Questions about residence or the application procedures should be directed to the Office of Residence Services.
Residence tours can be arranged through the Office of Secondary School Liaison, and off-campus housing information is available at the front desk of the University Centre.
The University of Windsor has eight residences, four on campus and four located on the perimeter of the campus.
The Quad is comprised of four halls, Cody, Laurier, Macdonald and Cartier. They are located on the south corner of the campus near the main food service outlet, Vanier Hall. Each co-ed residence houses undergraduate students in double rooms.
Electa Hall is located near the Faculty of Law and the Leddy Library. This co-ed residence houses graduate students. Electa is comprised of the "Annex", a dorm-style facility offering double rooms with a wash-basin, and the "Main," which offers split doubles and singles. Room assignments are done on points based on age, years in residence and course of study. Total points will determine the room type and size of single room assigned.
Huron Hall is located ten minutes from the heart of campus near the St. Denis Fieldhouse. This co-ed residence offers double rooms with private baths to undergraduate students entering their second to fourth year in residence at the University of Windsor.
Tecumseh Hall is situated next to Huron Hall, Tecumseh is an apartment-style residence. It offers the convenience of on-campus living with the benefits of an apartment. Each unit is furnished and contains a living room, kitchen, storage closet, bathroom and two, three, or four bedrooms; linen and utensils are not supplied. When applying to Tecumseh, students are encouraged to apply in groups of four.
Clark Residence is a 224-bed, townhouse-style residence located on Sunset Avenue at Walnut Street. The Tudor-style units house seven to ten students each in single and double bedrooms, full kitchens, bathrooms, living rooms, dining rooms, storage rooms, and balconies. A limited number of studio (single) and two-bedroom apartments are also available.
The Food Plan is compulsory in all residences.
For further information regarding the Residence or Food Plan please call Residence Services at (519) 253-4232, Ext. 3279 or 3280.
Conference Services assists students, faculty, and staff in planning their workshops, luncheons, dances, receptions, and banquets. All arrangements for meeting rooms and banquet rooms, liquor, food services, and the physical set-ups are made through this office. Another service offered by Conference Services is summer accommodation to non-registered students, alumni, and other visitors. Residence rooms and apartments are available.
For further information call (519) 253-4232, Ext. 3276 or 3277, or visit Room 12, Vanier Hall.
The dining program at the University of Windsor is designed with taste, nutrition, and convenience in mind. Seven restaurants, a pizza delivery operation, and two convenience stores are located on campus and serve both the resident student and the student living off campus. Campus meal plans are available to both residents and commuters.
Locations in Vanier Hall include the main dining room, Vanier, the Crocodile, the University Club, and the Mini Mart convenience store. The Marketplace, the Kiosk, and Antonelli's Pizzeria are located in the CAW Student Centre. Dividends, in the Faculty of Business Administration Building, offers a variety of healthy choices. The Gavel, located in the Faculty of Law Building, offers "grab and go" items for nutrition on the run.
For further information regarding campus meal plans, please call Food Services at (519) 253-4232, Ext. 3272.
The CAW Student Centre is a focal point of campus activity. On the main floor of the building, the Information Desk provides a variety of services, including general campus information, processing of student I.D. cards for all full- and part-time students, locker rentals, and an off-campus housing directory. The Marketplace offers a complete variety of food items throughout the day.
In addition to a variety of meeting rooms that can be reserved by both campus and community groups, the CAW Student Centre also houses offices of the Students' Administrative Council (SAC), the Graduate Student Society (GSS), Womyn's Centre, the Organization of Part-time University Students (OPUS), Student Media Services, The Lance (student newspaper), CJAM (student radio), the Games Room, and the "Moose" Pub. The CAW Student Centre is also home to Medical and Health Services, the SAC Used Bookstore, a pharmacy, and a travel agency, in addition to a variety of lounge and study areas. While hours of operation for various areas and services within the building vary, the CAW Student Centre itself is open 24 hours a day, seven days a week, throughout the Fall and Winter terms.
Medical Office: The University maintains an office, staffed by full-time and part-time physicians and nurses, who will counsel, examine, and advise students who have acute or chronic medical problems. In addition, they have a major interest in Health education and life-style choices, to help prevent later illness and to preserve optimum health throughout life. The medical office is located on the second floor, CAW Student Centre. Office. Hours are 0900 hrs. to 1700 hrs. daily, Monday to Friday.
Ontario Health Insurance Plan: This plan (OHIP) covers all in-patient and out-patient hospital and medical services, and is available free of charge to all Ontario residents. Each person now has an individual card, not a "family" card as in the past. Visa students are given an individual card for which they must apply in person with their Student Authorization and which is valid for the length of their visa.
Application forms may be obtained at the University Student Health Office, CAW Student Centre.
For the convenience of students, the University maintains a Bookstore located at Wyandotte and Sunset (next to the Odette Faculty of Business Building), where textbooks, supplies and clothing may be purchased. Special orders are also taken.
The Bookstore is open year-round, from 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, and from 10:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. on Saturdays (except holiday weekends).
For the first two weeks of classes in September, the Bookstore is open until 8:00 p.m., Monday through Thurdsay, with regular hours on Friday;
For the first two weeks of classes in January, the Bookstore is open until 7:00 p.m., Monday through Thurdsay, with regular hours on Friday;
For the balance of September, October, January and February, the Bookstore remains open on Mondays until 7:00 p.m.;
For Intersession, the Bookstore is open until 7:00 p.m. for the first week of classes; for Summer Session, regular hours are observed.
The Campus Nook is open from 10:00 a.m. to 2:00 p.m., Monday to Friday, in the C.A.W. Student Centre.
Although the University is non-sectarian in its support of campus religious life, it is aware of the importance of ethical and moral influences in the development of the individual. Assumption University, Iona College, and Canterbury College are affiliated or federated parts of the University of Windsor and are committed to providing services for all the students of the University. Students, therefore, have access to the spiritual counsel of chaplains representing various denominations.
For the student who experiences a degree of uncertainty with meeting the academic writing requirements at the University of Windsor, assistance and instruction is available from the Academic Writing Centre. The instruction provided is non-credit, individualized, and sequentially covers all elements of the essay writing process. An enroled University of Windsor student may register at any time by telephoning 253-4232, Ext. 3405 or by stopping in the office located at 470 Sunset Avenue.
Upon student request, writing workshops, individual tutorials, and computerized diagnostic assessments are readily available. Daily workshops, embracing grammar and mechanics, writing style, in addition to essay writing skills, are scheduled conveniently throughout each term. Appointments for tutorials are reserved for students in need of intensive instruction as indicated by the diagnostic assessment and/or the writing sample.
The Co-op Education & Student Placement office assists students in the areas of career development, job placement and employment search strategies. A career information centre which houses educational calendars, employer literature, directories, videotapes, reference books and other resource materials is available for researching career areas and employers.
Career-related programs and services are offered through workshops and counselling in the areas of career exploration, resume writing, job search, and interview techniques. Special events featuring alumni and recruiters are offered throughout the year to provide career information and better prepare students for the job market.
Job descriptions for on- and off-campus, part-time, full-time, summer, overseas, and volunteer positions are posted on our job boards.
In addition, the office co-ordinates and administers all co-operative education programs on campus.
The Special Needs Office facilitates the integration of students with special needs by providing individualized services and accommodations necessary to eliminate as much as possible the effect of a disability. The office provides counselling, professor liaison, exam accommodation and contact with notetakers, interpreters, scribes, and mobility assistants. A computer and access technology facility has also been established which contains specialized equipment. Individual counselling prior to registration is strongly recommended, and students are invited to contact the Special Needs Co-ordinator, whose office is located on the first floor of Dillon Hall, in the Office of Student Affairs.
Located on the third floor of Dillon Hall, Room 362, the Aboriginal Education Counsellor provides an academic, social and cultural support system to students. The counsellor will liaise with various departments, schools, and faculties and encourage participation in all workshops and activities that will result in improved study habits and personal satisfaction with campus life. For more information about the A.E.C., call 253-4232, Ext. 3465.
Assistance, advice and information regarding queries, orientation, general counselling, U.S. Visitor's Visa and referral services can be obtained at the International Students' Centre on the first floor of Cody Hall and through the International Students' Advisor. The Centre provides a lounge for organizations' clubs' functions and meetings, and houses the office of the International Students' Society (I.S.S.). For more information about the I.S.S., call 253-2900; for assistance from the International Students' Advisor, please visit the office of call 253-4232, Ext. 3901.
The Student Awards Office administers the Ontario Student Assistance Program (including the Canada Student Loans Plan) as well as the University's emergency loan plan on behalf of all University of Windsor students.
Information on undergraduate scholarships, bursaries and other awards may be obtained from this office.
Graduate students wishing information on non-OSAP awards should consult the Office of Graduate Studies.
Information about awards, loans and bursaries is available in Room 122 Dillon Hall.
The University reserves the right to make changes without prior notice in the various fee schedules, as well as changes in rules and regulations and the revision or cancellation of particular courses and programs. The acceptance of fees does not necessarily imply approval of registration.
The following regulations apply to all students.
Fees are due and payable before the commencement of regular term classes. (See 32, "Calendar of the Academic Year" for specific dates.) As a convenience, students may pay their tuition fees at any time prior to this day. It is the responsibility of the student to ensure that deadlines are met.
Cheques or other remittances must be made payable to The University of Windsor and must be received by the Cashier's Office prior to the above-mentioned due date. The student's name, identification number, address and telephone number should be recorded in the upper portion of the form of the remittance to ensure that the records are properly credited.
Students may pay their fees at any branch of any chartered bank in Canada, using a remittance form available at the Cashier's Office. If a student has a grant and/or loan (e.g., OSAP), the loan must be assigned to the University to pay the fees.
Students who are unable to complete payment of fees by the prescribed due date must arrange a fee deferment. Deferments are permitted under the following circumstances:
(a)if a student has evidence of having been awarded a Canada Student Loan or an Ontario Student Loan.
(b)if a student has evidence of having been awarded a scholarship, bursary or similar award, which may be used to pay the fees. (Any known difference between the amount of the award and the fees must be paid on or before the above-mentioned due date.)
Students who are sponsored and require invoices to be sent for collection of fees must bring the appropriate documentation to the Accounts Receivable Office, 1st Floor, Windsor Hall North.
Full-time and part-time students who have not paid fees prior to the above-mentioned due date will be assessed a late payment charge according to the following schedule:
For balances less than $50.00
$ 0.00
For balances from $50.01 to $300.00
$20.00
For balances from $300.01 to $600.00
$30.00
For balances from $600.01 to $1,000.00
$40.00
For balances from $1,000.01 to $2,000.00
$50.00
For balances from $2,000.01 to $3,000.00
$60.00
For balances over $3,000.01
$70.00
A monthly interest charge will be levied on all outstanding accounts. The rate applicable will be in excess of the bank prime rate.
A student who has failed to comply with the above regulations may have his or her registration cancelled as of the date on which the unpaid fees were due.
Information concerning academic results of any student who has an overdue debt owing to the University shall be withheld until the debt is settled.
Students who are graduating and who have an outstanding debt will be permitted to attend Convocation, but they will not receive their diplomas until all their debts are settled.
Any student who has an overdue debt owing to the University may not be permitted to re-register until the debt is settled.
A student who has not made a satisfactory fee arrangement by the appropriate fee payment due date (see above, 2.9.1) may be subject to cancellation of his/her registration. Appropriate charges will be assessed effective the date of cancellation.
Any student whose registration has been cancelled for default of payment is required to apply for reinstatement of registration at the Office of the Registrar. If the application is approved, a $50.00 reinstatement fee is added to any other assessable charges.
Overdue accounts must be paid by cash, certified cheque, or money order.
Any student who has an unresolved grievance concerning fees or other charges may present an explanatory letter to the Credit Manager, Cashier's Office.
A special certificate in a form acceptable to Revenue Canada authorities is required in order that the student may claim a tax credit for eligible tuition fees for income tax purposes. This certificate will be mailed out by February 28 to all students whose accounts were paid in full by December 31 of the previous year.
Note: Student incidental fees and other society fees are not allowable for tax purposes and consequently are not included as eligible for tuition education credits.
Scholarships and other awards paid to students through the Finance Office are usually credited to the student's account on the basis of one half payable in each term. A cheque for any balance owing to the student will be available to the student at the Cashier's Office.
October 31—First Installment
February 28—Second Installment
Graduate students who, for any reason, wish to withdraw from the University must notify, in writing, the Office of Graduate Studies and Research, as otherwise resumption of graduate study at this University may be difficult or impossible.
Full-time undergraduate students who intend to withdraw completely from the University are required to undergo an interview and complete the appropriate forms at the Office of Student Affairs.
Part-time students who find it necessary to withdraw from a course or from the University entirely are required to notify the Registrar in person or by registered mail and to give their reasons for withdrawal.
Notice by telephone is not acceptable. Failure to attend classes does not constitute a withdrawal. Full refund will be given to part-time students enrolled in a course that has been cancelled by the University. Full- and part-time students withdrawing from regular courses during the periods indicated below will be assessed fees as indicated.
TERM REFUND
|
Week(s) One and Two |
Week(s) One and Two |
|
Week(s) Three, Four and Five |
Partial Refund |
|
After Week Five |
No Refund |
Refunds resulting from complete withdrawals will be available no earlier than six weeks after the date of withdrawal. Refunds resulting from net course drops will be available only on request.
The University of Windsor offers an incentive of free tuition and incidental fees for students sixty years of age and over. It is felt that people in this group might wish to avail themselves of the University facilities, not only for degree purposes, but perhaps for personal enrichment and the fuller utilization of their leisure time. If you feel that your needs can be served according to this program, we encourage and invite you to contact the Division of Continuing Education. This applies to Canadian citizens only.
The Board of Governors reserves the right to make changes without notice in the published schedule of fees and charges if, in its opinion, circumstances so require. Any such changes will be reflected in the Self-Assessment form issued through the Cashier's Office before registration. It is the responsibility of the student to obtain this information.
The schedule of fees changes annually. Contact the Cashier's Office for information on the current schedule of fees, which outlines tuition, incidental, and other fees.
The following miscellaneous fees and charges are payable as incurred:
Part-time studies application fee
$25.00
Letter of Permission
$25.00
Change of course
$ 5.00
Overload course
Part-time tuition fee
Special and supplemental exam (per course)
Regular time, on campus
$10.00
Outside regular time, on campus
$20.00
Off campus
$40.00
Evaluation of documents
$40.00
Transcript of record
$ 5.00
Duplicate T2202A
Current year
$ 3.00
Previous year
$ 5.00
Late registration (full-time students)
$30.00
Returned cheque charge
$25.00per cheque
Registration reinstatement
$50.00
For information regarding residences, meal plan, residence deposits, and refund policies, please contact the Office of the Associate Director of Residence and Conference Services, Room 49, Vanier Hall, University of Windsor, Windsor Ontario, N9B 3P4.